ViBE - CP6000 UserManual V04.10 Eda PDF

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform
User Manual
Release 04.10
Edition A
ContactThomsonVideoNetworks
Contents
Contents
Preface ............................................................ 13
Chapter 1
Overview ......................................................... 19
Product Overview .................................................................. 20
Purpose ....................................................................................... 20
Description.................................................................................. 20
Slot number ........................................................................... 20
MPEG board ........................................................................... 20
Modulator............................................................................... 20
Power Supply......................................................................... 20
Future Proof Contribution Platforms.................................... 21
Main Features ............................................................................. 22
System Applications .................................................................. 24
Product Description ............................................................... 26

Front Panel.................................................................................. 26
Rear Panel ................................................................................... 26
Manager Board ...................................................................... 27
MPEG Board........................................................................... 27
Modulator Board.................................................................... 28
Chapter 2
Installation and startup ................................... 29
Unpacking .............................................................................. 30
Removing the Protective Film .............................................. 31
Installing the Device (Steps) ................................................. 31
Mounting in Rack................................................................... 32
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform Installation Requirements.... 32
Ventilation................................................................................... 32
Mounting CP6100 Platform(s) in a Rack ................................... 35
Mounting a CP6100 Platform in a 1/2 19 Rack................... 35
Mounting one or two CP6100 Platforms in a 19 Rack ...... 36
Cabling ........................................................................................ 40
EMC Ground ............................................................................... 40
Power Supply and Protective Ground ...................................... 41
Power Inlet ............................................................................. 41
Power Supply Cord(s) ........................................................... 42
Connecting the Signal Cables............................................... 44

On the Manager Board .............................................................. 44
On each MPEG Board used as Encoder ................................... 46
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

User Manual Edition A
Contents
Dual Channels MPEG Board .................................................

Single Channel MPEG Board................................................
On each MPEG board used as Decoder ...................................
Dual Channels MPEG Board .................................................
Single Channel MPEG Board................................................
On a Modulator board ...............................................................
46
46
47
47
48
49
Powering Up ......................................................................... 50
Performing the Initial Settings............................................. 51
Accessing the Command Line Interface...................................
Entering the Login and Password.............................................
Getting Help................................................................................
Setting Initial Parameters ..........................................................
Commands to Reboot the Equipment .................................
Commands Relating to IP Parameters .................................
Commands Relating to the Date and Time .........................
Commands Relating to the NTP Server...............................
Commands Relating to SysName, SysContact and
SysLocation............................................................................
Commands Relating to Community Strings .......................
51
52
53
54
55
55
57
58
60
61
Chapter 3
Chassis Configuration ..................................... 63
Populating the Chassis with MPEG or Modulator Boards. 64
Chapter 4
Front Panel Operation ..................................... 67
Front Panel Description ........................................................ 68
Foreword..................................................................................... 68
Description and overview.......................................................... 68
Setting LCD screen brightness and contrast............................ 70
Screen Description ............................................................... 71

Screen menu tree ....................................................................... 71
Summary of screen functions ................................................... 73
Device booting screen ............................................................... 73
Status screen .............................................................................. 74
Main menu screen...................................................................... 75
Alarms screen............................................................................. 75
Setup screen ............................................................................... 76
IP Setting screen.................................................................... 76
Recall screen .......................................................................... 77
Reboot screen ........................................................................ 79
LCD CAL screen ..................................................................... 79
Info screen .................................................................................. 80
Main Board Information screen.......................................... 80
Temperature Information screen ....................................... 80
Configuration screen.................................................................. 81
Parameters that can be edited from the device front panel 81
4
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Contents
Procedure for changing parameter values .......................... 87
Chapter 5
Web Browser Interface .................................... 89
Reaching the GUI................................................................... 90
Compatible Web Browsers........................................................ 90
Definition of Users ..................................................................... 90
Setting up the link between the PC and the Device ................ 91
Screen Layout ........................................................................ 93

Panels .......................................................................................... 93
Customizing Configuration Tab Layout.................................... 94
Status Bar.................................................................................... 95
Information............................................................................. 95
Login Name and Password................................................... 96
Monitoring Panel........................................................................ 98
Purpose................................................................................... 98
Main Window......................................................................... 98
Configuration Panel ................................................................. 102
Management Tab................................................................. 102
Statistics Tab........................................................................ 103
Ip Counters Tab.................................................................... 111
Automation Tab ................................................................... 113
Configuration Tabs .............................................................. 115
Alarms Panel............................................................................. 118
Purpose................................................................................. 118
Main Window....................................................................... 118
Basic Settings....................................................................... 121

Foreword................................................................................... 121
Creating a New Configuration................................................. 121
Setting an MPEG Encoder ....................................................... 123
Creating the Encoder Branch.............................................. 123
Selecting the Slot................................................................. 125
Selecting the Source ........................................................... 125
Creating the Compressed Video Component.................... 126
Setting the MPEG Program (DVB Service) ........................ 128
Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) - Dual Channels
MPEG board ......................................................................... 129
Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) - Single Channel
MPEG board ......................................................................... 132
Setting the Transport Stream ............................................. 136
Encapsulating TS over ASI ................................................. 138
Encapsulating TS over IP .................................................... 139
Linking TS to Modulator ..................................................... 141
Linking TS to MPTS ............................................................. 142
Setting the Ethernet Interface............................................. 142
Setting an MPEG Decoder ....................................................... 145
Creating the Decoder Branch.............................................. 145
Selecting the Slot................................................................. 146
Selecting the ASI Input Interface........................................ 147
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Contents
Selecting the Ethernet Input Interface ............................... 147

Selecting the IP Rx Stream ................................................. 149
Setting the Service Configuration...................................... 151
Setting the SDI Output Interface ........................................ 153
Setting the Audio Output Interface (Single Channel MPEG board)
154
Setting a Modulator ................................................................. 156
Creating the Modulator Branch .......................................... 156
Selecting the Slot ................................................................ 157
Selecting the TS Source...................................................... 157
Creating ASI Output Monitoring ........................................ 158
Setting Modulation.............................................................. 159
Setting the RF Output.......................................................... 160
Applying or Sending the Configuration to the Equipment... 161
Advanced Settings.............................................................. 162

Advanced Settings, MPEG Encoder........................................
Creating an Ancillary Component......................................
Creating a VBI Component .................................................
Creating an SCTE 35 Component.......................................
Creating an MPTS across MPEG Encoder Boards ............
Adding an External Component to a service ....................
Setting Automatic Encoding configuration .......................
Advanced settings, MPEG Decoder ........................................
Setting TS Redundancy ......................................................
Creating ASI to IP and IP to ASI Gateways ............................
Setting an ASI to IP Gateway, MPEG Encoder ..................
Setting an IP to ASI Gateway, MPEG Decoder..................
Setting Scrambling / Descrambling........................................
Setting Automation..................................................................
Principle................................................................................
Creating a Schedule ............................................................
Schedule Example...............................................................
162
162
164
166
168
171
175
189
189
194
194
197
200
202
202
203
205
GUI Description................................................................... 206

Dialog Boxes Related to MPEG Encoder ................................
Slot x - Dual-Encoder Dialog Box .......................................
SDI Input Dialog Box ...........................................................
Video Encoder Dialog Box ..................................................
Audio Inputs Dialog Box .....................................................
Audio Encoder Dialog Box..................................................
Ancillary Encoder Dialog Box .............................................
VBI Encoder Dialog Box ......................................................
Output Service Dialog Box .................................................
Transport Stream Dialog Box.............................................
ASI Output Dialog Box ........................................................
IP Tx Dialog Box ..................................................................
LAN x Dialog Box ................................................................
Dialog Boxes Related to MPEG Decoder................................
Slot x - Dual-Decoder Dialog Box.......................................
ASI INPUT Dialog Box.........................................................
LAN x Dialog Box ................................................................
IP Rx Dialog Box ..................................................................
Input Service Dialog Box ....................................................
6
206
206
207
209
215
217
221
223
225
226
228
229
232
234
234
235
235
236
238
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Contents
SDI Output: Pair x Dialog Box............................................. 242

Audio Outputs Dialog Box .................................................. 245
Dialog Boxes Related to the Modulator ................................. 246
Slot x - Modulator Dialog Box ............................................ 246
TS Selection Dialog Box...................................................... 247
ASI Monitoring Dialog Box ................................................. 247
Modulation Dialog Box ....................................................... 248
RF Output Dialog Box.......................................................... 250
Dialog Boxes Related to LAN 1 / LAN 2 ports on the Manager board
(CP6000) .................................................................................... 253
LAN 1 (Agg 1) LAN 2 (Agg 2) Dialog Box .......................... 254
Chapter 6
Servicing ....................................................... 255
Ordering and Installing Software Options......................... 256
Introduction .............................................................................. 256
Accessing the Command Line Interface................................. 256
Entering the Login and Password........................................... 256
Ordering / Installing software options.................................... 256
Ordering software options process.................................... 256
Installing software options process ................................... 257
Displaying Software Options (lsopt) .................................. 257
Displaying the Equipment Code (eqcod) ........................... 258
Uninstalling a Software Option (rmopt) ............................ 258
Installing a Software Option (insopt) ................................. 259
Recovering Lost Keys .......................................................... 259
Displaying Unit information ............................................... 260

Displaying Field Replaceable Unit information (frudisp)...... 260
Installing or Replacing an LCD Front Panel (CP6000) ....... 261

Replacing a MPEG Board .................................................... 262
Replacing a Modulator Board............................................. 264
Cleaning the Air Inlet Grill................................................... 265
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting ............................................ 267
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) .................................... 268
Troubleshooting Procedure ................................................ 269
Generating the Report ............................................................. 269
Getting the Report From the Equipment................................ 270
Chapter 8
Tools ............................................................. 271
Equipment Setup Tool ........................................................ 272
Introduction .............................................................................. 272
Description................................................................................ 272
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
Contents
Overview .............................................................................. 272

Description of the Graphical User Interface ...................... 273
PC Setup ................................................................................... 276
Operation .................................................................................. 276
Launching Equipment Setup .............................................. 277
Entering the User Name and Password ............................ 277
Managing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform in the
Equipment Area................................................................... 279
Download Area .................................................................... 285
Getting Information in the Messages Area ....................... 288
Download application ........................................................ 289

Overview ...................................................................................
Operation ..................................................................................
Installing and running the application ...............................
Screen description...............................................................
Download procedure...........................................................
Other application commands .............................................
Status messages..................................................................
Error messages....................................................................
289
290
290
292
293
297
298
299
SigEditor Tool ..................................................................... 300

Overview ................................................................................... 300
Operation .................................................................................. 300
Appendix A
Technical Specifications ............................... 305
General Device Specifications ........................................... 306
Electrical Specifications ...........................................................
Power supply - ViBE CP6000 ..............................................
Power supply - ViBE CP6100 ..............................................
Power Consumption............................................................
Mechanical Features ................................................................
Dimensions ..........................................................................
Weight ..................................................................................
Miscellaneous ......................................................................
Ventilation.................................................................................
Reliability ..................................................................................
CP6000 / CP6100 Boot phase duration ...................................
306
306
309
310
311
311
314
314
315
316
316
Chassis Specifications ........................................................ 317

CP6000 Chassis ........................................................................ 317
CP6100 Chassis ........................................................................ 317
Manager Board Specifications .......................................... 318

Processing ................................................................................
Interfaces ..................................................................................
TS over IP and Control Command on Same Port .............
License management...............................................................
318
319
323
324
MPEG Encoder Specifications ........................................... 327

Encoder Block Diagram ........................................................... 327
Dual Channels MPEG Encoder Board ................................ 327
8
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Contents
Single Channel MPEG Encoder Board ............................... 328

Interface Specifications............................................................ 329
MPEG system layer .................................................................. 338
Video Processing...................................................................... 339
Input video encoding formats ............................................ 339
Horizontal Picture Rescaling ............................................... 339
Picture Filtering.................................................................... 339
Video processing ................................................................. 340
Audio processing ..................................................................... 343
VBI/ANC processing ................................................................. 346
VBI processing (SD Format)................................................ 346
ANC processing (SD and HD Format) ................................ 347
Automatic Encoding configuration......................................... 348
SDI input redundancy .............................................................. 349
Scrambling................................................................................ 350
ASI Input for external components......................................... 351
ASI to IP Gateway..................................................................... 352
Multiplexing Across Boards .................................................... 353
SCTE 104 to SCTE 35 ............................................................... 354
Contribution & Distribution Over Unmanaged Networks..... 355
Overview .............................................................................. 355
Licensing ............................................................................ 356
Maximum operational performances ................................ 356
Max FEC overhead & FEC block settings........................... 357
MPEG Decoder Specifications ............................................ 359

Decoder Block Diagram ........................................................... 359
Dual Channels MPEG Decoder Board ................................ 359
Single Channel MPEG Decoder Board............................... 360
TS Processing ........................................................................... 367
Video Processing...................................................................... 368
Video Rescaling ........................................................................ 368
HD to SD down-conversion ................................................ 370
Audio Processing ..................................................................... 372
VBI/ANC Processing ................................................................. 373
VBI/ANC Processing in Video Rescaling mode ................. 374
TS Redundancy ........................................................................ 375
Descrambling............................................................................ 376
IP to ASI Gateway..................................................................... 376
Contribution & Distribution Over UnManaged Networks..... 377
DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications ....................... 378

Modulator Block Diagram........................................................ 378
Miscellaneous Specifications .................................................. 381
DVB-S Specifications ............................................................... 383
DVB-DSNG Specifications ....................................................... 383
DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X Specifications........................................... 384
Signaling ................................................................................... 384
Diplexer Specifications ............................................................ 385
Standard Compliance.......................................................... 386

Certifications and Environmental Specifications .............. 388
Ordering Guide .................................................................... 392
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
Contents
Base Systems ...........................................................................

Hardware Options ....................................................................
MPEG Board.........................................................................
Modulator Board .................................................................
CP6000 Front Panel .............................................................
CP6100 Adaptation Kit ........................................................
Audio Cable..........................................................................
AC Mains Cables..................................................................
Software Options .....................................................................
Product Release ...................................................................
Encoder ................................................................................
Decoder ................................................................................
Modulator.............................................................................
Bundles .....................................................................................
393
394
394
394
394
395
395
395
395
395
396
398
399
400
Appendix ............................................................................. 402

Audio Breakout Cable .............................................................. 402
Video Profiles & Bitrates recommendations.......................... 403
Appendix B
Safety Instructions ....................................... 405
Safety Summary (English) ................................................
Sicherheit - berblick (Deutsch) .......................................
Consignes de scurit (Franais) ......................................
Safety Instructions for Finland, Norway, Sweden ..........
406
410
415
420
Appendix C
Regulatory Notices ....................................... 421
Appendix D
Customer Services ........................................ 423
Support Center Contacts ....................................................
Warranty ..............................................................................
Services ...............................................................................
Spare Parts ..........................................................................
Returning Equipment .........................................................
Repackaging for Shipment ................................................
Long Term Product Support ..............................................
Recycling the Product.........................................................
10
424
425
426
426
426
426
427
428
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Contents
Appendix E
Alarms ........................................................... 429
Glossary ........................................................ 431
Index ............................................................. 447
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

11
Contents
12
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Preface Standard Documentation Set
Preface
Standard Documentation Set
The standard ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 documentation set consists of:
a User Manual
a Quick Start Guide
a V04.10 Release Note
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 User Manual contains background

information about the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms, and describes
operating procedures. This manual can be used while learning about
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100, and for enhancing your basic knowledge of the
product.
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Quick Start Guide contains information about
installing and configuring the equipment.
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 V04.10 Release Note describes the # Release
features. It presents the new features and gives the new commercial
codifications, fixed issues, known issues, Interoperability and limitations.
Software version
This manual covers the functionality of the software version 04.10 and
higher of the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms.
This manual continues to be relevant to subsequent software versions
where the functionality of the equipment has not changed. When a new
software version changes the functionality of the product, a new version
of this manual is provided.
About this Manual

This manual is written for Operators of the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Platforms.
This manual should be kept in a safe place for reference for the life
time of the equipment. If passing the equipment to a third party,
please ensure to pass all relevant documentation including this
manual.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

13
Preface About this Manual
The manual is organized into the following chapters and appendixes:
Chapter 1 Overview gives a general description of the equipment

and its main features.
Chapter 2 Installation and setup provides the procedures required

for device installation and initial configuration and describes how to
connect the device to other devices in your system.
Chapter 3 Chassis Configuration gives the rules to be observed

for populating the chassis with MPEG boards.
Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation describes how to use the Front

Panel of the equipment.
Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface details how to use the Web

Browser Graphical User Interface to configure the equipment.
Chapter 6 Servicing describes how to install software options via

the Command Line Interface and gives some recommendations for
cleaning the air inlet grill.
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting describes the procedure to follow when

you face any problem with the equipment. The procedure consists of
generating a Reportfile.bin file and sending it to Thomson Video
Networks Customer Service. This file is critical to provide efficient
support.
Chapter 8 Tools describes the Equipment Setup tool and the

Download application delivered in the CD-ROM with the product.
They are used to download new product packages to one or more
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms. The SigEditor tool used to edit
SI/PSI tables is also described in this chapter.
Appendix A Technical Specifications gives specifications of the

device, specifications of the board configured as either an MPEG
encoder, MPEG decoder or Modulator, Device compliance and an
Ordering guide to order the device and its options.
Appendix B Safety Instructions gives instructions related to risk of

fire, electric shock or injury to persons. This important section is
available in English, German and French versions.
Appendix C Regulatory Notices provides device compliances

regarding FCC emission control, Canadian EMC compliance, EN55022
Class A recommendations, VCCI Class A recommendations and Laser
compliance.
Appendix D Customer Services indicates what you should do if

you have a problem with equipment, whether you need to repair it, to
return it or to dispose of it.
Appendix E Alarms gives the list of alarms which may be visible in

the Alarm panel. For each alarm the diagnostics, action to be
performed and alarm severity are given.
A glossary can be found at the end of the manual just prior the Index.
14
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Preface Conventions Used in This Manual
Conventions Used in This Manual

Warnings, Cautions and Notes
Heed Warnings
All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be
adhered to. The manufacturer cannot be held responsible for injuries or
damages where warnings and cautions have been ignored or taken
lightly.
Read Instructions
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before this
product is operated.
Follow Instructions
All operating and use instructions should be followed.
Terms in this Manual

Safety-related statements appear in this manual in the following form:
Warning statements identify conditions or practices that may result

in personal injury or loss of life.
Caution statements identify conditions or practices that may result in

damage to equipment or other property, or which may cause
equipment crucial to your business environment to become
temporarily non-operational.
Notes provides supplementary information. They are highlighted for

emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately after the
relevant text.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

15
Preface Documentation Feedback
Formatting
Naming conventions for the interface elements and Windows elements
in this manual follow the Microsoft Manual of Style, Third Edition.
Naming conventions for MPEG-2, ATSC, and DVB structures follow the
conventions derived from the standards documents listed in
Appendix A Technical Specifications. In addition, the following
formatting conventions apply to this manual:
Pale blue text refers to specific interface elements that you are
instructed to select, click, press or clear.
Example: Select Settings from the Configuration menu.
Blue text refers to document names, sections, figures or tables.

Example: Refer to section Warnings, Cautions and Notes on page 13
for more information.
Mono-spaced text can indicate the following:
Text you enter from a keyboard

Example: Enter administrator
administrator for your password.
for
your
login
and
Paths to components on your hard drive

Example: The MIB is at the following location: C:\MIB.
Documentation Feedback
We are taking great care of our publications. Please help us to improve
them by sending your feedback with the reference of the manual at the
email address:
Email: techpubs@thomson-networks.com
Important notice
Thomson Video Networks reserves the right to make corrections,
modifications, enhancements, improvements and other changes to its
products or services at any time and to discontinue any product or
service without notice.
16
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Preface Copyrights
Copyrights
Copyright 2015 Thomson Video Networks. All rights reserved.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

17
Preface Copyrights
BLANK PAGE
18
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

1
Overview
Chapter
Introduction
This chapter gives a general description of the equipment and its main
features.
Content of this Chapter

Product Overview......................................................................page 20
Product Description...................................................................page 26
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

19
Chapter 1 Overview Product Overview
Product Overview
Purpose
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms are the ideal codec solution for very
high-quality SD or HD transmission over telecommunications links.
A Platform can transport up to 8 (CP6000) or 4 (CP6100) SD/HD channels
across ASI or IP Gigabit Ethernet, in any kind of MPEG format from
MPEG-2 SD 4:2:0 8 bit up to MPEG-4 HD 4:2:2 10 bit format.
Description
Slot number
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms are modular chassis which offer:
CP6000: 4 slots in a 1RU 19" device
CP6100: 2 slots in a 1RU 19" width device.
Each slot can be fitted with a hot swappable board. This solution allows
boards to be exchanged without disturbing the channels in use. It is a key
feature for easy setup, system expansion and maintenance.
MPEG board
Each slot can be fitted with a MPEG board. There are 2 types of MPEG
board:
The Dual channels MPEG board: It supports one or two MPEG

encoding channels or one or two MPEG decoding channels.
The Single channel MPEG board: It supports one MPEG encoding

channel or one MPEG decoding channel with audio interface.
Board configuration (encoder or decoder) and the supported MPEG

format are enabled by a software license. A single product and board for
the encoder and decoder function simplifies parts management and
training and minimizes investments.
Modulator
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms can be fitted with a
DVB-S/S2/S2X/DSNG Modulator plugged into one of the slots.
Power Supply
The ViBE CP6000 Platform can be fitted with a single AC or DC power
supply or dual AC/AC, AC/DC or DC/DC power supply. In the latter
20
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

case, should the primary power supply fail, operations automatically

continue using the backup supply.
The ViBE CP6100 Platform is fitted with a single AC power supply.
Future Proof Contribution Platforms

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform architecture is based on ATCA telecom
standard with high backplane throughput to address future applications.
It is 3Gbps SDI application (1080p50/59.97) ready.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

21
Main Features
CP6000: 1RU 19 device with four hot swappable boards
CP6100: 1RU 19 width device with 2 hot swappable boards
Single board for encoder or decoder enabled by software license
Automatic SD, HD detection and configuration according to the input

video format for encoder application
Video rescaling for decoder application
Dual SDI input per encoder with automatic redundancy
MPEG encoder & decoder board:
Video processing
- MPEG-2 SD/HD, 4:2:0 & 4:2:2, 8 bits resolution
- MPEG-4 SD/HD, 4:2:0 & 4:2:2, 8 or 10 bits resolution
- 2 x MPEG encoders or decoders per Dual channels MPEG
board (up to 8 HD in 1RU) or 1 x MPEG encoder or decoder
per Single channel MPEG board (up to 4 HD in 1RU).
Audio processing
- Audio source
- Dual channels MPEG board: SDI signal.
- Single channel MPEG board: SDI signal and Audio
External interfaces (Analog or Digital)
- Up to 8 stereo (2.0) or 2 surround (5.1) audios per video
channel
- MPEG-1 Layer II (2.0)
- AAC-LC (2.0, 5.1)(optional)
- HE-AAC (2.0, 5.1), HE-AAC v2 (2.0) (optional)
- Dolby Digital (AC3) (2.0, 5.1) (optional)
- Audio Pass-thru: Dolby E, Dolby Digital (AC3) (2.0, 5.1),
MPEG-1 Layer II (1.0, 2.0), AAC-LC (2.0, 5.1), HE-AAC (2.0,
5.1), HE-AAC v2 (2.0)
22
SD/HD Ancillary Processing
VBI Processing
Standard delay and low delay modes
Two Gigabit Ethernet ports per board
BISS mode 1, BISS E Scrambling / Descrambling (optional)
1080p50/59.94 (3Gbps SDI) hardware ready on Dual Channels

board only
Forward Error Correction (FEC) for transmission reliability
ASI to IP / IP to ASI Gateway

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
Modulator board
DVB-S / DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X / DVB-DSNG modulation
2 modulator types: IF or RF output
Contribution & Distribution over un-managed networks protection

(optional)
Genlock for decoder application (CP6000 only)
Single or dual power supply (CP6000 only)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

23
System Applications
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms are perfectly suited to
Contribution (backhaul) circuits from occasional venues such as sport

arenas.
Links from Playout Centers to Regions and Affiliates.
Figure 1-1. System applications for ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms
24
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms support point-to-point connection or

any-to-any connection.
Figure 1-2. Example of point-to-point connection
Figure 1-3. Example of any-to-any connection
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

25
Chapter 1 Overview Product Description
Product Description
Front Panel
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 front panels feature an LCD screen, a 7-key
keypad and a set of three status LEDs.
The features of the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 front panels are described in
the Front Panel Operation chapter of this User Manual.
Figure 1-4. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform front panel
CP6000 front panel
CP6100 front panel
Rear Panel
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 rear panels feature:
26
ViBE CP6000
one or two power supply inlets
a Manager board
up to 4 boards
ViBE CP6100
one power supply inlet
Interfaces of the internal Manager board
up to 2 boards
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Figure 1-5. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 rear panels
CP6000 1st version rear panel
1 or 2 PSU inlets
Manager board
4 independent slots for hot swappable boards
CP6000 2nd version rear panel

LAN 1
MPEG
IO1
IO2
IO3
IO4
IO5
MPEG
IO1
IO2
IO3
IO4
IO5
LAN 2
LAN 1
LAN 1
Audio
MPEG
LAN 2
IO1
IO2
IO5
IO1
IO2
IO5
PSU2
GPIO
PSU1
STAT
LAN 1
Audio
LAN 2
LAN 2
LAN 1
LAN 2
SYNC
C&C
TER
MPEG
Manager board
1 or 2 PSU inlets
CP6100 rear panel
Interfaces of the Manager board

1 PSU inlet
Manager Board
The Manager board provides
Configuration, Monitoring and Diagnostics
Storage of configuration, log and firmware files
Storage of alarms in a database
Automatic detection of board plug in
Uploading of board specific code containing the board management

resource and application
Aggregation and distribution of IP datagrams (CP6000 only)
Refer to section Manager Board Specifications on page 318 for more

information on this board.
MPEG Board
There are 2 types of MPEG board:
The dual channels MPEG board: It supports up to two MPEG

encoding channels or up to two MPEG decoding channels,
whatever it is MPEG2/4 SD/HD 4:2:0 or 4:2:2.
The single channel MPEG board: It supports one MPEG

encoding channel or one MPEG decoding channel, whatever it is
MPEG2/4 SD/HD 4:2:0 or 4:2:2.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

27
The board configuration (encoder or decoder) and the supported

formats (video & audio) are enabled by software license.
The MPEG board is hot swappable.
Refer to section MPEG Encoder Specifications on page 327 for more

information when the MPEG board is configured as a dual/single
encoder.
Refer to section MPEG Decoder Specifications on page 359 for more
information when the MPEG board is configured as a dual/single
decoder.
Modulator Board
The Modulator board supports DVB-S, DVB-S2, DVB-S2X and DVB-DSNG
standards.
There are 2 types of Modulator:
IF - Band Modulator (from 50 MHz to 180 MHz)
L- Band Modulator (from 950 MHz to 2150 MHz)
The Modulator board is hot swappable.
Refer to section DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications on

page 378 for more information.
28
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

2
Installation and startup
Chapter
Please read and follow the important safety information in

section Safety Instructions on page 405, noting especially those
instructions related to risk of fire, electric shock or injury to
persons.
Introduction
This chapter provides the procedures required for device installation
and initial configuration and describes how to connect the device to
other devices in your system.

Unpacking...................................................................................page 30
Removing the Protective Film .................................................page 31
Installing the Device (Steps)....................................................page 31
Mounting in Rack.......................................................................page 32
Powering Up...............................................................................page 50
Performing the Initial Settings ................................................page 51
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

29
Chapter 2 Installation and startup Unpacking
Unpacking
Table 2-1 lists the accessories that are always shipped with your device.
Use this list to ensure that your order is complete.
More accessories can be delivered depending on options you chose.
Table 2-1. List of accessories delivered with the device
Quantity
30
Description
ViBE CP6000 or ViBE CP6100 Platform
CD-ROM
Power cables if ordered
Quick Start Guide
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Removing the Protective Film
Removing the Protective Film

Remove the protective film from both sides before installation.
Installing the Device (Steps)

The following steps are required for device installation and initial
configuration:
1. Mounting the device in a rack.
2. Connecting the device to the other devices.
3. Powering the device.
4. Entering the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface (IP,
Date/Time). IP address can also be set via the device front panel.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

31
Chapter 2 Installation and startup Mounting in Rack
Mounting in Rack
Rack mounting is not mandatory for ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platforms but the ventilation and safety requirements given in this
section must be observed in all cases.
CP6000 Platform
The chassis must not be fixed with its rack mounting ears only. If
you intend to install it in a rack, L-profiles are required.
CP6100 Platform
The chassis must not be fixed with its rack mounting ears only.
If you intend to install 1 CP6100 in a 1/2 19 rack, L-profiles are
required.
If you intend to install 1 or 2 CP6100 in a 19 rack, the
platform(s) must be placed on a support (plate or other
device).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform Installation

Requirements
This section lists the principles to be observed and steps to be taken
when installing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms in a rack.
CP6000 Platform
CP6000 is supplied as standard with ears for mounting in a
19 rack.
CP6100 Platform
CP6100 is supplied as standard with ears and screws for
mounting in a 1/2 19. Refer to section Mounting CP6100
Platform(s) in a Rack on page 35.
An optional kit is available to mount 1 or 2 CP6100 Platforms
in a 19 rack. Refer to section Mounting one or two CP6100
Platforms in a 19 Rack on page 36.
Restrictions must be observed:
related to ventilation (see section Ventilation on page 32)
related to the cables (see section Cabling on page 40)
related to the EMC ground (see section EMC Ground on page 40)
related to the Power supply and protective ground (see section

Power Supply and Protective Ground on page 41)
Ventilation
The air flow through the equipment is critical for maintaining the proper
temperature range. The following precautions should therefore be
observed:
32
Air circulating in the equipment:

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
CP6000: As air circulates from right to left in the device (as seen
from front), allow at least 50 mm free air space on either side of
the device.
CP6100: As air circulates from front to rear in the device, allow

at least 50 mm free air space at the front and rear of the device.
Figure 2-1. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 - Cooling air flow
Air in
Air out
CP6000
Air out
Air in
CP6100
Prevent hot air from one device flowing into other devices.
Ensure adequate distribution of air flows to the device intakes.
Avoid the effects of natural convection between devices.
Avoid hot/cold air short-circuits.
Avoid transverse effects in coupled racks.
Prevent hot air from accumulating in the rack.
Cover empty slots with blank panels so as not to interfere with chassis
ventilation.
Check the air flows: the rack should ensure a sufficient supply of cold
air and sufficient evacuation of hot air (according to the number of
devices mounted in the rack and their corresponding air flows).
The following important requirements should be followed in addition to

the general recommendations:
The device must be installed in a room with low dust levels. The
maximum density of dust in the air must not exceed 100g/m3 and the
maximum number of particles with a diameter greater than 1m must
not exceed 1 million/m3. To prevent the power supply from
overheating, remember to regularly clean the rack filter according to
the manufacturers recommendations and clean ViBE CP6000 /
CP6100 Platform air inlet grills (at least twice a year).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

33
Air circulating in the equipment:
CP6000: There must be enough room for a column of cold air to

circulate on the right of the chassis, from the bottom to the top
of the rack and a column of hot air to circulate on the left of the
chassis, from the bottom to the top of the rack.
CP6100: There must be enough room for a column of cold air to

circulate at the front of the chassis, from the bottom to the top
of the rack and a column of hot air to circulate at the rear of the
chassis, from the bottom to the top of the rack.
Cut the L-profiles so as they do not exceed 4 mm in height in the areas

facing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform air inlets and outlets. This will
prevent any hot air from accumulating in the device.
Figure 2-2. L-profiles
Cut the L-profiles so as they do not exceed 4 mm in height in the areas facing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Platform air inlets and outlets.
CP6000 / CP6100 Platform stacking

Given its exact 1RU height, a Platform can be placed on top of another
Platform of the same type without any L-profiles or support. However,
platforms should be stacked in groups of two, with each group
separated from another by a space of 1RU. The total number of
Platforms in a rack must be limited to 10.
Failure to observe these installation requirements will directly

result in a deterioration in performance, reliability and service
life of equipment.
34
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Mounting CP6100 Platform(s) in a Rack

The CP6100 Platform is shipped with:
2 x small identical ears for mounting one CP6100 in a 1/2 19 rack (refer
to section Mounting a CP6100 Platform in a 1/2 19 Rack on
page 35).
6 x M3 Torx screws
6 x 1 mm shims
An optional kit is available to mount 1 or 2 CP6100 Platform(s) in a 19

rack (refer to section Mounting one or two CP6100 Platforms in a 19
Rack on page 36).
Mounting a CP6100 Platform in a 1/2 19 Rack

The chassis must not be fixed with its rack mounting ears only,
L-profiles are required.
The horizontal center-to-center distance between the rack mounts

should be from 241 mm to 247 mm.
The shims should be mounted between the ears and the chassis to
compensate for any difference in center-to-center distance.
Procedure:
Fix the right ear on the chassis with 3 M3 Torx screws (refer to
Figure 2-3).
Fix the left ear on the chassis in the same way.
Mount the chassis in the rack.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

35
Figure 2-3. 1 CP6100 with ears - Mounting in a 1/2 19 rack
if necessary one or more shims
3 M3 screws
241 t
o
247m
m
shim
Mounting one or two CP6100 Platforms in a 19 Rack

The chassis must not be fixed with its rack mounting ears only. They
must be placed on a support (plate or other device).
An optional kit is available to mount 1 or 2 CP6100 Platform(s) in a 19

rack.
Kit option reference: CP6100-MEC-KIT-A
Kit contents:
- 2 x large identical ears
- 1 mount plate
- 6 M3 Torx screws
Mounting one CP6100 Platform in a 19 Rack

Procedure:
36
Assemble the large ears on the chassis following the procedure

shown in Figure 2-3 (3 M3 Torx screws on either side).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Figure 2-4. 1 CP6100 with large ears - Mounting in a 19 rack
Mounting two CP6100 Platform in a 19 Rack

Procedure:
Assemble a small ear on the left side of the left chassis (3 M3 Torx
screws).
Fix the mount plate on the right side of the left chassis (6 M3 Torx
screws).
Figure 2-5. Left CP6100 with ear and mount plate - Mounting of 2 CP6100 in a 19 rack
Ear
6 M3 screws
Mount plate
Assemble a small ear on the right side of the chassis positioned on the
right (3 M3 Torx screws).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

37
Figure 2-6. Right CP6100 with ear - Mounting of 2 CP6100 in a 19 rack
Ear
Unscrew the ground strap fixing screw at the rear of the right chassis.
Figure 2-7. Ground strap fixing screw - Mounting of 2 CP6100 in a 19 rack
Unscrew the ground screw
Assemble the chassis by sliding the left chassis along the mount plate
as shown in the figure below:
Figure 2-8. Assembling the chassis - Mounting of 2 CP6100 in a 19 rack
38
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Retighten the screw at the rear of the right chassis. The ground strap
is fixed with the screw on the left chassis.
Figure 2-9. Ground strap fixing screw - Mounting of 2 CP6100 in a 19 rack
Retighten the screw
Screw to use to fix the ground strap
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

39
Cabling
It is essential to separate the power supply cables from the signal cables.
When facing the rear of the rack (as the device is connected via the rear
panel), the power supply cables must be guided to the right of the chassis
and the signal cables to the left.
EMC Ground
The EMC connection is required to ensure ground equipotentiality
between the different devices in the technical center (only one
connection is required per device).
Each chassis features a tapped hole to connect a bonding strip (on the
CP6000 left side or CP6100 rear panel). This bonding strip has to be fixed
using the M4 screw supplied with the device. The bonding strip must
have a 6 mm cross-section and be shorter than 500 mm.
When mounting a chassis in the rack you are advised to observe the
following points:
Screw the bonding strip onto the chassis before mounting the chassis
in the rack. Then, screw the bonding strip onto the EMC DC bus.
Unscrew the bonding strip from the EMC DC bus before moving the
chassis. Then unscrew the bonding strip from the chassis.
The rack EMC DC bus (to which the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform EMC
strip is connected) must be connected to the rack ground pin. This pin is
also connected to the safety ground.
40
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Power Supply and Protective Ground

Power Inlet
The power outlet comprises a connector without an On/Off switch.
CP6000 Chassis
There are five kinds of power inlet according to the chassis model.
chassis with one AC Power Supply.
chassis with two AC Power Supplies for redundancy.
chassis with one DC Power Supply.
chassis with two DC Power Supplies for redundancy.
chassis with one AC Power Supply and one DC Power Supply for
redundancy.
CP6100 Chassis
There is one AC Power Supply.
Figure 2-10. CP6000 / CP6100 - Chassis models and their associated power supply inlets
CP6000
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

CP6100
41
Power Supply Cord(s)

Cord(s) for AC mains power supply (CP6000 or CP6100)
The ViBE CP6100 Platform is always fitted with a single AC power
supply.
Specifications
The AC mains power cords are only shipped with the device if ordered.
Otherwise, it is advisable to use mains cables with the following features:
Device end of cable: IEC 60320 C13-compliant connector.
Flexible wire: 3 x 1 mm2 cross-section or 18 AWG, 10 A minimum,

250 V compliant with the applicable standard or rules of the country
where the device is installed.
Mains outlet end of cable: plug compliant with the applicable standard
or rules of the country where the device is installed.
Connecting AC Mains Power Supply Cord(s) to the Power Supply End
The connection panel should comply with the legislation in force in the
country of installation. The connection panel must be positioned in the
rack in such a way that the plug and power cord(s) are within easy reach
for switching off purposes.
For (each) mains inlet, the wiring system must feature overload and earth
fault protection and a bipolar cut-off device or a differential circuit
breaker. If in doubt, contact a qualified electrician.
Connecting AC Mains Power Supply Cord(s) to the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platform End
Plug the power cord(s) into the mains inlet.
42
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Cord(s) for DC power supply (CP6000)

Specifications
The DC power cord(s) are shipped with the device.

The DC power supply cord wires are coloured in accordance with the
following codes:
Table 2-2. List of accessories delivered with the device
Pin layout
Terminals
Wire colour
INTERNATIONAL
(Cable Ref. 46131742)
A1: -
Blue
A2: protective earth
Green/Yellow
A3: +
Brown
The earthing standard is DC/I with DC return isolated.
- must be linked to a cut-off device.

+ must be linked to the protective earth (safety ground) outside
the device.
The DC power source must be of SELV type (Secundary Electrical Low

Voltage). It must be located in the same building as the device and the
entire source circuit must be kept within the building.
Connecting DC Power Supply Cord(s) to the Power Supply End
The connection panel should comply with the legislation in force in the
country of installation. The connection panel must be positioned in the
rack in such a way that the plug and power cords are within easy reach
for switching off purposes.
The wiring system must feature protection against overcurrents which
accepts voltages of 48 VDC + 20% - 15% and supports inrush current
when the device is plugged in. If in doubt, contact a qualified electrician.
Connecting DC Power Supply Cord(s) to the Platform End
Connect the (two) power cord(s) to the DC power inlet(s).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

43
Chapter 2 Installation and startup Connecting the Signal Cables
Connecting the Signal Cables

On the Manager Board
Figure 2-11. Manager board LEDs and connectors
CP6000 1st version
CP6100
C&C
TER
SYN
PPS
LAN 1
LAN 2
GPIO
CP6000 2nd version

GPIO
STAT
LAN 1
LAN 2
SYNC
C&C
TER
CP6000 chassis version 1 & 2 offer the same functionalities except the PPS input that is not implemented on
the version 2
44
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

CP6000 Platform
a. Check the LEDs:
Table 2-3. CP6000 1st version Manager board LEDs
LED
Meaning
Green LED on
There is no chassis alarm.
Red LED on
There is at least one critical or major alarm.
Green LED off

and Red LED off
The chassis is not powered.
Blue LED on
The chassis is rebooting.
Table 2-4. CP6000 2nd version Manager board LED
LED
Meaning
STAT (status)
Green: There is no chassis alarm.

Red: There is at least one critical or major alarm.
Orange: The chassis is rebooting.
b. Connect the Ethernet cable for Configuration, Monitoring and

Diagnostics to the C&C connector.
c. If necessary, connect the IP upstream/downstream equipment to
the LAN connector(s) (LAN 1/LAN 2).
CP6100 Platform
Connect the Ethernet cable for Configuration, Monitoring and
Diagnostics to the C&C connector.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

45
On each MPEG Board used as Encoder

Dual Channels MPEG Board
Figure 2-12. Dual channels MPEG Encoder board connectors
1. Connect the main and optionally SDI/SD-SDI/HD upstream pieces of

equipment to the SDI In connectors (IO1 for encoding channel 1, IO3
for encoding channel 2).
IO2 and IO4 connectors can be used as SDI Input connectors in
redundancy mode or as ASI Out connectors.
2. Connect the ASI downstream equipment to the ASI Out connector
(IO5) and the IP downstream equipment (e.g. Ethernet switch) to the
LAN connector(s) (LAN 1/LAN 2).
The IP downstream equipment can also be connected to the LAN
connector(s) on the Manager board.
The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the MPEG Encoder board
and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive.
If the ASI to IP gateway optional feature is used, IO5 is the ASI input.
Refer to section ASI to IP Gateway on page 352.
Single Channel MPEG Board

Figure 2-13. Single channel MPEG Encoder board connectors
LAN 1
Audio
MPEG
IO1
Audio inputs
SDI input
main
IO2
SDI input
backup or
ASI output
LAN 2
IO5
ASI input
or
ASI output
Ethernet 1
output
Ethernet 2
output
1. Connect the main and optionally SDI/SD-SDI/HD upstream pieces of

equipment to the SDI In connector (IO1).
IO2 connector can be used as SDI Input connector in redundancy
mode or as ASI Out connector.
46
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

2. If necessary, connect the audio upstream pieces of equipment to the

Audio connector.
3. Connect the ASI downstream equipment to the ASI Out connector
(IO5) and the IP downstream equipment (e.g. Ethernet switch) to the
LAN connector(s) (LAN 1/LAN 2).
The IP downstream equipment can also be connected to the LAN
The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the MPEG Encoder board
If the ASI to IP gateway optional feature is used, IO5 is the ASI input.
Refer to section ASI to IP Gateway on page 352.
On each MPEG board used as Decoder

Dual Channels MPEG Board
Figure 2-14. Dual channels MPEG Decoder board connectors
LAN 1
MPEG
IO1
IO2
SDI output SDI output

or
ASI input
Decoder 1
IO3

or
ASI input
IO4
LAN 2
IO5
ASI output
or
ASI input
Ethernet 1
input
Ethernet 2
input
Decoder 2
1. Connect the ASI upstream equipment to a connector configured as

ASI In (IO1 or IO3 or IO5) and the IP upstream equipment (e.g.
Ethernet switch) to the LAN connector(s) (LAN 1/LAN 2).
The IP upstream equipment can also be connected to the LAN
The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the MPEG Decoder board
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

47
2. Connect the SDI/HD-SDI/SD downstream pieces of equipment (e.g.

Production Switcher or intermediate protection Switch) to the SDI
Out connectors (IO2 for decoding channel 1, IO4 for decoding
channel 2). IO1 and IO3 connectors can be configured as mirrors of
IO2 and IO4 connectors or as ASI In connectors.
3. If necessary connect a monitor on IO5 configured as an ASI Out
connector (in this case IO5 monitors the MPTS present at the input of
the decoder in TS redundancy mode only).
If the IP to ASI gateway optional feature is used, IO5 is the ASI output.
Refer to section IP to ASI Gateway on page 376.
Single Channel MPEG Board

Figure 2-15. Single channel MPEG Decoder board connectors
Audio
MPEG
IO1
Audio outputs
IO2
SDI output SDI output ASI output

or
or
ASI input
ASI input
LAN 1
LAN 2
Ethernet 1
input
Ethernet 2
input
IO5
1. Connect the ASI upstream equipment to a connector configured as

ASI In (IO1 or IO5) and the IP upstream equipment (e.g. Ethernet
switch) to the LAN connector(s) (LAN 1/LAN 2).
The IP upstream equipment can also be connected to the LAN
The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the MPEG Decoder board
2. If necessary, connect the audio downstream pieces of equipment to
the Audio connector.
3. Connect the SDI/HD-SDI/SD downstream pieces of equipment (e.g.
Production Switcher or intermediate protection Switch) to the SDI
Out connector (IO2). IO1 connector can be configured as mirrors of
IO2 or as ASI In connector.
4. If necessary connect a monitor on IO5 configured as an ASI Out
connector (in this case IO5 monitors the MPTS present at the input of
the decoder in TS redundancy mode only).
If the IP to ASI gateway optional feature is used, IO5 is the ASI output.
Refer to section IP to ASI Gateway on page 376.
48
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

On a Modulator board
Figure 2-16. Modulator board connectors
1. Connect the RF Out connector to the downstream equipment.

2. If necessary connect monitoring equipment to the MON Out
connector (in this case MON Out monitors the RF Output with a
decreased level of 20dB).
3. If necessary connect monitoring equipment to the ASI Out connector
(in this case ASI Out monitors the stream after the internal bitrate
adaptation process).
4. If necessary connect a 10 MHz reference source to the REF In
connector. The internal 10 MHZ reference is used by default.
5. If necessary connect an external ASI source on the ASI In1 connector.
6. If necessary connect an external ASI source on the ASI In2 connector.
Diplexer connexion
If a diplexer is used with the L - Band Modulator then connect it as follow:
Figure 2-17. Diplexer connexions
High pass (L Band)

from RF Out connector
Common
To Up converter
Low pass (Ref 10 MHz)

from REF Out connector
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

49
Chapter 2 Installation and startup Powering Up
Powering Up
Check that the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform is not yet connected to
the LAN as factory-set IP addresses may cause disturbance on the
LAN when the device is switched on (address conflict).
Connect the power cords. The green POWER LED(s) will come on.
After a start-up phase, the device will become operational. When the
device is switched on, the last stored configuration will be active.
50
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Performing the Initial Settings
Performing the Initial Settings

Accessing the Command Line Interface
In this section and those that follow, the Command Line Interface will
be abbreviated by CLI.
CLI is accessed via an Ethernet link using the C&C connector at the ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 rear panel and the PC Telnet application.
Figure 2-18. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 rear panel
C&C
CP6000 1st version
CP6000 2nd version

LAN 1
MPEG
IO1
IO2
IO3
IO4
IO5
MPEG
IO1
IO2
IO3
IO4
IO5
LAN 2
LAN 1
Audio
MPEG
LAN 1
LAN 2
IO1
IO2
IO5
IO1
IO2
IO5
PSU2
GPIO
PSU1
STAT
LAN 1
Audio
LAN 2
LAN 1
LAN 2
LAN 2
SYNC
C&C
TER
MPEG
C&C
CP6100
RF
ASI
ASI
REF
IN
MON
OUT
OUT
IN1
LAN 1
MPEG
IO1
IO2
IO3
IO4
IO5
IN2
LAN 2
C&C
TER
C&C
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform IP address, which is

required for the first Telnet connection, is given on the Acceptance
Test Report shipped with the device.
The factory set IP address and Netmask for the Control,
Commands and Diagnostics port are 192.168.1.1 and
255.255.255.0
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

51
The IP address will be changed during the installation setup. This will
be the new customer set IP address that will be required for the next
Telnet connections.
IP address can be changed:
via the CLI, see section Editing IP Parameters (ipset) on page 56

or
via the Front Panel, see Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation on
page 67.
As the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform C&C Ethernet

interface hosts an autocrossover mechanism, you can use direct or
crossed cable connection between the PC and ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform.
Set up the Telnet connection between the PC and ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Figure 2-19. Telnet connection between the PC and ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platform
A welcome page will be displayed. Go to section Entering the Login

and Password on page 52 to continue.
Entering the Login and Password

The welcome page displayed after connection will request the user login
and password.
CLI has two predefined user groups: Service group and Operator group.
52
The Service group is for Technicians who are responsible for

installation. The Login and password are respectively service and
service.
The Operator group is for Users who are in charge of operation. The
Login and password are respectively operator and operator.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

In the current release, you must proceed as follows to log in as

service:
Log in as operator with operator and operator for login
and password.
Type user.
Answer service and service for login and password.
Be aware that CLI is case sensitive (service is correct, Service
is not correct)
To quit the CLI, type quit.
Figure 2-20. Login and password
Getting Help
To get the list of all available CLI commands (related to user rights) type
help after the prompt. Two types of help are available: one for service
and one for operator.
Example:
CLI.Operator> help
The CLI provides many commands. Some of these commands are

not, however, intended for the device user but reserved for Thomson
Video Networks use only. It is therefore important to only use the
commands described in this manual so as not to disrupt device
operation or jam the device, as this would require assistance from
Thomson Video Networks Customer Services.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

53
Setting Initial Parameters

The commands used to set the initial parameters are listed below.
reboot ........................................................................................... page 55
ipdisp ........................................................................................... page 55
ipset ............................................................................................. page 56
ddate ............................................................................................. page 57
sdate ............................................................................................. page 57
dntp ............................................................................................... page 58
sntp ............................................................................................... page 59
rinfo ............................................................................................. page 60
winfo ............................................................................................. page 60
clist ............................................................................................. page 61
cset ............................................................................................... page 61
54
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Commands to Reboot the Equipment

The following procedure must be used to reboot the equipment:
1. Type reboot after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the
keyboard.
Figure 2-21. Rebooting the device
2. Type y to confirm twice the reboot (or n if you want to cancel it).
Figure 2-22. Rebooting the device
Commands Relating to IP Parameters

The following procedure is used to set the IP parameters of the
Commands, Monitoring & Diagnostics C&C port located on the ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform rear panel.
Displaying IP Parameters (ipdisp)

(Login: service or operator)
To display the IP address, type ipdisp after the prompt then press
ENTER on the keyboard.
Figure 2-23. Displaying IP parameters (ipdisp)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

55
Editing IP Parameters (ipset)

(Login: service)
To set the IP address, proceed as follows:
1. Type ipset after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the
keyboard.
2. Type the new IP address, gateway, netmask and MTU values
successively or press the ENTER key on the keyboard for each of them
if you wish to keep the previous values.
Set MTU parameter to the required MTU size (in bytes) if, and only if,
your control and command link is carried over a link with reduced
MTU, and which not properly handles MTU discovery. Otherwise, set
MTU parameter to 0 to use the MTU discovery mechanism.
3. Type y after Do you really want to apply these parameters
[Y]/[N(default)]? if you wish to confirm the new values or n if you
wish to keep the previous values.
Figure 2-24. Editing CMD1 IP parameters (ipset1) - Example.
4. As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device for the
new values to be acknowledged (type reboot after the prompt).
56
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Commands Relating to the Date and Time

Displaying the Current Date and Time (ddate)
To display the current date and time, type ddate after the prompt then
press ENTER on the keyboard.
The UTC date and time will be displayed.
Figure 2-25. Displaying the current date and time (ddate) - Example.
Changing the Date and Time (sdate)

(Login: service)
To change the date and time, proceed as follows:
1. Type sdate after the CLI.Service prompt.
2. Type the new date and time values in year (YYYY), month (MM), day
(DD), hour (hh) and minute (mm) format without spaces after UTC
time ?
3. Type y after Apply date&time now? if you wish to confirm the new
values or n if you wish to keep the previous values.
Figure 2-26. Changing the current date and time (sdate) - Example.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

57
Commands Relating to the NTP Server

The purpose of NTP (Network Time Protocol) is to synchronize the ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform system clock with the clocks of
other devices via a shared network.
The NTP service can synchronize two clocks provided that the initial
offset between these two clocks is slight. You are advised to
manually set the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 system clock as close as
possible to the NTP server clock. Several minutes are required to
achieve perfect synchronization between the two platforms.
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 is set to operate as an NTP client. The external
NTP server can be backed up so that two NTP server IP addresses can be
set through the CLI: the first one for the primary NTP server (server 1),
the second one for the backup NTP server (server 2).
Displaying the Current NTP Server IP Addresses (dntp)

To display whether the NTP feature is enabled or not and to know the
current NTP server IP addresses, type dntp after the prompt then press
The NTP server IP addresses will be displayed.
Figure 2-27. Displaying the NTP mode and the NTP server IP addresses (dntp) - Example:
58
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Setting the NTP Server IP Addresses (sntp)

(Login: service)
To enable or disable the NTP feature and set the NTP server IP addresses,
proceed as follows:
1. Type sntp after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the
keyboard.
2. Type y after NTP Time synchronization [1 = Enable]/[0 =
Disable] (x) if you wish to enable the NTP feature, or n if you wish
to disable the NTP feature.
3. Type the IP address of the primary NTP server after NTP server 1 IP
address (current IP address): if you wish to set a new address or
press the ENTER key on the keyboard if you wish to keep the previous
value.
4. Type the IP address of the backup NTP server after NTP server 2
IP address (current IP address): if you wish to set a new
address or press the ENTER key on the keyboard if you wish to keep
the previous value.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

59
Commands Relating to SysName, SysContact and

SysLocation
SysName, SysContact and SysLocation can be read and edited when
installing the product using the CLI rinfo and winfo commands
respectively. These parameters are accessed in the MIB2 system.
Displaying SysName, SysContact and SysLocation (rinfo)

To display SysName, SysContact and SysLocation, type rinfo after the
prompt then press ENTER on the keyboard.
Figure 2-28. Displaying SysName, SysContact and SysLocation (rinfo)
Editing SysName, SysContact and SysLocation (winfo)

(Login: service)
To set the SysName, SysContact and SysLocation, proceed as follows:
1. Type winfo after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the
keyboard.
2. Type the new SysName, SysContact and SysLocation strings
successively or press the ENTER key on the keyboard for each of them
if you wish to keep the previous values (Only characters compliant
with ASCII code are accepted).
60
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Commands Relating to Community Strings

Displaying Community Strings (clist)
To display Community Strings, type clist after the prompt then press
Figure 2-29. Displaying Community Strings (clist)
The Community Strings are displayed.
Editing Community Strings (cset)

(Login: service)
To edit the Community Strings, proceed as follows:
1. Type cset after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the
keyboard.
Figure 2-30. Editing Community Strings (cset)
2. Type the Community String or press the ENTER key on the keyboard
for each of them if you wish to keep the previous values.
[Y]/[N(default)]? if you wish to confirm the new Community
String or n if you wish to keep the previous Community String.
As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device for the
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

61
BLANK PAGE
62
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

3
Chassis Configuration
Chapter
Introduction
This chapter gives the rules to be observed for populating the chassis
with MPEG boards.

Populating the Chassis with MPEG or Modulator Boards..page 64
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

63
Chapter 3 Chassis Configuration Populating the Chassis with MPEG or Modulator Boards
Populating the Chassis with MPEG or Modulator Boards

The following rules must be observed to ensure proper cooling of the
boards inside the device.
Modulator board location:

In CP6000 Platform the Modulator board must be located in slot 3
In CP6100 Platform the Modulator board must be located in slot 1
Figure 3-1. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms with one board
CP6000
Manager board
Depends on the
CP6000 version
CP6100
Figure 3-2. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms with two boards
CP6000
Manager board
Depends on the
CP6000 version
CP6100
Figure 3-3. ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform with three boards
Manager board
Depends on the
CP6000 version
64
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Figure 3-4. ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform with four boards
Manager board
Depends on the
CP6000 version
In all cases, it is mandatory to cover empty slots with blank panels so

as not to interfere with chassis ventilation.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

65
BLANK PAGE
66
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

4
Front Panel Operation
Chapter
Introduction
This chapter explains how to use the Front Panel to configure the
equipment.
In this Chapter
Front Panel Description ............................................................page 68
Screen Description ....................................................................page 71
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

67
Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Front Panel Description
Front Panel Description

Foreword
The aim of the front panel is not to replace the Management System but
to provide a control/command interface for the main settings.
Device operation via its front panel generally involves:
changing basic settings (IP settings, etc.).
displaying device codes and serial numbers.
displaying installed software releases.
displaying raised alarms.
recalling predefined configurations. These configurations are defined

via the Web Interface.
setting certain parameters of the active configuration.

A configuration cannot be defined via the front panel.
displaying device internal temperature.
rebooting the device.
Description and overview

The CP6000 / CP6100 front panel features an LCD screen, a 7-key keypad
(Home, ESC, OK (Return) and 4 arrow keys) and a set of three status
LEDs.
Figure 4-1. ViBE CP6000 / 6100 - Front Panel
Running
Alarm
Warning
68
UP
HOME
LEFT ESC
OK
RIGHT
DOWN
Device status LEDs
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

They indicate the following:

Table 4-1. Device status LED specifications
LED
Color
RUNNING
green
ALARM
red
At least one major alarm has been raised
WARNING
orange
At least one minor alarm has been raised
Description
The Device is On
Keypad
The keypad features 7 keys used to display and select a menu or a

setting:
Table 4-2. Keypad specifications
Key
Function
Move the cursor right
Move the cursor left
Move the cursor up or select a numeric value
Move the cursor down or select a numeric value
OK
Access the main menu, a sub-menu or confirm a setting value
ESC
Go back to the menu above
HOME
Go back to the main menu
LCD screen
The LCD screen features a graphic display. It provides up to 5 lines:
Line 1: menu context
Lines 2, 3, 4 and 5: menu
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

69
Figure 4-2. LCD menu overview
MENU CONT
MENU
Symbols (or markers) help to locate and/or select displayed items:

Table 4-3. Meaning of CP6000 / CP6100 front panel LCD symbols
Symbol
Meaning
Animated symbol in the top right of the status screen indicating

that the device is operational.
> xxxx <
Text preselection marker. The selected text can then be

confirmed by pressing the OK key on the keypad. Move this
marker using one of the 4 arrow keys.
These symbols indicate indicate the up/down keys are active
and depend on the displayed menu.
Setting LCD screen brightness and contrast

For optimum readability of texts displayed on the LCD screen, it may be
necessary to adjust the Brightness and Contrast according to the lighting
conditions. Refer to section LCD CAL screen on page 79.
70
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description
Screen Description
Screen menu tree
Figure 4-3. Menu tree of screens displayed on the CP6000 / CP6100 front paneI 1/2
Refer to Figure 4-4 on page 72
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

71
Figure 4-4. Menu tree of screens displayed on the CP6000 / CP6100 front paneI 2/2
72
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Summary of screen functions

List summarizing the functions available via the screens:
Table 4-4. Functions available via the CP6000 / CP6100 front panel screens
Screen
Function
section Device booting screen on page 73 Indicates that the device is starting
up.
section Status screen on page 74
Indicates the device name and IP

address.
section Main menu screen on page 75
Displays available sub-menus.
section Alarms screen on page 75
Displays alarms raised on the

device.
section Setup screen on page 76
section IP Setting screen on page 76
Displays and used to edit device IP

settings.
section Recall screen on page 77
Used to recall a predefined

configuration.
section Reboot screen on page 79
Used to reboot the device.
section LCD CAL screen on page 79
Used to adjust the LCD brightness

and contrast.
section Info screen on page 80
section Main Board Information

screen on page 80
Displays Main board information.
section Temperature Information

screen on page 80
Displays Temperature information.
section Configuration screen on page 81

Used to edit and save certain
parameters
of
the
current
configuration.
Device booting screen

When the device is powered on, after a few seconds the LCD lights up
and the following message is displayed during the boot process:
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

73
Figure 4-5. Booting screen
ViBE Launching ...
The Status screen will be displayed once the boot process is complete:
Figure 4-6. Status screen
ViBE CP6000 STATUS

CP6000 XXXXXXXX
IP Address: 10.12.54.24
The Status screen is described below.
Status screen
Figure 4-7. Status screen
ViBE CP6000 STATUS

CP6000 XXXXXXXX
IP Address: 10.12.54.24
74
Animated symbol indicating that the device is

operational.
CP6000
Indicates the name of the device. This name is assigned

via the Management System (Web Browser or
MediaFlexSUITE).
IP Address
Indicates the device IP address.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Main menu screen

To display the Main menu screen:
From the Status screen, press the OK key.
From a sub-menu, press the ESC key once or more depending on the
sub-menu displayed.
Figure 4-8. Main menu screen

MAIN
<ALARMS>
SETUP
INFO
CONFIG
To select a sub-menu, use the , , and keys and then confirm your
choice by pressing the OK key.
Available sub-menus:
Alarms
Used to display alarms raised on the device.
Setup
Used to:
Set device IP settings
Recall a predefined configuration
Reboot the device
Make LCD adjustments (Contrast and Brightness)
Info
Used to get information about device board references,

chassis references, serial numbers, release numbers
and temperatures.
Config
Used to edit and save certain parameters of the current

configuration.
Alarms screen
The Alarms screen is used to view alarms raised on the device. To display
this screen, go to the Main menu screen, select ALARMS using the arrow
keys and press OK.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

75
Figure 4-9. Alarms screen

ALARMS
Severity
Name
XX/YY
Alarm Wording (first line)

Alarm Wording (last line)
Severity
Used to indicate alarm severity. The alarm can be

Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
Name
Used to indicate the name of the function with the

alarm(s): MAIN, DEC x or ENC x.
XX/YY
XX indicates the number of the alarm in the YY list,

where YY represents the total number of alarms raised.
Alarm Wording
Used to provide the alarm description, which is

identical to the description displayed on the
Management System.
If necessary, the and keys can be used to display the next or

previous alarm.
The list of alarms is created when the Alarms screen is selected. To
update the list of alarms, you will need to exit the Alarms screen.
Setup screen
The Setup screen is used to access the IP Settings, Recall, Reboot and
LCD CALibration sub-menus. To display this screen, go to the Main menu
screen, select SETUP using the arrow keys and press OK.
Figure 4-10. Setup screen
SETUP
<IP SETTING>
RECALL
REBOOT
LCD CAL
IP Setting screen
The IP Setting screen is used to view and set the Control & Command IP
Settings. To display this screen, go to the Setup screen, select IP
SETTING using the and keys and press OK.
The IP Address, Netmask and Gateway will be displayed:
76
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Figure 4-11. IP Setting screen

IP SETTING
<IP Address> : 10.141.127.40
IP Netmask
: 255.255.255.0
IP Gateway
: 10.141.127.49
Example: Procedure for editing the IP Address (the procedure for

editing the IP Netmask and IP Gateway values is the same)
Use the and keys to select the Address, Netmask or

Gateway setting and press OK. The first digit is blinking.
Use the and keys to select the field to be modified and then
use the and keys to adjust the value. Refer to the figure
below:
Figure 4-12. IP Address, Settings screen

IP Address
0 1 0 1 4 1 . 1 2 7. 0 4 0
0 1 1 1 4 1 . 1 2 7. 0 4 0
Confirm the new value by pressing OK. The Confirm screen will
be displayed:
Figure 4-13. IP Address settings, Confirm screen

IP Address
:11.141.127.40
Do you Confirm update
No=ESC
Yes=OK
Press OK to enable the new IP address or press ESC/HOME to

exit this screen.
Consistency between the IP address and Gateway address is

checked.
The changes will be acknowledged after the device has been
rebooted.
Recall screen
The Recall screen is used to recall a predefined configuration.
Configurations are predefined via the Web Interface. To display the Recall
screen, go to the Setup screen, select RECALL using the and keys
and press OK.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

77
Figure 4-14. Recall screen

RECALL
XX/YY
ZZ EQU: -----------------> ZZ EQU: -----------------ZZ EQU: -----------------ZZ EQU: ------------------
XX/YY
XX indicates the number of the currently selected

predefined configuration. YY indicates the total number
of predefined configurations.
ZZ EQU: ........
ZZ: Used to indicate the ID of the configuration.

EQU:
Used
to
indicate
the
type
configuration (EQU = Equipment).
-------: Name of the configuration as set on creation.
of
Procedure for recalling a configuration
Select the configuration to be recalled on the Recall screen using

the or keys.
Confirm your choice by pressing OK. The Confirm screen will be

displayed:
Figure 4-15. Recall, Confirm screen

RECALL
Preset ZZ
Do you Confirm Recall?
No=ESC Yes=OK
Press OK to enable the recall or ESC/HOME to exit this screen.

At the end of the operation, if the recall was successful the
following screen will be displayed:
Figure 4-16. Recall, recall successful screen

RECALL
Preset ZZ
Recall Done, Press OK
An error message will be displayed in the event of failure.
78
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Reboot screen
The Reboot screen is used to reboot the device. To display this screen, go
to the Setup screen, select REBOOT using the and keys and press
OK.
Figure 4-17. Reboot screen
REBOOT
Reboot Equipment?
No=ESC Yes=OK
Procedure for rebooting the device
Press OK to reboot the device. If you do not wish to reboot the device,
press ESC/HOME to exit this screen.
LCD CAL screen

The LCD Calibration screen is used to adjust the LCD Brightness and
Contrast. To display this screen, go to the Setup screen, select LCD CAL
using the and keys and press OK.
Figure 4-18. LCD CAL screen
LCD CAL.
<BRIGHTNESS>
CONTRAST
Procedure for adjusting LCD Brightness or Contrast

Use the and keys to select the Brightness or Contrast setting and
press OK.
Figure 4-19. Brightness CAL screen
BRIGHTNESS
Adjust Brightness
= Up/Down
Save=OK
Exit=Esc/Home
Use the and keys to adjust the setting according to the lighting
conditions.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

79
Press OK to confirm and save the setting(s) or ESC/HOME to exit this

screen without saving the setting(s). If OK is pressed the new settings
will be restored on next device power up, otherwise the previous
settings will be recalled.
Info screen
The Info screen is used to display the Software Package and Hardware
versions of the Main Board. To display this screen, go to the Main menu
screen, select Info using the and keys and press OK.
Figure 4-20. Info screen
INFO
<MAIN>
TEMPER.
Main Board Information screen

The Main Board Information screen is used to get CPU Board and device
information. To display this screen, go to the Info screen, select MAIN
using the and keys and press OK.
The following information will be displayed:
Figure 4-21. Main Board Info screen

MAIN BOARD INFO
Active SW
:CP6000 XX.XXXX
P/N
:XXXXXXXX
S/N
:sn XXXXXXXX
EQCODE
: XXXX
Active SW
Used to indicate the device active Software release

number.
P/N
Used to indicate the device reference.
S/N
Used to indicate the device serial number.
EQCODE
Used to indicate the CPU board equipment code. The

equipment code is used to order a software option.
Temperature Information screen

The Temperature Information screen is used to display the Ambient
Temperature. To display this screen, go to the Info screen, select
TEMPER. using the and keys and press OK.
80
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

The following information will be displayed:
Figure 4-22. Temperature Info screen

TEMPER. BOARD INFO
T Ambient
T Ambient
:XXC / YYF
Used to indicate the internal device temperature. The

temperature is displayed in degrees Centigrade and
Fahrenheit.
Configuration screen
To display this screen, go to the Main menu screen, select CONFIG using
the arrow keys and press OK.
The Configuration screen is used to edit certain parameters of the current
configuration. Refer to Figure 4-4 Menu tree of screens displayed on
the CP6000 / CP6100 front paneI 2/2 on page 72.
Parameters that can be edited from the device front panel

Any parameters not provided below have to be edited via the devices
Web Browser interface.
The parameters are described in detail in Chapter 5 Web Browser
Interface.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

81
Parameters that can be edited on an Encoder

Figure 4-23. Menu tree of Encoder configuration
Table 4-5. List of parameters that can be edited on an encoder
Functions
Input Settings
Parameters
SDI
ASI
(ASI to IP Gateway
or External
Component input)
Activity (Yes/No)
Audio settings
(Single channel
board: Audio from
board front panel)
82
Analog audio:
XLR Input (In1(L1)/In2(R1),
(In3(L2)/In4(R2))
Alignment (value)
Headroom (value)
Digital audio:
XLR Input (In1(AES1), In2(AES2),
In3(AES3), In4(AES4))
Sample Rate Converter (On/Off)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Functions
Component Settings *
Parameters
Video
PID (value)
No Source Mod (Black Pattern ....)
Input Standard (1280x720p@50Hz, .....)
Picture Resolution (1280x720, ....)
Encoding Format (H264, ...)
Chroma profil (4:2:0 - 8 bits, ....)
Picture Format (4:3, ....)
Encode Delay (Standard, ....)
Auto bitrate (On/Off)
Bitrate (value)
Entropy coding (CABAC, ....)
Automatic GOP size (Yes/No)
GOP size (value)
Audio
PID (value)
Input Format (PCM, ....)
Standard (MPEG1 Layer II, ....)
Source (Analog 1, Stereo 1 (Grp1/ Ch1-2,
....)
Signaling mode (Stereo, ....)
Audio Mode (Stereo, ....)
Frame per PES (One audio frame, ....)
Bitrate (value)
No source mode (Silence, ....)
AAC Syntax (Mpeg-2, ....)
AAC Encapsulation (ADTS, ....)
Ancillary
PID (value)
External Component
Settings *
Input PID (value)
Service Settings *
Service Id (value)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Output PID (value)
83
Functions
Parameters
TS Settings *
Bitrate automatic computing (Yes/No)

Bitrate (value)
If a TS to
Modulator is
instantiated
ASI Settings
TS (Enabled/Disabled)
Modulator Slot number (value)
Activity (Yes/No)
Output Selection (value)
IP Tx Settings
Destination IP Address (value)

Destination UDP Port (value)
Tx Encapsulation (MPEG/UDP/IP, ....)
LAN Settings
Enable interface (Yes/No)

Port number (value)
IP Address (value)
Netmask (value)
Default Gateway (value)
Gateway Settings
* These parameters can also be edited in an Encoding Profile
84
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Parameters that can be edited on a Decoder

Figure 4-24. Menu tree of decoder configuration
Table 4-6. List of parameters that can be edited on a decoder
Functions
Parameters
ASI Settings
Activity (Yes/No)
LAN Settings

Port number (value)
IP Address (value)
Netmask (value)
IP Rx Settings
Multicast Address (value)

Destination UDP Port (value)
Encapsulation (MPEG/UDP/IP, ....)
Service Settings
Service Selection Mode By Id (only

if By PID or By Service name has
been previously selected via the
Web Browser).
Selection modes By PID or By
Service name can not be selected
via the front panel.
Service Id (value).
Service PID or Service name can
not be edited via the front panel.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

85
Table 4-6. List of parameters that can be edited on a decoder
Functions
Output Settings
Parameters
SDI
Activity (Yes/No)
ASI
(IP to ASI Gateway)
Activity (Yes/No)
Audio settings
(Single channel
board: Audio to
board front panel)
Analog audio:
Activity (Yes/No)
XLR Output
(Out1(L1)/Out2(R1),
(Out3(L2)/Out4(R2))
Source (Audio 1 to Audio 8)
Level (value)
Digital audio:
Activity (Yes/No)
XLR Input (Out1(AES1),
Out2(AES2), Out3(AES3),
Out4(AES4))
Source (Audio 1 to Audio 8)
Gateway Settings
Parameters that can be edited on a Modulator

Figure 4-25. Menu tree of Modulator configuration
Table 4-7. List of parameters that can be edited on a modulator
Functions
Parameters
TS Selection
TS Selection (Internal, ....)
Modulation Settings
Standard (DVB-S2, ....)

ModCod (8PSK 5/6, ....)
Symbol Rate (45,000,000 Baud, ....)
Roll-Off (0.35, ....)
86
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Table 4-7. List of parameters that can be edited on a modulator
Functions
RF Output Settings
Parameters
Activity (Yes/No)
Output Level (value)
Modulator Frequency (value)
Carried Modulated (Yes/No)
Stream Input Loss (Yes/No)
Parameters that can be edited in the Aggregation function

Figure 4-26. Menu tree of Aggregation function
Table 4-8. List of parameters that can be edited in the Aggregation function
Functions
LAN Settings
Parameters
IP Address (value)
Netmask (value)
Procedure for changing parameter values

Please refer to Figure 4-4 Menu tree of screens displayed on the
CP6000 / CP6100 front paneI 2/2 on page 72 and the editable
parameter tables above:
1. Use the , , , and OK keys to select the parameter and press
OK to edit it.
2. Set the parameter value
To change a numeric value:

- Select the value to change using the or key until the
marker indicates the value to change.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

87
- Set the value with the or key.

- Press OK to confirm the new value.
Figure 4-27. Change a numeric value
VIDEO
> Bitrate
20, 000
Kbit
To change a non-numeric value:
Figure 4-28. Change a non-numeric value
VIDEO
> End to End delay
Low Delay
- Set the value with the or key.

- Press OK to confirm the new value.
3. Press HOME (once) or ESC (several times) to display the confirmation
screen.
Figure 4-29. Confirmation screen
XXXXXXXX
Apply the configuration?
No=ESC
Yes=OK
Press OK to apply the new value(s) to the current configuration or

ESC/HOME to exit this screen without saving the new value(s).
Consistency between the values is checked.
88
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

5
Web Browser Interface
Chapter
Introduction
This chapter explains how to use the Web Browser Graphical User
Interface to configure the equipment.

Reaching the GUI.......................................................................page 90
Screen Layout ............................................................................page 93
Basic Settings.............................................................................page 121
Advanced Settings.....................................................................page 162
GUI Description .........................................................................page 206
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

89
Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Reaching the GUI
Reaching the GUI

Compatible Web Browsers
The Web Interface has been tested with a Web Browser installed on a
Windows system. You can run the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platform GUI provided you observe the following requirements for your
personal computer:
Web Browser must be Internet Explorer 7.0 (or higher), Mozilla Firefox
3.0 (or higher) or Google Chrome.
Java must be enabled.
Java Runtime Environment 7 update 51 is recommended.
Definition of Users
To operate the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 via a Web Browser connected to its
Web Interface, 2 User logins are set on device shipment.
They have the following names, passwords and profiles:
Table 5-1. Users set on device shipment
User login
Passworda
Profile
admin
admin
administrator
operator
No password
operator
To change the User name or edit the password, refer to section Login Name and Password on
page 96.
The different profiles provide the following rights:

Table 5-2. User profiles and corresponding rights
90
administrator
operator
Product Monitoring
Alarm Monitoring
View Entire Configuration
Configuration Management
Reboot Menu
Password Change
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

.
Multiple administrator sessions can be active. The administrator
session during which the last configuration change occurred has
precedence.
Setting up the link between the PC and the Device

To set up the link between the operating PC and ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Web Interface and reach the GUI:
1. Connect the PC Ethernet link to the C&C connector on the device rear
panel, or to the network connected to this connector.
2. Enter the equipment IP address in the address bar.
Figure 5-1. Reaching the GUI
The Graphical User Interface (GUI) Java applet is launched.

Following connection, the Web Interface Login page will be displayed:
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

91
Figure 5-2. Login page
3. Select your Login Name and enter your Password if admin name is
selected. See section Definition of Users on page 90.
Check Saving connection settings if you wish your Login Name and
Password to be saved on the current PC.
Default Users are set on device shipment (e.g. Login Name = admin
and Password = admin).
The Monitoring, Configuration and Alarm panels are displayed.

See section Panels on page 93.
92
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout
Screen Layout
Panels
When the applet is launched, three panels are automatically displayed on
the screen:
the Monitoring panel
the Configuration panel
the Alarm panel
They will be described in detail later in this section.

Figure 5-3. The Monitoring panel, Configuration panel and Alarm panel
Configuration panel
Monitoring panel
Alarm panel
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

93
Customizing Configuration Tab Layout

By default, each tab is displayed as shown in Figure 5-3 on page 93. You
can choose either to keep such a layout, to display several tabs at a time,
or to display a single tab at a time.
To display several tabs at a time:
1. Click a tabs name and hold the mouse button down.
2. Drag and drop the tab to where you want to display it in the view.
A white-outlined rectangle will appear to show you the new possible
position. An example is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-4. Possible tabs layout
1. Click the tab and hold down the mouse
2. Drag the tab
3. Drop the tab
New tabs layout
94
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

The tab is then moved to its new position. In our example, the tab is
displayed under the previous tab in the list of configurations.
You can modify the order of tabs in the list of configurations by
dragging & dropping them from a position to another.
To move the tab back to its original position, proceed the same
way: click the tabs name and hold the mouse button, and then drag and
drop the tab next to the other tabs in the list of configurations.
To display a single tab in the whole view, double-click the tab.
Double-click it again to display your previous tabs layout.
Status Bar
Figure 5-5. The status bar
Information
The status bar gives the following information:
CPU gives a graphical indication of the CPU load (usage ratio).
Status gives the general status of the device internal processing.
if there are one or more critical alarms
if there is no error and one or more major alarms
if there is no error and no alarm
Name of the user connected and name and IP address of the ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform.
Date and Time give the local time and date.
Time zone gives the time zone which can be the equipment time zone,
the Local time zone, or a GMT time zone.
About displays software and hardware information about the

equipment:
Part number
Serial number
Version number
Options
MIBs (click on a MIB to save it)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

95
Figure 5-6. About page
Login Name and Password

The status bar can be used to change your Login Name (admin or
operator) and edit the admin password.
To change your Login name:
1. Click
,the Login page will be displayed:
Figure 5-7. Login page
2. Select your new Login Name and enter the Password if admin Login
name is selected.
96
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

To edit the admin password (current Login Name must be admin):
1. Click
,the Password edit page will be displayed:
Figure 5-8. Password edit page
2. Enter the Old password (current password).

Enter the New Password.
Confirm the New Password.
3. Click Change.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

97
Monitoring Panel
Purpose
The Monitoring panel lets you see all content received by the ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform in real time. Its content is
periodically refreshed.
Main Window
Figure 5-9. Monitoring panel
Aggregation ports: CP6000 only
Slot 3 and Slot 4: CP6000 only
The following information is displayed:
Aggregation (CP6000 only): Ethernet IP address information and

Ethernet link speed.
Depending on the slot content:
For an MPEG Encoder

- SDI input level: Video standard and audio format.
- Ethernet port level: IP address and link speed.
- ASI Out level: TS connected to the port and TS bitrate.
98
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

For an MPEG Decoder

- Ethernet port level: Port IP address, port link speed, TS
connected to the port, TS destination address and VLAN Id
value (if VLAN tagging is enabled).
- ASI In level: TS connected to the input.
- TS level: SI/PSI table information (PAT, CAT, SDT).
- Service level: Name, ID, PMT PID, PCR PID.
- Component level: Type and PID.
For an MPEG RF Modulator

- ASI input with TS bitrate information.
- Internal TS input with TS bitrate information.
- RF output with frequency information.
Empty
The following icons can be displayed:

Table 5-3. Monitoring icons specifications
SLOT
Slot 1: Empty
Slot 3: Empty
Slot 1: Active
Slot 3: Active
Slot 1: Disabled
Slot 3: Disabled
Slot 1: Error
Slot 3: Error
Slot 2: Empty
Slot 4: Empty
Slot 2: Active
Slot 4: Active
Slot 2: Disabled
Slot 4: Disabled
Slot 2: Error
Slot 4: Error
ASI
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Input ASI enabled
Output ASI enabled
Input ASI enabled

unlocked
Output ASI enabled error
Input ASI disabled
Output ASI disabled
99
Giga Ethernet
Aggregation
Giga Ethernet enabled

unlocked
Giga Ethernet enabled
Giga Ethernet disabled

RF
Output RF enabled
Output RF disabled
Output RF enabled error

SDI
Input SDI Active Locked
Input SDI Backup Active

Locked
Input SDI Active

Unlocked

Unlocked
Input SDI Inactive
Input SDI Backup Inactive
Input SDI Nominal Active

Locked

Standby

Unlocked

Standby Unlocked
Input SDI Nominal

Inactive
Input SDI Backup Inactive

Standby
Output SDI

Standby Unlocked
Input SDI Nominal
Inactive
TS
100
Input TS enabled
Input TS Backup Active
Input TS disabled
Input TS Backup Standby
Input TS Nominal Active
Output TS enabled
Input TS Nominal
Standby
Output TS disabled
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Service
Digital television
Radio
Nvod
Teletext
Mosaic
Data / Private
Component
Video
Subtitle
Audio
Data / Private
Teletext
Ghost Component
Container
Ghost
Overlay
PCR support
Warning
Scrambling
Error
Scrambling
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Scrambling root
EMM
ECM
Scrambling group
101
Configuration Panel
Management Tab
Purpose
The Management tab is used to reboot the chassis or any board (MPEG
or Modulator board) or enable LED flashing on any board front panel for
identification purposes (which can be very useful for preventing one
board being mistaken for another when an operation is required, such as
moving a board, for example).
Description
Figure 5-10. Management tab
CP6000 only
The Reboot Shelf button reboots the entire chassis.

The Reboot Slot x button reboots board # x.
The Blink Slot x button enables LED flashing on board # x.
102
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Statistics Tab
Purpose
The Statistics tab displays:
Device temperature
Bitrate at the Decoder
Ethernet or ASI inputs (TS level)
TS input (Services level)
Service input (Components level)
Main Window
Figure 5-11. Statistics tab
Chart sub-panel
Monitoring panel
Caption sub-panel
Description
The Statistics tab consists of 2 sub-panels and a toolbar:
The Chart sub-panel displays the charts.
Figure 5-12. Chart sub-panel
The Caption sub-panel is used to select the content of the displayed

charts and indicates the Last value, Minimum value and Maximum
value for each parameter during the display time.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

103
Figure 5-13. Caption sub-panel
The toolbar is used to configure the charts.
Figure 5-14. Toolbar
Toolbar description
Click
to display the chart settings box.
The available settings are as follows:

Figure 5-15. Settings for line charts
104
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Table 5-4. Available settings
First
parameter
Antialiasing
Second
parameter
-
Value scale
color
Values
Time
Display points
Enable/Disable the antialiasing filter for

display enhancement.
A double-click on this icon opens a Color
picker menu allowing the Operator to select
the color which will be used in the chart for
drawing the lines and displaying the text.
R, G, B
RGB component decimal values for the color.
Display grid
Enable/Disable the value display grid.
Auto vertical
size
Enable/Disable the auto vertical size feature.

When the box is unchecked, the vertical scale
is automatically adjusted (Min. and Max.
values are extracted from the data).
When the box is unchecked, two fields are
added to set the Min. and Max. values
manually.
Division count
Adjust the number of value display grid lines.
Display grid
Enable/Disable the time display grid.
Division count
Adjust the number of time display grid lines.
Window
duration
Adjust the time scale.
Enable/Disable the measurement point

display.
Click
and click
displayed chart.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Definition
in the Confirmation box to reset the
105
Figure 5-16. Confirmation box
Click
to display or hide the Caption sub-panel.
Figure 5-17. Chart sub-panel with or without Caption sub-panel
Click
and select the type of chart to display.
is not displayed if Temperature chart is

selected.
106
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Figure 5-18. Type of chart to display
Temperature Chart
Double-click
in the Monitoring panel to display the
temperature charts. In the Caption sub-panel, select the slot temperature
to display:
Figure 5-19. Temperature charts
Slot 3 temperature chart
Slot 1 temperature chart
Select the slot temperature to display
The Temperature charts give the chipset temperature per slot. The
maximum permitted temperature is 85C. The product is fully reliable up
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

107
to this temperature. A temperature in the 60-85C range is normal during

operation.
On the CP6000 Platform, as cold air enters side slots 1 and 2, it is
normal that the temperature of these slots is lower than the
temperature of slots 3 and 4.
It is important to note that there is no ventilation until the
temperature has reached about 50C. This ventilation strategy is
designed to minimize noise and maximize product service life. This
is also why there is a large temperature difference between slots 1
and 2 and slots 3 and 4. When the ventilation increases the
temperature difference between the slots decreases.
Decoder/ASI or Ethernet Charts
Double-click ETH x (
) or ASI IN - IO x
(
) in the Monitoring panel to display the TS bitrate charts.
In the caption sub-panel, select the TS charts to display:
Figure 5-20. TS bitrate charts
TS bitrate charts
Select TS to display
108
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Decoder/TS Chart
Double-click TS x(
) in the Monitoring panel
to display the components of the TS with their bitrate chart. In the
Caption sub-panel, select the component charts to display:
Figure 5-21. TS components, bitrate charts
TS components bitrate charts
Select the components of the TS to display
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

109
Decoder/Service Chart
Double-click Service (
) in the Monitoring panel
to display the components of the service with their bitrate chart. In the
Caption sub-panel, select the component charts to display:
Figure 5-22. Service components, bitrate charts
Service components bitrate charts
Select the components of the service to display
110
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Ip Counters Tab
Purpose
The IP Counters tab displays the quality of the IP RX streams on the
Decoder.
Main Window
Figure 5-23. IpCounters tab
Toolbar
Panel
Monitoring panel
Description
The IP Counters tab consists of 1 panel and a toolbar:
The panel displays the IP counter values slot by slot.
Figure 5-24. Ip Counter panel
Panel description
Port
Stream
IP@:
VLAN)
Active Port(s) on the MPEG Decoder board. One port

is displayed per IP Rx: If the same port receives n IP
Rx it is displayed n times.
(Rx
port
Uptime
IP Rx destination address and port.

The VLAN Id value is indicated if VLAN tagging is
used.
Time during which the IP Counter is in operation.
Received
Packets
IP
Number of IP packets received during the counter

uptime.
Missing
Packets
IP
Number of IP packets lost during the counter uptime.

The measurement is performed before FEC.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

111
Missing
Packets
FEC
IP
after
Number of IP packets lost during the counter uptime.

The measurement is performed after FEC.
Click
to reset the counters of this IP Rx.
The toolbar is used to configure the slot display (simultaneous or tab

by tab display).
Figure 5-25. Slot display configuration
112
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Automation Tab
Purpose
The Automation tab is used to define the activation time of
configurations stored in the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
memory.
Description
Figure 5-26. Automation tab
Schedule
The Select button selects the type of automation.

Figure 5-27. Type of automation
No automation: the configurations will be activated manually.
Schedule: the configurations will be activated using a schedule.
When the Schedule type is selected, basic tools are available in the
toolbar for schedule editing.
Figure 5-28. Basic tools
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

113
Table 5-5. Basic tools in the editing toolbar
Display
Definition
Insert a new schedule after the current selection.
Insert a new schedule before the current selection.
Duplicate the current selection.
Move up the current selection.
Move down the current selection.
Remove the current selection.
Remove all
Refer to section Setting Automation on page 202 for further

information on automation.
114
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Configuration Tabs
Purpose
The Configuration tabs are used to edit one or more configurations for
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform. Once edited, the
configurations are sent to the equipment for storage or application.
Description
Configurations are listed in tabs.
Figure 5-29. The list of configurations
Configuration tabs
In the list of configurations, the way the name of the configuration

appears in the tab indicates its status.
Table 5-6. List of configurations
Display
Type of
configuration
Definition
Green mark prior the

configurations name
Active configuration
Configuration that is
currently being used by the
equipment.
Configurations name
written between
brackets
New configuration
Configuration that has not

been sent to the equipment.
Normal text
Configuration sent to
the equipment
Configuration that has been

sent to the equipment but is
not currently being used.
Color of the tab in a

slightly lighter grey
than the other tabs
Displayed
configuration
currently being displayed in
the working area.
Small star next to the

configurations name
Configuration being
edited
currently being modified.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

115
The buttons displayed on the configuration toolbar vary according to the

actions that you are allowed to perform.
Figure 5-30. The Configuration toolbar
List of configurations
Opening / Creating configurations
LAN 1 / LAN 2 of the Manager board settings (CP6000 only)

Scrambling shared by the Encoder & Decoder modules
The toolbar buttons are spread out on two lines:
The first line contains buttons dedicated to opening or creating a

configuration.
The right part of the second line applies to the configuration that is
selected in the list of configurations.
Possible actions depend on the configuration status (Active
configuration, New configuration, Configuration sent to the
equipment, Displayed configuration, Configuration being edited).
They are described in the following table:
Table 5-7. Toolbar buttons (right part of the second line)
Click
116
Comments
Open
Open a configuration from a file.
New
Create a new configuration manually.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Table 5-8. Toolbar buttons (second line)
Click
Comments
Rename
Rename the configuration.
Remove
Remove the configuration from the list of

configurations. It is not possible to remove the
active configuration.
Send
Send the
memory.
Apply
Make the selected configuration active on the

equipment. This button is not available if
automation is running.
Save
Save the configuration to a file.
Copy
Duplicate the configuration.
Check
Check the configurations coherence.
Edit/Unedit
Switch between Edit mode and Read-only mode.

When clicking Unedit, all modifications in the
configuration that is currently modified are lost.
configuration
to
the
equipments
The center part is used to display the Product configuration panel or

the settings shared by the Encoder/Decoder modules.
Scrambling parameters are shared by the Encoder/Decoder modules.
Possible actions are described in the following table:
Table 5-9. Toolbar buttons (center part of the second line)
Click
Comments
Display the Configuration panel.
Display the Scrambling parameters. These
parameters are shared by the Encoder/Decoder
modules.
Display the LAN 1 / LAN 2 parameters of the
Manager board (CP6000 only).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

117
Alarms Panel
Purpose
The Alarm panel displays an active alarms list and a closed alarms list.
The list of active alarms shows all alarms that are active at the current
time. The list of closed alarms shows all past alarms. Alarms (active and
closed) are saved in the flash memory, and are restored when the
equipment is rebooted.
Main Window
The Alarms panel is composed of two tabs: the Active alarms tab and
the Closed alarms tab.
To display simultaneously active and closed alarms, drag one tab.
Active Alarms Tab

Figure 5-31. Alarms panel - Active alarms tab
The Active alarms tab displays a table filled with the active alarms. This
table has 3 columns:
118
The Level column displays icons reporting alarm severity:
: Warning
: Critical alarm
: Major alarm
: Minor alarm
: Information
The Description column gives an alarm description.
The Start column gives the rising alarm time.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Closed Alarms Tab

Figure 5-32. Alarms panel - Closed alarms tab
The closed alarms tab displays a table filled with past alarms. When an
alarm disappears, it is moved from the Active alarms tab to the Closed
alarms tab. This table has 4 columns:
The Level column displays icons reporting alarm severity:
: Warning
: Critical alarm
: Major alarm
: Minor alarm
: Information
The Description column gives an alarm description.
The Start column gives the rising alarm time.
The End column gives the falling alarm time.
Clear and Save Buttons

These buttons are located at the top right of the Alarm panel.
The Clear button deletes the content of the closed alarms list.
When clicking the Clear button, all the closed alarms are removed
from the Closed alarms view. Only a clear display is applied: other
users will still be able to see them.
The Save button is used to save the alarms (active and closed) into a text
file. When you click the Save button, a dialog box will appear so that you
can choose the file name and directory for log saving. Once saved, the
log file can be opened and read with any word processor application
software.
Resizing the Columns

Each column on the alarm tables can be resized. Move your mouse
cursor between two header columns. The mouse cursor should change
to . Click and drag the column to the desired size, and then release the
mouse button.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

119
Sorting Alarms by Level, Extent, Description, Start date or End Date

The Level, Extent, Description, Start date and End date columns can be
sorted. Click the header column once. A white arrow appears in this
header. To change the sorting mode, click the header once more. When
sorted in increasing order, the arrow is displayed. In decreasing order,
the arrow is shown.
120
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings
Basic Settings
Foreword
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms are modular chassis which
offer 4 slots in the CP6000 Platform and 2 slots in the CP6100 Platform.
Each slot can be fitted with a hot swappable MPEG board or a hot
Modulator board. The MPEG board supports one (Single Channel MPEG
board) or two (Dual Channels MPEG boards) MPEG encoding channels or
one or two MPEG decoding channels.
This section contains a step-by-step procedure explaining how to
configure:
one MPEG encoding channel (to be done twice for a board configured
as a dual encoder)
one MPEG decoding channel (to be done twice for a board configured
as a dual decoder)
one Modulator board
Creating a New Configuration

1. Click New in the Configuration panel toolbar to create a new
configuration.
An empty configuration is added with the name (New configuration):
Figure 5-33. Empty configuration
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

121
2. Rename the configuration by clicking the Rename button in the

toolbar.
Figure 5-34. Renaming the configuration
122
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Setting an MPEG Encoder

The MPEG Encoder board can host:
Dual Channels MPEG board: Two MPEG Encoders. Only one
MPEG Encoder configuration is described in this section. The
procedure is the same for the second one.
Single Channel MPEG board: One MPEG Encoder. It hosts an
Audio connector on its front panel.
This section describes the Dual Channels MPEG board. Regarding
the Single Channel MPEG board, only the differences compared to
the Dual Channels MPEG board are indicated.
Creating the Encoder Branch

1. Right-click Sources then select the shortcut command Add Encoder
Dual Module (Dual Channels MPEG board) or Add Encoder Single
Module (Single Channel MPEG board).
Figure 5-35. Adding an MPEG Encoder Module
2. Right-click Slot x - Dual-Encoder then select the shortcut command

Add MPEG Encoder Input interface.
Figure 5-36. Adding an MPEG Encoder Input interface
A branch is automatically created. It comprises 2 basic elements Slot x MPEG Encoder, SDI Input: Pair x which represent the first part of the
first MPEG Encoder. They contain default values. The parameters of each
element will be changed in the next steps.
Other elements such as Video Encoder, Audio Encoder, Output
Service, MPEG Transport Stream, TS over IP, TS over ASI will be added
to the branch later on at the Operators request as explained in this
section.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

123
Figure 5-37. Encoder default branch
Slot x - MPEG Encoder

element
Input interface
element
To delete the branch, right-click first the first element Slot x Dual-Encoder then select the shortcut command Delete branch.
To declare the second MPEG Encoder of the same board,

right-click first the first element Slot x - Dual-Encoder then select
the shortcut command Add MPEG Encoder input Interface to
create a second branch.
A second branch
is created
124
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Selecting the Slot

1. Double-click the first element Slot x - Dual-Encoder for editing.
Figure 5-38. Setting the Slot x - Dual-Encoder element
a. Enter the number of the slot the Encoder is plugged to.

b. Enter the Encoder name and select the channel mode.
Refer to section Slot x - Dual-Encoder Dialog Box on page 206
for more details about these parameters.
c. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.
Selecting the Source

1. Double-click the second element SDI Input for editing.
Figure 5-39. Setting the Input interface element
a. Edit the source parameters (Input Pair, Source selector, Input

backup mode).
Refer to section SDI Input Dialog Box on page 207 for more
details about these parameters.
b. Click the cross
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

125
Creating the Compressed Video Component

1. Right-click the SDI Input: Pair x element then select the shortcut
command Add / Video Encoder to add the compressed video
component.
Figure 5-40. Selecting Add Video Encoder
A Video Encoder element is automatically added.

Figure 5-41. Video Encoder element is displayed
2. Double-click Video Encoder element for editing.

Figure 5-42. Setting the Video Encoder element
a. Select the Standard parameters (Input Standard, No source

mode, ......), the compression standard (Encoding format, Video
profile, End to End Delay, ......), and the video bitrate (Bitrate).
b. Define some advanced video compression parameters (Entropy
coding and P picture period, GOP size when End to End delay is
set to Standard delay, .......).
126
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Refer to section Video Encoder Dialog Box on page 209 for

more details about these parameters.
c. Click the cross

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

127
Setting the MPEG Program (DVB Service)

1. Right-click the Video Encoder element then select the shortcut
command Insert into new / Output Service to add the compressed
video component to a new service.
Figure 5-43. Selecting Insert into new / Output service
The Video Pid 512 and Output Service elements are automatically
added.
Figure 5-44. Video Pid 512 element and Output service element are displayed
To add the compressed video component to an existing service (if

any), select the shortcut command Insert into / (Output service x)
then select the appropriate service.
2. Double-click the Video Pid 512 element for editing.

Figure 5-45. Setting the Video Pid element
a. Set the PID of the video component (Pid).

b. Click the cross
128
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

3. Double-click the Output Service element for editing.

Figure 5-46. Setting the Output service element
a. Enter the service parameters (Service name, Program number)

and the PMT PID (PMT PID).
b. Set the Scrambling (Enabled box and Profile selection).
Refer to section Output Service Dialog Box on page 225 for
c. Click the cross
Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) - Dual Channels

MPEG board
1. Right-click the SDI Input element then select the shortcut command
Add / Audio Encoder to add a compressed audio component.
Figure 5-47. Selecting the shortcut command Add / Audio Encoder
An Audio Encoder element is automatically added.

Figure 5-48. Audio Encoder element is displayed
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

129
Repeat this step as many times as necessary if you want to add more
than one audio encoder (up to 8 audio encoders are allowed per
encoding channel).
Example of 4 Audio Encoders

in a channel
2. Double-click each Audio Encoder element for editing.

Figure 5-49. Setting the Audio Encoder element
a. Select the audio input format (Input Format).

b. Select the audio source(s) (Audio source), the audio
compression standard (Audio Standard), the mono, dual or
surround channels mode (Audio mode), the number of frame
130
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

per PES (Frame per PES), the No source mode, the AAC settings
(AAC Syntax and AAC Encapsulation) if Audio Standard is set to
AAC and the audio delay (Delay).
c. Set the bitrate (Bitrate) after compression.
Refer to section Audio Encoder Dialog Box on page 217 for
d. Click the cross
3. Right-click the Audio Encoder element then select the shortcut
command Insert into / Output Service (x) to add the compressed audio
component to the service previously created for the video component.
Figure 5-50. Selecting Insert into / Output service (x)
The Audio Pid 4112 element is automatically created with a link to the
Output service.
Figure 5-51. Audio Pid element with a link to the Output service element is displayed
4. Double-click the Audio Pid 4112 element for editing.

Figure 5-52. Setting the Audio Pid element
a. Set the PID of the audio component (Pid).

b. Click the cross
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

131
Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) - Single Channel

MPEG board
Audio extracted from SDI signal
Refer to section Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) - Dual
Channels MPEG board on page 129.
Analog/Digital Audio from Audio connector

1. Right-click the Slot x - Single-Encoder element then select the shortcut
command Add / Audio Input Interface to add an audio inputs element.
An Audio Inputs element is automatically added.

Figure 5-54. Audio Inputs element is displayed
2. Double-click Audio Inputs element for editing.

Figure 5-55. Setting the Audio Inputs element
a. Indicate the type of audio (Digital / Analog) injected on the 4 XLR

connectors (In1 to In4).
Analog Audio: Indicate the Alignment and the Headroom levels.
Digital Audio: Indicate if the Sample Rate Converted is enabled.
Refer to section Audio Inputs Dialog Box on page 215 for more
b. Click the cross
132
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

3. Right-click the Audio Inputs element then select the shortcut

command Add / Audio Encoder to add a compressed audio
component.
An Audio Encoder element is automatically added.

Figure 5-57. Audio Encoder element is displayed
Repeat this step as many times as necessary if you want to add more
than one audio encoder (up to 8 audio encoders are allowed per
encoding channel).
Example of 2 stereo Audio Encoders in an MPEG Encoder.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

133
4. Double-click each Audio Encoder element for editing.

Figure 5-58. Setting the Audio Encoder element
a. Select the audio input format (Input Format).

b. Select the audio source(s) (Audio source), the audio
compression standard (Audio Standard), the mono, dual or
surround channels mode (Audio mode), the number of frame
per PES (Frame per PES), the No source mode, the AAC settings
(AAC Syntax and AAC Encapsulation) if Audio Standard is set to
AAC and the audio delay (Delay).
c. Set the bitrate (Bitrate) after compression.
Refer to section Audio Encoder Dialog Box on page 217 for
d. Click the cross
command Insert into / Output Service (x) to add the compressed audio
component to the service previously created for the video component.
The Audio Pid 4112 element is automatically created with a link to the
Output service.
134
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Figure 5-60. Audio Pid element with a link to the Output service element is displayed
6. Double-click the Audio Pid 4112 element for editing.

Figure 5-61. Setting the Audio Pid element
a. Set the PID of the audio component (Pid).

b. Click the cross
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

135
Setting the Transport Stream

1. Right-click the Output Service element then select the shortcut
command Insert into new / MPEG Transport Stream.
Figure 5-62. Selecting the shortcut command Insert into new / MPEG Transport Stream
The Transport Stream element is automatically added.

Figure 5-63. Transport Stream element is displayed
Dual Channels MPEG board:

To add a Service to an existing Transport Stream (if any), select
the shortcut command Insert into / Transport Stream (x) then
select the appropriate Transport Stream.
136
It is possible to build a Multi-Program TS (MPTS) by adding a

service from the other encoder of the same MPEG board.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

2. Double-click the Transport Stream element for editing.

Figure 5-64. Setting the Transport Stream element
a. Check the Activity box to enable the Transport stream.

b. Set its identification (Original Network Id, Transport stream Id).
c. Set the output TS bitrate (Bitrate) or check Automatic TS bitrate
computing.
d. If necessary, load a NIT file.
Refer to section Transport Stream Dialog Box on page 226 for
e. Click the cross
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

137
Encapsulating TS over ASI

1. Right-click the Transport Stream element then select the shortcut
command Add / TS over ASI.
Figure 5-65. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS over ASI
TS over ASI element is automatically added.

Figure 5-66. TS over ASI element is displayed
2. Double-click the TS over ASI element for editing.

Figure 5-67. Setting the TS over ASI element
a. Check the Activity box to enable the ASI output.

b. Select the ASI Output connector (Output).
c. Set the size and mode for the TS packets (Packet Size, Packet
Mode).
Refer to section ASI Output Dialog Box on page 228 for more
d. Click the cross
138
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Encapsulating TS over IP
command Add / TS over IP.
Figure 5-68. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS over IP
IP Tx element is automatically added.

Figure 5-69. IP Tx element is displayed
2. Double-click the IP Tx element for editing.

Figure 5-70. Setting the IP Tx element
a. Check the Activity box to enable the IP transmission.

b. Set the Session connection parameters (Tx Encapsulation,
Destination IP address, Destination UDP port and Source UDP
port).
c. Enable or disable the virtual source IP address (Virtual source @
check box) and set its value if enabled (Virtual source IP @ field).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
139
d. Enable or disable the VLAN tagging (VLAN tagging check box)

and select the VLAN Id if enabled (VLAN Id field).Set the other IP
parameters (TOS, TTL) and the number of TS packets to
encapsulate in IP datagrams (Nber of TP per IP frame).
e. Enable or disable TS stuffing (Null packet stuffing check box).
f. Set the FEC parameters (FEC Mode).
Caution: Null packet stuffing is required for the CP6000 decoder.
This box must be left checked.
Refer to section IP Tx Dialog Box on page 229 for more details

about these parameters.
g. Click the cross
140
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Linking TS to Modulator
command Add / TS to Modulator
Figure 5-71. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS to Modulator
The TS to Modulator element is automatically added.

Figure 5-72. TS to Modulator element displayed
2. Double-click the TS to Modulator element for editing.

Figure 5-73. Setting the TS to Modulator element
a. Select the Modulator slot (Slot number).

b. Check Enabled to validate the link between the TS and
Modulator.
c. Click the cross
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

141
Linking TS to MPTS
command Add / TS to MPTS
Figure 5-74. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS to MPTS
The TS to MPTS element is automatically added.

Figure 5-75. TS to MPTS element displayed
2. Double-click the TS to MPTS element for editing. Refer to section

Creating an MPTS across MPEG Encoder Boards on page 168 for
Setting the Ethernet Interface

1. Right-click the IP Tx element then select the shortcut command Insert
into new / Ethernet output interface.
Figure 5-76. Selecting the shortcut command Insert into new / Ethernet output interface
LAN1 element is automatically added.

Figure 5-77. LAN1 element is displayed
Agg x = Lan x of the Manager board
142
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

2. Double-click the LAN1 element for editing.

Figure 5-78. Setting the LAN1 interface element
a. Check the Enable interface box to enable the Ethernet interface.

b. Select the Ethernet port (Port Number). 1 and 2 correspond to
the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports of the board. Agg 1 and Agg 2
correspond to the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports of the Manager board.
If Agg 1 or Agg 2 is selected, the parameters below are not
displayed. The Ethernet interfaces of the Manager board are set
in the Aggregation configuration page. Refer to section Dialog
Boxes Related to LAN 1 / LAN 2 ports on the Manager board
(CP6000) on page 253.
The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the processing
board and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is
exclusive.
c. Set the IP interface parameters (IP address, Netmask, Default

Gateway). This port and the Control & Command port must be
part of different IP subnets, without overlaps.
d. Select the interface speed (1Gbps, 100 Mbps
Autonegotiation) according to your Ethernet infrastructure.
or
e. Select the interface state when disabled (Interface state when

disabled).
f. Select the IGMP protocol (IGMP).
g. Create up to 4 static routes in the Routes text area. Each route is
defined by the following parameters: Destination IP address,
Mask, Next hop, Cost.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

143
Figure 5-79. Adding static routes
The button removes the route from the table
Refer to section LAN x Dialog Box on page 232 for more

h. Click the cross
144
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Setting an MPEG Decoder

The MPEG Decoder board can host:
Dual Channels MPEG board: Two MPEG Decoders. Only one
MPEG Decoder configuration is described in this section. The
procedure is the same for the second one.
Single Channel MPEG board: One MPEG Decoder. It hosts an
Audio connector on its front panel.
This section describes the Dual Channels MPEG board. Regarding
the Single Channel MPEG board, only the differences compared to
the Dual Channels MPEG board are indicated.
Creating the Decoder Branch

1. Right-click Sources then select the shortcut command Add Decoder
Dual Module (Dual Channels MPEG board) or Add Decoder Single
Module (Single Channel MPEG board).
Figure 5-80. Adding an MPEG Decoder Module
1. Right-click Slot x - Dual-Decoder then select the shortcut command

Add Ethernet Input interface.
Figure 5-81. Adding MPEG Decoder Input interface
A branch is automatically created. It is made of 1 basic element Slot x Dual-Decoder which represents the first part of the MPEG Decoder. It is
allocated default values. The parameters of this element will be changed
in the next steps.
Other elements like ASI Input interface or IP Input Interface, Service
configuration, Output Pair will be added to the branch later on at the
Operators request as explained in this section.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

145
Figure 5-82. Decoder default branch
Slot x - MPEG Decoder

element
Input interface
element
To delete the branch, right-click first the first element Slot x Dual-Decoder then select the shortcut command Delete branch.
To declare the second MPEG Decoder of the same board,

right-click first the first element Slot x - Dual-Decoder then select
the shortcut command Add Ethernet input Interface to create a
second branch.
A second branch
is created
Selecting the Slot

1. Double-click the first element Slot x - Dual- Decoder for editing.
Figure 5-83. Setting the Slot x - Dual- Decoder element
a. Enter the number of the slot the Decoder is plugged to.

b. Enter the Decoder name and the channel mode.
Refer to section Slot x - Dual-Decoder Dialog Box on page 234
for more details about these parameters.
c. Click the cross
146
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Selecting the ASI Input Interface

1. Right-click the Slot x - Dual- Decoder element then select the shortcut
command Add / ASI Input Interface if the TS is received on the ASI
interface.
Figure 5-84. Selecting Add / ASI Input Interface
The ASI Input element is automatically added.

Figure 5-85. ASI Input element is displayed
2. Double-click the ASI Input element for editing.

Figure 5-86. Setting the ASI Input element
a. Check the Activity box to enable the ASI Input interface.

b. Select the ASI source connector (Source selector).
Refer to section ASI INPUT Dialog Box on page 235 for more
details about this parameter.
c. Click the cross
Selecting the Ethernet Input Interface

1. Right-click the Slot x - Dual- Decoder element then select the shortcut
command Add / Ethernet Input Interface if the TS is received on the
Ethernet interface.
Figure 5-87. Selecting Add / Ethernet Input Interface
The LAN 1 element is automatically added.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
147
Figure 5-88. LAN 1 element is displayed

Agg x = Lan x of the Manager board
2. Double-click the LAN 1 element for editing.

Figure 5-89. Setting the LAN1 element
a. Check the Enable interface box to enable the Ethernet interface.

b. Select the Ethernet port (Port Number). 1 and 2 correspond to
the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports of the board. Agg 1 and Agg 2
correspond to the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports of the Manager board.
If Agg 1 or Agg 2 is selected, the parametres below are not
displayed. The Ethernet interfaces of the Manager board are set
in the Aggregation configuration page. Refer to section Dialog
Boxes Related to LAN 1 / LAN 2 ports on the Manager board
(CP6000) on page 253.
The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the processing
exclusive.
c. Set the IP device parameters (IP address, Netmask, Default

Gateway). This port and the Control & Command port must be
part of different IP subnets, without overlaps.
d. Select the interface speed (1Gbps or 100 Mbps
Autonegotiation) according to your Ethernet infrastructure.
or
e. Select the interface state when disabled (Interface state when

disabled).
148
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

f. Select the IGMP protocol used to join multicast streams (IGMP).

g. Create up to 4 static routes In the Route text area. Each route is
defined by the following parameters: Destination IP address,
Mask, Next hop, Cost.
Figure 5-90. Adding static routes
The button removes the route from the table
Refer to section LAN x Dialog Box on page 235 for more

h. Click the cross
Selecting the IP Rx Stream

1. Right-click the LAN x element then select the shortcut command Add
/ IP Receive if the TS is received on the Ethernet interface.
Figure 5-91. Selecting Add / IP Receive
The IP Rx element is automatically added.

Figure 5-92. IP Rx Interface element is displayed
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

149
2. Double-click the IP Rx element for editing.

Figure 5-93. Setting the IP Rx element
a. Check the Enabled box to enable IP Rx stream reception.

b. Set the name of the IP Rx stream (Name), its destination IP
address and destination UDP port (Multicast address and
Destination UDP port).
c. Set the IP Packet Delay Variation (Network Jitter) of the network
expressed in milliseconds (Max IPDV).
d. Set the IP Rx stream encapsulation (Encapsulation).
e. Enable or disable Forward error Correction (Forward error
Correction check box).
f. Enable or disable the VLAN tagging (VLAN tagging check box)
and select the VLAN Identifier if enabled (VLAN Id field).
g. Enable or disable the IP address source selection (Select source
IP address check box) and set the source IP address if IP address
source selection is enabled (Source IP address field).
Refer to section IP Rx Dialog Box on page 236 for more details
about these parameters.
h. Click the cross
150
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Setting the Service Configuration

1. Proceed as follows:
Right-click the IP receive element then select the shortcut command
Add / Service Input if the TS is received on the Ethernet interface,
or
Right-click the ASI port element then select the shortcut command
Add / Service Input if the TS is received on the ASI interface.
Figure 5-94. Selecting Add / Service Input
if the TS is coming from an Ethernet interface
if the TS is coming from the ASI port
The Input Service element is automatically added.

Figure 5-95. Input Service element is displayed
if the TS is coming from an Ethernet interface
if the TS is coming from the ASI port
2. Double-click the Input Service element for editing.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

151
Figure 5-96. Setting the Input Service element
a. Set the General parameters (Service selection mode). Select the

type of service selection: First Service, By Pid, By Service ID, By
service name.
If Service selection mode = By Service ID: Set the Id of the
service to be decoded (Service ID).
If Service selection mode = By Service Name: Set the name of
the service to be decoded (Service Name).
b. Set the TS redundancy (Enabled box and TS redundancy status).
c. Set the Descrambling (Enabled box and Profile selection).
d. If Service selection mode = By Pid:
- Video: Check the Enable video box to enable video
decoding. Set the video PID (Pid) and the PMT PID (PMT).
Select also the pattern to be displayed when video PID is
absent in the incoming TS (No Video Pid).
- Audio: Up to 8 audio components can be decoded. Add
audio component and check the Enable Audio x box to
enable component processing. Set the audio PID (Pid) and
the format of the audio to decode (Output Format).
- If Service selection mode = By Pid: Add Ancillary/VBI
component and check the Enable Ancillary/VBI box to
enable the component processing. Set the Ancillary/VBI PID
(Pid) and the Transport format (Transport format
(SMPTE 2038, EN 301 775, HD Teletext (OP47) or RDD-11).
e. If Service selection mode differs from By Pid:
- Video: Select the pattern to be displayed when video PID is
absent in the incoming TS (No Video Pid).
152
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

- Audio: Up to 8 audio components can be decoded. Check

the Enable Audio x box to enable component processing.
f. Refer to section Input Service Dialog Box on page 238 for
g. Click the cross
To decode a second service from the same ASI input, right-click first
the ASI Input element then select the shortcut command Add /
Service Input to create a second Input Service element.
A second sub-branch is created
Setting the SDI Output Interface

1. Right-click the Input Service element then select the shortcut
command Add / SDI Output Interface.
Figure 5-97. Selecting Add / SDI Output Interface
The SDI Output: Pair x element is automatically added.

Figure 5-98. SDI Output: Pair x element is displayed
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

153
2. Double-click the SDI Output: Pair x element for editing.

Figure 5-99. Setting the SDI Output: Pair x element
a. Check the Activity box to enable the SDI Output pair.

b. Select the SDI output pair (Pair 1 (IO1 + IO2) or Pair 2 (IO3 + IO4)).
c. Set the Decoder output: Output Standard, SD Aspect Ratio,
Scaling Mode and Scaling Type.
d. Select the HD ANC or SD ANC and VBI that will be embedded in
the SDI output.
e. Edit the Genlock parameters (Frame Synchronizer).
Refer to section SDI Output: Pair x Dialog Box on page 242 for
f. Click the cross
Setting the Audio Output Interface (Single Channel MPEG board)

1. Right-click the Input Service element then select the shortcut
command Add / Audio Output Interface.
Figure 5-100. Selecting Add / Audio Output Interface
The Audio Outputs element is automatically added.
154
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Figure 5-101. Audio Outputs element is displayed
2. Double-click the Audio Outputs element for editing.

Figure 5-102. Setting the Audio Outputs element
a. Indicate the type of audio (Digital / Analog) on the 4 XLR

connectors (Out1 to Out4).
Analog Audio: Indicate the number of the processed component
and the output level.
Digital Audio: Indicate the number of the processed component.
Refer to section Audio Outputs Dialog Box on page 245 for
b. Click the cross
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

155
Setting a Modulator
Creating the Modulator Branch
1. Right-click Sources then select the shortcut command Add /
Modulator IF - BAND Module or Add / Modulator L- BAND Module.
Figure 5-103. Adding Modulator
A branch is automatically created. It comprises 4 basic elements Slot x Modulator, TS Selection, Modulation and RF Output. They contain
default values. The parameters of each element will be changed in the
next steps.
Other elements such as ASI Monitoring will be added to the branch later
on at the Operators request as explained in this section.
Figure 5-104. Default L Band or IF Band Modulator branch
Slot x - Modulator
element
156
TS Selection
element
Modulation
element
RF/IF Output
element
To delete the branch, first right-click the first element Slot x Modulator then select the shortcut command Delete branch.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Selecting the Slot

1. Double-click the first element Slot x - Modulator for editing.
Figure 5-105. Setting the Slot x - Modulator element
a. Enter the number of the slot the Modulator is plugged to.

b. Enter the Modulator name.
Refer to section Slot x - Modulator Dialog Box on page 246 for
c. Click the cross
Selecting the TS Source

1. Double-click the second element TS Selection for editing.
Figure 5-106. Setting the TS Selection element
a. Edit the TS source parameter (Internal, Auto ASI In 1-2, ASI In1,
ASI In2).
Refer to section TS Selection Dialog Box on page 247 for
b. Click the cross
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

157
Creating ASI Output Monitoring

1. Right-click the TS Selection element then select the shortcut
command Add / ASI Output Monitoring to add the ASI monitoring
component.
Figure 5-107. Selecting ASI Output Monitoring
An ASI Monitoring element is automatically added.

Figure 5-108. ASI Monitoring element displayed
2. Double-click the ASI Monitoring element for editing.

Figure 5-109. Setting the ASI Monitoring element
a. Edit the ASI Monitoring Output parameter (Disable, ASI1, ASI2

Internal, Active Stream).
Refer to section ASI Monitoring Dialog Box on page 247 for
b. Click the cross
158
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Setting Modulation
1. Double-click the Modulation element for editing.
Figure 5-110. Setting the Modulation element
DVB-S2 or DVB-S2X Standard
DVB-S/DSNG Standard
a. Edit the Modulation parameters (General parameters).

Refer to section Modulation Dialog Box on page 248 for more
b. Click the cross
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

159
Setting the RF Output

1. Double-click the RF Output element for editing.
Figure 5-111. Setting the RF Output element
a. Edit the RF parameters (RF Output , Output , Auto RF Power Off

Conditions, ClockSynchro).
Refer to section RF Output Dialog Box on page 250 for more
b. Click the cross
160
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Applying or Sending the Configuration to the

Equipment
1. Click Check in the toolbar to find out whether or not the configuration
is coherent.
Figure 5-112. Check report
2. Click Apply to apply the new configuration to the equipment, or Send

to just send it to the equipment without applying it (the new
configuration is automatically checked before being applied or sent).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

161
Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings
Advanced Settings
Advanced Settings, MPEG Encoder
Creating an Ancillary Component
To create an Ancillary component:
Add / Ancillary Encoder.
Figure 5-113. Selecting the shortcut command Add / Ancillary Encoder
An Ancillary Encoder element is automatically added.

Figure 5-114. Ancillary Encoder element is displayed
2. Double-click the Ancillary Encoder element for editing.

Figure 5-115. Setting the Ancillary Encoder element
a. Check the Enable box to enable carriage of the ANC.

b. Select the Ancillary mode: Transparent or HD Teletext (OP47). If
HD Teletext is selected, set the HD Teletext parameters
(Language, Teletext Type, Magazine number and Page Number).
Refer to section Ancillary Encoder Dialog Box on page 221 for
c. Click the cross
162
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

3. Right-click the Ancillary Encoder element then select the shortcut

command Insert into / Output Service (x) to add the component to the
service previously created for the video component.
A link to the Output service is automatically created.

Figure 5-117. Ancillary element with a link to the Output service element is displayed
4. Double-click the Pid 5392 element for editing.

Figure 5-118. Setting the Ancillary Pid element
a. Set the PID of the Ancillary component (Pid).

b. Click the cross
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

163
Creating a VBI Component

A VBI component can be created in SD mode only.
To create a VBI component:
Add / VBI Encoder.
Figure 5-119. Selecting the shortcut command Add / VBI Encoder
A VBI Encoder element is automatically added.

Figure 5-120. VBI Encoder element is displayed
2. Double-click the VBI Encoder element for editing.

Figure 5-121. Setting the VBI Encoder element
625 l
525 l
a. Check the Enable box to enable transmission of the selected VBI

lines.
b. Select the VBI selection mode and the lines which can be added
to the VBI component.
Refer to section VBI Encoder Dialog Box on page 223 for more
c. Click the cross
164
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

3. Right-click the VBI Encoder element then select the shortcut command
Insert into / Output Service (x) to add the component to the service
previously created for the video component.
Figure 5-122. Selecting Insert into / (Output Service x)
The VBI Pid element is automatically created with a link to the Output
service.
Figure 5-123. VBI element with a link to the Output Service element is displayed
4. Double-click the Pid element for editing.

Figure 5-124. Setting the VBI Pid element
a. Set the PID of the VBI component (Pid).

b. Click the cross
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

165
Creating an SCTE 35 Component

SCTE 104 to SCTE 35 is an optional feature used to translate SCTE-104
messages to SCTE 35 messages.
An SCTE 35 component can be created from an SMPTE 2010 DPI
message (SDI input) or SCTE 104 DPI message (C&C IP input).
To create an SCTE 35 component:
Add / Dpi Encoder.
Figure 5-125. Selecting the shortcut command Add / Dpi Encoder
A Dpi Encoder element is automatically added.

Figure 5-126. Dpi Encoder element displayed
2. Double-click the Dpi Encoder element for editing.

Figure 5-127. Setting the Dpi Encoder element
a. Check the Enable box to enable transmission of the splice

message.
b. Select the Specific Parameters message type (SMPTE 2010 or
SCTE 104 over IP and SCTE 104 IP Port).
c. Check the SCTE35 table repetition box to repeat SCTE 35 table
sending and set the Maximum number of repetition.
d. Click the cross
166
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

3. Right-click the Dpi Encoder element then select the shortcut command
Insert into / Output Service (x) to add the component to the service
previously created for the video component.
Figure 5-128. Selecting Insert into / (Output Service x)
The Dpi Pid element is automatically created with a link to the Output
service.
Figure 5-129. Dpi element with a link to the Output Service element displayed
4. Double-click the Pid element for editing.

Figure 5-130. Setting the Dpi Pid element
a. Set the PID of the Dpi component (Pid).

b. Click the cross
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

167
Creating an MPTS across MPEG Encoder Boards

Multiplexing across boards is an optional feature. It allows an MPTS to
be formed from all the components generated on the different Encoder
boards of the device.
One option (1 multiplexer) can be instantiated per MPEG Encoder board.
Multiplexing runs simultaneously with encoders.
To illustrate creation of an MPTS including components encoded on
different Encoder boards, the following example is used: 2 SPTS
encoded in Encoder board slot 1 are multiplexed with 2 SPTS encoded in
Encoder board slot 2. The output multiplexer is located on Encoder board
slot 2.
Figure 5-131. Slot 1 and Slot2 Encoders
1. Right-click the Transport Stream (1) element then select the shortcut
command Add / TS to MPTS.
A TS to MPTS element is automatically added.
168
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

2. Double-click the TS to MPTS element for editing.

Figure 5-134. Setting the TS to MPTS element
a. Check Enabled to enable connection to slot number x.

b. Set the number of the slot that hosts the output multiplexer (2 in
this example).
c. Click the cross
3. Follow the same procedure with the second TS (Transport Stream
(10)).
2 TS to MPTS elements are displayed:
Figure 5-135. TS to MPTS elements
4. Right-click the Slot 2 (xxxx) element then select the shortcut command
Add / MPTS Input Interface.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

169
An MPTS Input element is automatically added.

Figure 5-137. MPTS Input element displayed
5. Double-click the MPTS Input element to check the inputs of the

element.
Figure 5-138. MPTS Input element
6. Click the cross

the box.
in the top right corner of the dialog box to close
7. Right-click the MPTS Input element then select the shortcut command
Insert into / Transport Stream (xxx).
Figure 5-139. Selecting the shortcut command Insert into / Transport Stream (xxx)
External SPTS are then multiplexed with internal SPTS and the MPTS is
available on LAN 1.
170
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Figure 5-140. MPTS Input element displayed
External SPTS
Adding an External Component to a service

To add an external component to a service:
1. Right-click the Slotx - Dual-Encoder element then select the shortcut
command Add / MPEG TS ASI Input Interface.
Figure 5-141. Selecting the shortcut command Add / MPEG TS ASI Input Interface
An ASI Input element is automatically added.

Figure 5-142. ASI Input element displayed
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

171

a. Check Activity to enable the IO5 input

b. Click the cross
3. Right-click the ASI Input element then select the shortcut command
Add / External Component. An External component element is
automatically added.
Figure 5-144. Adding an External Component element
4. Double-click the External component element for editing.

Figure 5-145. Setting the External component element
a. Check the Enable box to enable carriage of the component.

b. Set the component parameters:
172
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Parameters
Enable
Check Enable to enable carriage of the component
Input Pid
PID of the external component at the Encoder input

(value from 33 to 8190).
Stream Type
Type of stream: Private packets or Private section.
Descriptors
Descriptor
If necessary, click Add descriptor to add

(descriptor_tag 0x59) and configure the DVB subtitle
component descriptor.
Language: Used to indicate the language of the
subtitling.
Subtitling Type: Used to indicate the type of the
subtitling.
Composition page id: Used to indicate the
composition page id of the DVB teletext.
Ancillary page id: Used to indicate the ancillary page
id of the DVB teletext.
c. Click the cross

5. Right-click the External component element then select the shortcut
command Insert into / Output service (x). A link via a PID element is
Figure 5-146. Adding an External component to a service
6. Double-click the PID element for editing.

Figure 5-147. Setting the External component output PID element
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

173
a. Enter the component output PID (value from 33 to 8190).

b. Click the cross
174
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Setting Automatic Encoding configuration

Principle
Automatic Encoding configuration Mode is used to configure an Encoder
according to the detected input video format.
According to the input video format, the Encoder is automatically
reconfigured with a pre-defined configuration defined by the User. A
pre-defined configuration is a partial configuration named "Encoding
Profile".
Automatic Encoding configuration Mode is not applicable for MPTS
configurations.
6 Encoding profiles can be supported (one per video format: 720 x 576 i
@25Hz, 720 x 480 i @29.97Hz, 1920 x 1080 i @25Hz, 1920 x 1080 i
@29.97Hz, 1280 x 720 P @ 50 Hz, 1280 x 720 P @ 59.94Hz).
An Encoding Profile defines the following configurations:
Video Encoder
Audio Encoder(s)
VBI Encoder
Ancillary Encoder
External component(s)
Output Service
Transport Stream
Figure 5-148. Encoding Profile contour
Encoding Profile
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

175
Setting an Encoding Profile

Creating an Encoding Profile
Creating an Encoding Profiles directory

1. Right-click the Sources element then select the shortcut command
Add / Encoding Profiles to add an Encoding Profiles directory.
Figure 5-149. Selecting Add / Encoding Profiles
The Encoding Profiles directory is automatically added.

Figure 5-150. Encoding Profiles directory is displayed
Creating an Encoding Profile element

1. Right-click the Encoding Profiles directory then select the shortcut
command Add / Encoding Profile to add an Encoding Profile element.
Figure 5-151. Selecting Add / Encoding Profile
An Encoding Profile element is automatically added.

Figure 5-152. Encoding Profile element is displayed
176
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

2. If necessary, right-click the Encoding Profiles directory then select the

shortcut command Add / Encoding Profile to add another Encoding
Profile element. The 2 Encoding Profile elements are displayed.
Figure 5-153. 2 Encoding Profile elements are displayed
3. Double-click the Encoding Profile Element for editing.

Figure 5-154. Setting the Encoding Profile Element
a. Enter the name of the Encoding Profile (HD 1080i for example).
b. Click the cross
Adding Encoders and External component(s) to an Encoding Profile
element
Right-click the Encoding Profile element then select the shortcut
command Add / Video Encoder to add a Video Encoder, Add / Audio
Encoder to add an Audio Encoder, Add / Ancillary Encoder to add an
Ancillary Encoder, Add / VBI Encoder to add a VBI Encoder, Add / External
Component to add an External component or Add / Dpi Encoder to add a
DPI Encoder.
Figure 5-155. Add / Encoders & External component(s)
4. Refer to section Creating the Compressed Video Component on

page 126 to configure the Video Encoder.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

177
5. Refer to section Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) Dual Channels MPEG board on page 129 to configure the Audio
Encoder(s) or section Creating the Compressed Audio
Component(s) - Single Channel MPEG board on page 132 to
configure the Audio Inputs and the Audio Encoder(s).
6. Refer to section Creating an Ancillary Component on page 162 to
configure the Ancillary Encoder.
7. Refer to section Creating a VBI Component on page 164 to
configure the VBI Encoder.
8. Refer to section Creating an SCTE 35 Component on page 166 to
add and configure a DPI Encoder.
9. Refer to section Adding an External Component to a service on
page 171 to add an External component and configure the External
component element.
Figure 5-156. Encoders in an Encoding Profile element
Setting the Service

1. Right-click the Video Encoder element then select the shortcut
command Insert into new / Output service to add the compressed
video component to a new service.
2. Refer to section Setting the MPEG Program (DVB Service) on
page 128 to configure the service.
command Insert / Output service to add the audio component to the
service.
4. Right-click the Ancillary Encoder element then select the shortcut
command Insert / Output service to add the Ancillary component to
the service.
5. Right-click the VBI Encoder element then select the shortcut command
Insert / Output service to add the VBI component to the service.
178
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

6. Right-click the Dpi Encoder element then select the shortcut command
Insert / Output service to add the SCTE 35 component to the service.
7. Right-click the External component element then select the shortcut
command Insert / Output service to add the external component to the
service.
Figure 5-157. Encoders, External component and Output service
Setting the Transport Stream

1. Right-click the Output Service element then select the shortcut
command Insert into new / MPEG Transport Stream to insert the
service into a Transport Stream.
2. Refer to section Setting the Transport Stream on page 136 to
configure the Transport Stream.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

179
Figure 5-158. Encoding Profiles, Example
1 HD 1080i Encoding Profile
2 SD 625 Encoding Profile
Selecting an Encoding Profile in an MPEG Encoder

Encoding Profile selection is automatic and depends on the Video input
format.
For automatic Profile selection to apply, an Encoding Profile selector
must be inserted in the MPEG Encoder branch. The Encoding Profile
selector replaces:
180
Video Encoder
Audio Encoder(s)
VBI Encoder
Ancillary Encoder
DPI Encoder
External component(s)
Output Service
Transport Stream
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Creating the Encoder Branch with a Profile selector
Creating MPEG Encoder

Right-click Sources then select the shortcut command Add Encoder Dual
Module.
Figure 5-159. Adding MPEG Encoder
A branch is automatically created. It comprises the basic element Slot

x - Dual-Encoder.
Selecting the Encoder Slot
1. Double-click the first element Slot x - Dual- Encoder for editing.
Figure 5-160. Setting the Slot - Encoder element
2. Enter the number of the slot the Encoder is plugged to.

3. Enter the Encoder name.
Refer to section Slot x - Dual-Encoder Dialog Box on page 206 for
4. Select Broadcast Status = On Air.
5. Click the cross
the new settings.
in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable
Selecting the SDI input interface

Right-click Slot x- Encoder then select the shortcut command Add MPEG
Encoder Input interface.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

181
Figure 5-161. Adding SDI Input interface
The SDI Input element is added.

Figure 5-162. SDI Input element
1. Double-click the SDI Input element for editing and source selection.
Figure 5-163. Setting the SDI input interface element
2. To set the SDI Input element, refer to section SDI Input Dialog Box
on page 207.
If necessary, add the ASI input interface used for external component(s)
Right-click Slot x - Dual-Encoder then select the shortcut command Add
MPEG TS ASI Input interface.
Figure 5-164. Adding ASI Input interface
The ASI Input element is added.

Figure 5-165. ASI Input element
1. Double-click the element ASI Input for editing.
182
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

2. Check the Activity box to enable the IO5 ASI input.

Adding the Encoder Profile selector
Add / Encoder Profile selector to add a Profile selector.
Figure 5-167. Selecting Add / Encoder Profile selector
A Profile selector element is automatically added.

Figure 5-168. Profile selector element is displayed
2. Double-click the Profile selector element to configure Auto

configuration rule(s).
Figure 5-169. Setting the Profile selector element
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

183
Click to add an Auto configuration rule.

Input standard
Choice of video input standard to associate with the

Profile selected (Profile selection) below.
Profile
selection
Profile to be used if the video at the Encoder input is

equal to Input Standard above.
3. Click the cross

the new settings.
in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable
If necessary, connect the ASI input used for external component(s) to the
Profile selector
Add / Profile selector to connect the ASI element to the Profile
selector.
Figure 5-170. Selecting Add / Profile selector
The ASI Input element is connected to the Profile selector.

Figure 5-171. ASI Input element connected to Profile selector
Add TS over ASI

1. Right-click the Profile selector element then select the shortcut
command Add / TS over ASI.
Figure 5-172. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS over ASI
TS over ASI element is automatically added.
184
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Figure 5-173. TS over ASI element is displayed
2. To set the ASI Output element, refer to section Encapsulating TS

over IP on page 139.
Add TS over IP and set the Ethernet Interface
command Add / TS over IP.
Figure 5-174. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS over IP
The IP Tx element is automatically added.

Figure 5-175. IP Tx element is displayed
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

185
2. To set the IP Tx element, refer to section Encapsulating TS over IP

on page 139.
into new / Ethernet Output Interface.
Figure 5-176. Selecting the shortcut command Insert into new / Ethernet Output Interface
LAN 1 element is automatically added.

Figure 5-177. LAN 1 element is displayed
4. To set the LAN 1 element, refer to section Setting the Ethernet

Interface on page 142.
Add TS to Modulator
command Add / TS to Modulator.
Figure 5-178. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS Modulator
The TS to Modulator element is automatically added.

Figure 5-179. TS to Modulator element displayed
186
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

2. To set the TS to Modulator element, refer to section Linking TS to

Modulator on page 141.
Add TS to MPTS
command Add / TS to MPTS.
The TS to MPTS element is automatically added.

2. To set the TS to MPTS element, refer to section Linking TS to MPTS

on page 142.
Profile selector branch
Figure 5-182. MPEG Encoder, Profile selector branch
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

187
Encoding Profiles and Profile selector block diagram

Figure 5-183. Encoding Profiles and Profile selector, MPEG Encoder branch
188
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Advanced settings, MPEG Decoder

Setting TS Redundancy
Principle
If a TS (nominal TS) is missing in an MPEG Decoder, it will be replaced
by another TS (backup TS).
Examples:
Figure 5-184. TS redundancy with one Ethernet input
Figure 5-185. TS redundancy with two Ethernet inputs
Configuration
To create a TS redundancy
1. Set the nominal TS
Creating the branch of the nominal TS:
a. Add and configure the nominal TS Ethernet Input box. Refer to
section Selecting the Ethernet Input Interface on page 147.
b. Add and configure the nominal IP Rx Stream box. Refer to
section Selecting the IP Rx Stream on page 149.
c. Add and configure the nominal Input Service box. Refer to
section Setting the Service Configuration on page 151.
Set the TS redundancy status: Check Enabled and Input
redundancy status on NOMINAL).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

189
Figure 5-186. Setting the TS redundancy in the Input service dialog box
d. Click the cross

e. Right-click the Input Service element then select the shortcut
command Insert into new / TS Redundancy on Product
configuration.
Figure 5-187. Selecting Insert into new / TS Redundancy on Product configuration
The TS redundancy element is automatically added.

Figure 5-188. TS redundancy element
The nominal TS branch is created:

Figure 5-189. Nominal TS branch
190
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

2. Set the backup TS

Creating the branch of the backup TS:
a. Add and configure the redundancy IP Rx Stream box. Refer to
section Selecting the IP Rx Stream on page 149.
b. Add and configure the redundancy Input Service box. Refer to
section Setting the Service Configuration on page 151.
Set the TS redundancy status: Check Enabled and Input
redundancy status on BACKUP.
Figure 5-190. Setting the TS redundancy in the Input service dialog box
c. Click the cross

The backup TS branch is created:
Figure 5-191. Backup TS branch
d. Right-click the backup Input Service element then select the

shortcut command Insert into TS Redundancy.
Figure 5-192. Selecting Insert into / TS redundancy
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

191
3. Add and configure SDI output interface.

a. Right-click the TS Redundancy element then select the shortcut
command Add / SDI Output Interface.
Figure 5-193. Selecting Add / SDI Output Interface
The SDI Output element is automatically added.

Figure 5-194. SDI Output
b. Configure the SDI Output box. Refer to section Setting the SDI
Output Interface on page 153.
4. Set the TS redundancy mode.
a. Double-click the TS Redundancy element for editing.
Figure 5-195. TS redundancy Dialog Box
b. Set the TS Redundancy parameters.
192
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

General
Input backup
mode
Auto
delay
Selection of the backup mode. Choice between

Force nominal: The selected TS is always the
nominal TS
Auto Switchback on nominal faultless: When no
TS Stream is received on the nominal input, an
alarm is raised and the input switches
automatically to the backup input. When the alarm
is inactive on the nominal Input, the system
switches automatically to this nominal input.
Auto Switchback on backup fault: When no TS
stream is received on the nominal input, an alarm
is raised and the input switches automatically to
the backup input. The system stays on the backup
input until a redundant fault occurs.
Force backup: The selected TS is always the
backup TS.
backup
Defines the time to switch from nominal input to

backup input in auto mode when no TS stream alarm
is raised on the nominal input.
Auto nominal
delay
Defines the time (in seconds) to switch from backup

input to nominal input in auto mode when no TS
stream alarm has fallen on the nominal input.
c. Click the cross

IO5 connector can be configured as ASI Output to monitor the MPTS

at the input of the decoder:
1. Right-click the TS Redundancy element then select the shortcut

command Add / TS over ASI. The ASI Output element is
2. Double-click the ASI Output element for editing. Refer to section

ASI Output Dialog Box on page 228.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

193
Creating ASI to IP and IP to ASI Gateways

ASI to IP gateway is an optional feature. It allows an MPEG Transport
stream to be exchanged between a CP6000 Encoder and a remote
CP6000 Decoder. The Transport Stream is transported transparently and
bit-accurately.
Two ASI to IP software options must be installed (1 per MPEG Encoder
board and 1 per MPEG Decoder board).
Figure 5-196. ASI to IP and IP to ASI Gateway features
IP to ASI Gateway feature
ASI to IP Gateway feature
Setting an ASI to IP Gateway, MPEG Encoder

To create an ASI to IP gateway:
1. Right-click the Slotx - Dual-Encoder element then select the shortcut
command Add / MPEG TS ASI Input Interface.
Figure 5-197. Selecting the shortcut command Add / MPEG TS ASI Input Interface
An ASI Input element is automatically added.

Figure 5-198. ASI Input element displayed
194
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


a. Check Activity to enable the IO5 input

b. Click the cross
Add / Gateway. A Gateway element is automatically added.
Figure 5-200. Adding a Gateway element
4. Double-click the Gateway element for editing.

Figure 5-201. Setting the Gateway element
a. Set the Gateway parameters.
Gateway Parameters
IGateway
Name
Enter the name of the gateway
Threshold
Bitrate
Defines the Max bitrate of the TS stream.

Accepted values: from 15 kbit/s to 110000 kbit/s
b. Click the cross

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

195
5. Right-click the Gateway element then select the shortcut command

Add / TS over IP. An IP Tx element is automatically added.
Figure 5-202. Adding an IP Rx element
6. Double-click the IP Tx element for editing.

Figure 5-203. Setting the IP Tx element
a. Set the IP Tx parameters. Refer to section IP Tx Dialog Box on

page 229
b. Click the cross
into new / Ethernet Output Interface. A LAN x element is automatically
added.
Figure 5-204. Adding a LAN x element
196
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

8. Double-click the LAN x element for editing.

Figure 5-205. Setting the LAN x element
a. Set the LAN x parameters. Refer to section LAN x Dialog Box

on page 232.
b. Click the cross
The ASI to IP gateway is created:
Figure 5-206. ASI to IP Gateway
Setting an IP to ASI Gateway, MPEG Decoder

To create an IP to ASI gateway:
1. Right-click the LAN x element then select the shortcut command Add
/ IP Receive. An IP Rx element is automatically added.
Figure 5-207. Adding an IP Rx element
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

197
2. Double-click the IP Rx element for editing.

Figure 5-208. Setting the IP Rx element
a. Set the IP Rx parameters. Refer to section IP Rx Dialog Box on

page 236.
b. Click the cross
3. Right-click the IP Rx element then select the shortcut command Add /
Gateway Dec. A Gateway Dec element is automatically added.
Figure 5-209. Adding a Gateway Dec element
4. Double-click the Gateway Dec element for editing.

Figure 5-210. Setting the Gateway Dec element
a. Enter the Gateway Name.

b. Click the cross
198
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

5. Right-click the Gateway Dec element then select the shortcut

command Add / TS over ASI. An ASI Output element is automatically
added.
Figure 5-211. Adding an ASI Output element
6. Double-click the ASI Output element for editing.

Figure 5-212. Setting the ASI Output element
a. Set the ASI Output parameters. Refer to section ASI Output

Dialog Box on page 228. The IO5 Output cannot be modified.
b. Click the cross
The IP to ASI gateway is created:
Figure 5-213. IP to ASI Gateway
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

199
Setting Scrambling / Descrambling

The settings described are shared by the MPEG Encoder and MPEG
Decoder boards. They allow to define profiles which will be used to
scramble or descramble services.
To display the Scrambling configuration box, click
configuration panel:
on the
Figure 5-214. Access to scrambling box, configuration panel
Scrambling
The Scrambling box is displayed.

Figure 5-215. Scrambling box
Click Scrambling groups to display the scrambling profile(s).

Figure 5-216. Profile(s), Scrambling box
To add a new profile right-click Scrambling groups and select

Add / Scrambling group. A profile is automatically added.
Figure 5-217. Add a Scrambling profile
Click on a profile to edit it.

200
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Figure 5-218. Edit a Scrambling profile
Parameters
Activity
If checked, enables the Scrambling profile.
Name
Name of the scrambling profile.

This name is used to select the Scrambling profile in
the Encoder Output Service and Decoder Input
Service dialog boxes.
Fixed Key Parameters

Mode
Scrambling / Descrambling mode. Choice between:

BISS 1: Scrambling / Descrambling are performed
with a fixed Session Word (SW).
BISS E BURIED: Scrambling / Descrambling are
performed with an Encrypted Session Word (ESW)
and an internal Encoder / Decoder id named buried
id. This id is identical for all the MPEG boards. The
BISS E BURIED mode of encryption decryption must
be used only between CP6000.
BISS E INJECTED: Scrambling / Descrambling are
performed with an Encrypted Session Word (ESW)
and an Injected id.
Session Word
(SW)
In BISS 1 mode, Session Word value (6 bytes).
Encrypted
Session Word
(ESW)
In BISS E BURIED and BISS E INJECTED modes,

Encrypted Session Word value (8 bytes).
Injected id
In BISS E INJECTED mode, Injected id value (7 bytes).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

201
Setting Automation
Principle
Instead of applying manually your configurations, you can choose to
activate the Schedule mode so that your configurations are applied
according to a schedule you will define.
The automation system moves from one configuration to another
according to the schedule you created.
Prerequisite: you must create your configurations in the GUI previously
to the schedule.
Figure 5-219. Automation tab overview
Display the automation panel
Apply the automation
Edit / Unedit the automation
To schedule your configurations:

1. Define a default configuration that will be the first configuration to be
activated. It is also the one that will be used when no other can be
activated.
2. Create a list of configurations and define to which conditions these
configurations can be activated.
These conditions are time conditions only. Thus a configuration can start
either:
at a precise date and time, e.g. on May, 27th, 2012 at 3:00,
every day at a precise time, e.g. every day at 9:00,
on a given day of the week at a precise time, e.g. every Tuesday at

noon (12:00),
on a given day of the month at a precise time, e.g. every first day of
the month at midnight (0:00).
A configuration can also be scheduled for a given duration or to last until

another configuration in the list is due to start (no duration).
202
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

3. Create the schedule.

Once the schedule is applied, the automation system continuously
checks your list of configurations. As soon as it finds one that meets the
schedule parameters, even if the current one has not ended, it activates
it. If it does not and all time-limited scheduled configurations have ended,
it activates the default configuration.
Creating a Schedule
1. Go to the Automation tab.
2. Click the Edit button in the toolbar to enable automation editing.
3. Select Schedule from the Select automation drop-down list.
Figure 5-220. Selecting the Schedule mode
When Schedule type is selected,
configurations will be activated using a schedule
basic tools are available in the toolbar for schedule editing.
Figure 5-221. Basic tools
For a description of these tools, refer to section Automation Tab on

page 113.
4. In the Default configuration drop-down list, select the configuration
that will be applied by default, i.e. when no configuration of the list is
due to be applied.
5. To create the first configuration of your schedule, click the Insert after
the current selection button
.
6. Where applicable, replace the stars (*) by appropriate values
according to the schedule you want to create. Different criteria are
available for the scheduled configuration:
Day of the week
Day
Month
Year
Hour
Minute
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

203
Two types of events can be selected:
Event without duration. The scheduled configuration is applied

at the date specified and until another scheduled configuration
is applied.
Event with duration: the scheduled configuration is applied for a

certain period of time.
When more than one configuration is to be activated at the same

time, the higher configuration in the schedule table will be
applied.
When no configuration is to be activated, the default
configuration is applied.
7. Press ENTER to validate your value or simply click another field.

8. Once all the scheduled configurations are ready, you can send the
schedule to the equipment.
a. Click the Send button in the toolbar.
b. Answer Yes when you are asked for confirmation.
Figure 5-222. Confirmation request
If Schedule was selected as the automation type during the editing

process, a green clock is visible in the tab header as soon as the
automation is running.
It is therefore no longer possible to apply a configuration manually (the

Apply button is not available in the configuration toolbar for any
configuration). If you want to apply a configuration manually, you must
select No automation from the Select automation drop-down list and
re-send the configuration to the equipment.
204
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Schedule Example
Let us take an example. Suppose today is Tuesday, and it is midnight.
Our default configuration is named Default.
We have also created four configurations: Conf1, Conf2, Conf3 and
Conf4.
We want to apply these configurations as follows:
Conf1 should be applied every day at 9:00 during 2 hours.
Conf2 should be applied every day at 12:00 during 3 hours.
Conf3 should be applied every Wednesday at 13:30.
Conf4 should be applied every day at 21:00 during 1:30.
The schedule corresponding to this example is shown in Figure 5-223

below.
Figure 5-223. Schedule example
The obtained follow-up of configurations will be as represented in

Figure 5-224 below:
Figure 5-224. Schedule example
Note that Conf2 is supposed to be applied for 2 hours, but on

Wednesday, as Conf3 is due to start at 13:30, Conf2 is stopped and
Conf3 is applied.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

205
Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description
GUI Description
This chapter gives the details of the interface dialog boxes.
Dialog Boxes Related to MPEG Encoder

Figure 5-225. Encoder configuration
SDI Input
Interface box
Video Encoder
box
Video Pid
box
Output
Service x box
Slot x - DualEncoder box

Audio Pid
box
Transport
Stream x box
ASI Output
box
Ancillary
Pid box
LAN x
box
IP Encapsulation
box
Audio Encoder
box
Ancillary
Encoder box
Slot x - Dual-Encoder Dialog Box

Figure 5-226. Dual-Encoder Dialog Box
Board Parameters
206
Slot Number
Number of the slot the board is plugged to.
Name
Name of the slot.
Channel Mode
Not use in this release. This parameter must be set to

Dual.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

SDI Input Dialog Box

Figure 5-227. SDI Input: Pair x Dialog Box
Input Interface
Input pair
Choice of the SDI input pair between:

Pair 1 (IO1 + IO2)
Pair 2 (IO3 + IO4) (Dual Channels MPEG board
only)
Pair 1 and Pair 2 stand for channel 1 and channel 2
respectively.
Source selector
Select the SDI source (IO1, IO2, IO3, IO4) or a test

pattern (Bar pattern, Black pattern, Moving
pattern).
IO3, IO4 are not displayed on a Single Channel MPEG
board.
IO2 and IO4 can also be configured as ASI
outputs.
Input
mode
backup
Choice of the SDI input in backup mode

Off: SDI input is the SDI input selected above
Auto Switchback on nominal faultless: When the
signal loss alarm is raised, the SDI input switches
automatically to the backup SDI input. When the
signal loss alarm is inactive on Nominal Input,
the SDI input automatically switches to this input.
Auto Switchback on redundant fault: When the
signal loss alarm is raised, the SDI input switches
automatically to the backup SDI input. The SDI
input stays on the backup SDI input until a
redundant fault occurs.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Pair 1: The backup mode cannot be used if

IO2 is configured as ASI output.
Pair 2 (Dual Channels MPEG board only):
The backup mode cannot be used if IO4 is
configured as ASI output.
207
208
Auto
delay
backup
Defines the time (in seconds) to switch from

nominal input to backup input in auto switch mode
when the signal loss alarm is raised on the nominal
input.
Auto
delay
nominal
Defines the time (in seconds) to switch from backup

input to nominal input in auto switch mode when
the signal loss alarm has fallen on the nominal
input.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Video Encoder Dialog Box

Figure 5-228. Video Encoder Dialog Box
Standard Parameters
No
Source
Mode
Input
Standard
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Choice between:
Bar Pattern
Black Pattern
Moving Pattern
Stop Video: Video component bitrate is null,
signaling and all other components are present.
Disable Service: Service bitrate is null, there is no
signaling and the TS bitrate for this service is null.
Default selection: Bar Pattern
Choice between:
720 x 576 I @ 25 Hz
720 x 480 I @ 29.97 Hz
1920 x 1080 I @ 25 Hz
1920 x 1080 I @ 29.97 Hz
1920 x 1080 I @ 30 Hz
1280 x 720 p @ 50 Hz
1280 x 720 p @ 59,94 Hz
1280 x 720 p @ 60 Hz
Default selection: 1920 x 1080 I @ 25 Hz
209
Picture
Resolution
Picture
Format
Used to set the Horizontal Picture Rescaling feature.

This feature is used to manage very low encoded
rates. Choice between:
Input Standard
Horizontal Resolutions
1920 x 1080i
1920, 1440, 1280, 960
1280 x 720p
1280, 960, 640
720 x 576i
720, 704, 640, 544, 528, 480, 352
720 x 480i
720, 704, 640, 544, 528, 480, 352
In SD Input Standard, selection of the format of the

picture. Choice between:
Aspect
Ratio (4:3,
16/9)a
Active Format Description

informationb:
- Active format AFD
(Letter box...) and
- Aspect ratio (AR)
4/3
4:3
None
16/9
16:9
None
4:3 Auto
SMPTE2016
4:3
From incoming ancillary

AFD (SMPTE 2016-3)
16:9 Auto
SMPTE2016
16:9
From incoming ancillary

AFD (SMPTE 2016-3)
4:3 Auto
Video Index
4:3
From incoming Video

Index (SMPTE RP186)
16:9 Auto
Video Index
16:9
From incoming Video

Index (SMPTE RP186)
4:3 Auto UK
Video Index
4:3
From incoming specific

UK Video Index
16:9 Auto UK
Video Index
16:9
From incoming specific

UK Video Index
a
Aspect Ratio is transported in Sequence Header in MPEG-2 standard
or in SPS (Sequence Parameter Set) in VUI parameter (Video Usability
Information) in MPEG-4 standard.
b Active Format Description information are transported in USER
DATA in MPEG-2 standard or in SEI messages (Supplemental
Enhancement Information) in MPEG-4 standard.
WSS Blanking
210
If On, the WSS (1/2 line 23) signal is blanked.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Encoding
format
Choice between:
H-264 (MPEG-4)
MPEG-2
Default selection: H-264 (MPEG-4)
Chroma
Format
Choice between:
MPEG-2 Encoding format
4:2:0 / 8 bits
4:2:2 / 8 bits
H-264 (MPEG-4) Encoding format
4:2:0 / 8 bits
4:2:0 / 10 bits
4:2:2 / 8 bits
4:2:2 / 10 bits
Refer to Appendix A Video Profiles & Bitrates
recommendations on page 403.
Profile
Selection of the video profile.

The Choice depends on the Encoding Format:
High
(HP)
4:2:2
(422P)
MPEG-2 encoding format, Video Profiles

Main
(MP)
Type of frames
I, P, B
I, P, B
I, P, B
Chroma
sampling
4:2:0
4:2:0
4:2:2
4:2:0
4:2:2
Main
(MP)
High
(HiP)
High 10
(Hi10P)
High 4:2:2
(Hi422P)
MPEG-4 (H264) encoding format, Video Profiles

Constrained
Baseline (CBP)a
Type of
frames
I, P
I, P, B
I, P, B
I, P, B
I, P, B
Entropy
coding
CAVLC
CAVLC CAVLC CAVLC CAVLC

CABAC CABAC CABAC CABAC
Chroma
sampling
4:2:0
4:2:0
4:2:0
4:2:0
4:2:2
Pixel
resolution
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
10 bits
8 bits
10 bits
a Only
on progressive video.
Note: An Automatic mode can be selected. In this

mode the Profile is automatically determined.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

211
212
End to End
delay
Choice between:
Low delay
Standard delay
End to End delay does not take care of the delay
added by activation of the Frame Synchronizer and
additional latency due to IPDV but includes the delay
of other modules such as the Multiplexer, Line
rephaser, etc.
End to End delay = 270 ms in Low Delay
End to End delay = 770 ms in Standard Delay
Default selection: Low delay
Bitrate
Video bitrate adjustment.

Refer to section Video Profiles & Bitrates
If the Video bitrate automatic computing box is
checked the Bitrate parameter is not displayed and
the necessary video bitrate is automatically
determined.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Advanced Parameters
Entropy
coding
Choice between:
CABAC
CAVLC
This parameter is relevant for H-264 only.
Picture
structure
Structure of the picture to be encoded.

Choice between:
Field
Frame
MBAFF (MacroBlock Adaptive Frame Field coding)
This parameter is relevant for Encoding format =
H-264 and End to End delay = Standard only.
P picture
Period (M)
Choice between:
I only: Only I pictures
IP: 1 P picture between 2I pictures
IBP: 1 B picture (not available in Low Delay mode).
IBBP: 2 B pictures (not available in Low Delay
mode).
IBBBP: 3 B pictures (available in Standard Delay
mode and H-264 (MPEG-4) encoding format and
50/59.94/60 Hz input standard).
Automatic
where I stands for Intra-coded picture, P for
Predictive-coded picture, B for BiPredictive-coded
picture.
GOP Size (N)
Accepted values: from 1 to 300.

If the Automatic GOP size box is checked the parameter
is not displayed and the GOP size is automatically
determined. Refer to P Picture Period parameter below.
Picture
Filtering
The Picture Filtering feature is used to manage very

low encoding rates. It consists of decreasing picture
complexity by activating a filter to reduce the high
frequency spatial texture. Choice between:
None: Filtering is disabled
Weak: Filtering is weak
Strong: Filtering is strong
Closed GOP
If this box is checked closed GOP mode is activated.

Closed GOP mode is used to break temporal
dependency between GOPs.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

213
214
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Audio Inputs Dialog Box

Figure 5-229. Audio Inputs Dialog Box
If a Single Channel MPEG board is used as Encoder, this box is used to

indicate the type of audio type injected on the XLR connectors of the
breakout cable. Refer to section Audio Breakout Cable on page 402.
Click
to add an Analog stereo audio input. Up to 2 analog
stereo inputs can be created.
Click
be created.
Click
to add an AES audio input. Up to 4 AES inputs can
to delete an audio input.
Analog Audio Parameters

XLR Input
Indicate the XLR used for the analog audio. Choice

between:
In1(L1)/In2(R1): XLR In1 is used to the left channel
and XLR In2 is used to the right channel of the 1st
stereo.
In3(L2)/In4(R2): XLR In3 is used to the left channel
and XLR In4 is used to the right channel of the 2nd
stereo.
Alignment
Level in dBu which corresponds to 0 VU.

Accepted values: between -6 dBu and +6 dBu in 1 dBu
steps.
Headroom
Difference in dB between Alignment level (Alignment

parameter below) and input saturation.
Accepted values: between +6 dB and +30 dB in 1 dB
steps.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

215
Digital Audio Parameters
216
XLR Input
Indicate the XLR used for the digital audio. Choice

between:
st
In1(AES1): XLR In1 is used to the 1 stereo.
nd stereo.
In2(AES2): XLR In2 is used to the 2
rd stereo.
th stereo.
Sample Rate
Conv.
If checked, the audio Sample Rate Converter of the

AES input is enabled.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Audio Encoder Dialog Box

Figure 5-230. Audio Encoder Dialog Box
Audio Mode = Stereo / Dual Channels
Audio Mode = 5.1 Surround

(SDI / Digital sources only)
Input Format =
PCM
(Analog / Digital /
SDI sources)
Input Format = Precompressed

(SDI / Digital sources only)
Audio Mode= Stereo
Audio Mode = 5.1 Surround
Input Format =
Automatic
(SDI / Digital sources
only)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

217
Input
Input Format
Choice between:
Audio PCM
Precompressed (SDI / Digital sources only)
Automatic (SDI / Digital sources only)
If Input Format is set to Automatic, then the audio
encoder detects the audio input format (PCM or
precompressed). The Operator sets one audio
configuration for PCM audio and another audio
configuration for precompressed audio.
When PCM audio is detected the PCM audio
encoding parameters are applied to encode the
audio.
When a precompressed audio is detected the
Pass-thru
standard
and
signaling
mode
parameters are used.
Source(s)
Audio source
218
SDI / Digital source(s)

The Audio Source(s) depend on the input format.
If Input Format is set to Audio PCM and
- Audio mode = Stereo or Dual Channels then
one Audio Source must be selected (L/R).
- Audio mode = 5.1 Surround then three Audio
Sources must be selected (L/R, C/LFE,
LS/RS).
If Input Format is set to Precompressed then
one Audio Source must be selected.
If Input Format is set to Automatic then one or
three Audio Sources must be selected.
SDI sources, choice between:
Stereo 1 (Grp 1/Ch 1-2)
Digital sources, choice between:
Digital 1 (In1(AES1))
Analog source(s)
Choice between:
Analog 1 (In1(L1)-In2(R1))
Analog 2 (In3(L2)-In4(R2))
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Precompressed signaling
This parameter is displayed if Input Format is set to Precompressed.
Signaling
Mode
Encoding mode of the Precompressed audio.

Choice between Stereo or 5.1 Surround
Output
Audio
Standard
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Audio encoding standard.

SDI / Digital source(s)
If Input format is set to PCM or Automatic,
choice between:
- MPEG-1 Layer II
- Uncompressed (SMPTE 302M)
- AAV-LC
- AAC-HE
- AAC-HE v2.0
- Dolby Digital (AC3)
If Input format is set to Precompressed, choice
between:
- MPEG-1 Layer II Pass-Thru
- Dolby E Pass-Thru
- AAV-LC Pass-Thru
- AAC-HE Pass-Thru
- AAC-HE v2.0 Pass-Thru
- Dolby Digital (AC3) Pass-Thru
Analog source(s)
Choice between:
- MPEG-1 Layer II
- Uncompressed (SMPTE 302M)
- AAV-LC
- AAC-HE
- AAC-HE v2.0
- Dolby Digital (AC3)
219
Audio Mode
Choice between:
MPEG-1 Layer II standard:
Stereo
Dual channels
Mono Left
Mono Right
AAV-LC, AAC-HE or AAC-HE v2.0 standard:
Stereo
Dual channels
5.1 Surround (SDI / Digital sources only)
AAC-HE v2.0 standard:
Stereo
Dolby Digital (AC3) standard:
Stereo
5.1 Surround (SDI / Digital sources only)
Audio mode is not accessible if Uncompressed
Audio Standard (SMPTE 302M) is selected or if Input
format is set to Precompressed.
Frame per PES
Choice between:
One audio frame: One audio frame is transported
in a TS packet.
Multi Audio Frame: Multiple audio frames are
transported in a TS packet. This mode allows to
reduce the audio PES bitrate overhead.
Frame per PES is only accessible in Standard Delay
video encoding mode.
220
Bitrate
Accepted values:
MPEG-1 Layer II standard (stereo or mono): 64 to
384 kbit/s
AAC-LC standard:
Stereo: 32 to 384 kbit/s
5.1 Surround: 96 to 640 kbit/s
AAC-HE standard:
5.1 Surround: 96 to 640 kbit/s (SDI / Digital sources
only)
AAC-HE v2.0 standard (stereo): 32 to 96 kbit/s
Dolby Digital (AC3) standard:
5.1 Surround: 224 to 640 kbit/s (SDI / Digital
sources only)
Audio Bitrate is not accessible when Uncompressed
Audio Standard (SMPTE 302M) is selected.
No
Source
Mode
Choice between:
Sine Tone (400 Hz)
Sine Tone (1000 Hz)
Silence
No source mode is activated when there is no audio
at the audio encoder input.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

AAC Syntax
AAC
Encapsulation
Delay
Choice between:
AAC-LC Audio Standard: MPEG-2 or MPEG-4 AAC
Syntax can be selected.
AAC-HE v2.0 Audio Standard: AAC Syntax is set to
MPEG-4.
AAC-HE Audio Standard: AAC Syntax is set to
MPEG-2.
Choice between:
ADTS (Audio Data Transport Stream)
LOAS (Low Overhead Audio Stream) if the Syntax
is set to MPEG-4.
Audio delay. The value must be set between -100 to

400 ms.
Ancillary Encoder Dialog Box

Figure 5-231. Ancillary Encoder Dialog Box
HD or SD formats
HD format
Ancillary Parameters
Enable
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Check the Enable box to enable carriage of the ANC.
221
Ancillary
mode
222
Choice between:
SD format
Transparent (SMPTE 2038): ANC are carried
according SMPTE 2038.
HD format
Transparent
(RDD-11): ANC are carried
according RDD-11.
Transparent (SMPTE 2038): ANC are carried
according SMPTE 2038.
HD
Teletext (OP47): The OP-47 Subtitling
Distribution Packet (SDP) data is carried in a
dedicated PID via EN 301775 using a user
defined data unit ID.
OP47 and RDD-11 and SMPTE 2038 mode are
exclusive.
Language
Set the Language field of the PMT teletext descriptor.

The language can also be indicated in the ISO 639
3-letter codes field if Other is selected.
Teletext Type
Set the Teletext type field of the PMT teletext

descriptor. The type of teletext can also be indicated
in the User Teletext type field if Other is selected.
Magazine
number
Set the Magazine number field of the PMT teletext

descriptor. The value must be between 0 and 7.
Page Number
(hex value)
Set the Page number field of the PMT teletext

descriptor. The value must be between 0 and FF.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

VBI Encoder Dialog Box

Figure 5-232. VBI Encoder Dialog Box
625 l
525 l
Parameters
Enable
If checked, the selected VBI lines are carried in the VBI

component.
VBI selection
mode
Choice between:
Full Transparent: The VBI lines selected below are
carried whatever their type.
Normal: The types of VBI lines to carry are selected
below.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

223
Even lines
6 to 23 (625 l)
10 to 25 (525 l)
Full Transparent VBI selection mode: Selection of VBI

lines to carry in the VBI component (according to
EN 301 775 standard using a user defined data unit
ID).
Normal VBI selection mode: Selection of VBI types to
carry in the VBI component:
- TXTB: Teletext Magazine
- STIB: Teletext Subtitle
- AUTO: Teletext Automatic
- MT: Monochrome Transparent
- VPS: Video Programing System
- WSS: Widescreen signaling
Choice between AUTO, TXTB (Teletext Magazine
Ceefax B), STIB (Teletext Subtitles only), VPS (Video
Program System data), WSS (Widescreen signaling
data) and MT (Monochrome Transparent).
The AUTO / TXTB / STIB types deliver the same
Teletext Ceefax B processing but use VBI stream
headers (Data Unit Id) to describe whether the
Teletext line is used to send a magazine page or a
subtitle page. TXTB imposes the "magazine header",
STIB imposes the "subtitle header" and AUTO selects
the appropriate header according to the control bit
(C6) of the Teletext subtitle sent in the first line of each
Teletext page. This header is used by some decoders
to easily find subtitle pages in the VBI stream and
display them.
During operation, there are two possible cases:
Either the Operator does not know the type of
Teletext lines transported (magazine and/or
subtitles). In this case, AUTO should be chosen and
it is the encoder which determines the appropriate
header.
Or the Operator knows the specific lines assigned
and chooses between magazine (TXTB) and
subtitle (STIB).
Odd lines
319 to 335
(625 l)
273 to 284
(525 l)
224
Full Transparent VBI selection mode: Selection of VBI

lines to carry in the VBI component (according to
EN 301 775 standard using a user defined data unit
ID).
Normal VBI selection mode: Selection of VBI types to
carry in the VBI component.
Refer to the Even lines parameter above.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Output Service Dialog Box

Figure 5-233. Output Service Dialog Box
Service Parameters
Service Name
Indicates the name of the service which will be

displayed on the Web Pages.
This field must be set to enable the configuration.
Accepted values: User Defined. E.g.: Video 1
Max 32 characters (blank and specific characters are
allowed).
Program
Number
Accepted values: from 1 to 65535

Default value: 1
PMT PID

Default value: 256
Scrambling
Click the
parameters.
Enabled
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

icon to add a scrambling mode then edit its

If checked scrambling is enabled. All the components
of the service are scrambled.
225
Profile
selection
Scrambling profile selection. The profiles are defined

in the Scrambling page. To display this page click
Scrambling on the Configuration toolbar:
Setting
Refer
to
section
Scrambling / Descrambling on page 200 for more
Transport Stream Dialog Box

Figure 5-234. Transport Stream Dialog Box
Transport Stream Parameters
226
Activity
Choice between
(unchecked).
Enable
(checked)
or
Disable
Original
Network Id
Identifies DVB network (inserted in the NIT table).

Default value: 1
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Transport
Stream Id
Uniquely identifies the outgoing stream (inserted in

the signaling tables).
Default value: 1
Bitrate
TS bitrate. TS bitrate must never be lower than the

sum of the component bitrates.
If the Automatic TS bitrate computing box is checked,
Bitrate is not displayed and TS bitrate computing is
displayed.
TS
bitrate
computing
Selects the computer of the TS bitrate. Choice

between:
Auto from encoder: The setting of the encoders
connected to the TS determine the TS bitrate.
Auto
from modulator: The setting of the
modulator connected to the TS determines the TS
bitrate.
NIT actual Parameters

NIT Actual
If checked, insert the NIT table in the TS stream. This

feature is mainly used with a modulator.
Load NIT file
Load a NIT file. To load a NIT file:

1. Click Load NIT file.
The following screen is displayed:
2. Indicate the path of the file in the Look In box.

3. Select the NIT file Name.
4. Click Open. The file is loaded and displayed in the
NIT Actual box.
The NIT table can be edited via the SigEditor
tool delivered in the CD-ROM with the product.
Refer to section SigEditor Tool on page 300.
Clean NIT
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Clean the NIT.
227
ASI Output Dialog Box

Figure 5-235. ASI Output Dialog Box
ASI output
Activity
Choice between Enable (checked) or Disable

(unchecked).
Output
Selection of the ASI output connector. Choice

between IO5, IO2 and IO4.
Default selection: IO5
TS packet size
Choice between:
188 bytes
188 + 16 bytes
Default selection: 188 bytes
Packet mode
Choice between:
Data Packet
Burst
Default selection: Data packet
228
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

IP Tx Dialog Box
Figure 5-236. IP Tx Dialog Box
RTP/UDP/IP TX Encapsulation
Zixi/UDP/IP TX Encapsulation
Session Connection Parameters

Activity
Choice between
(unchecked).
Enable
(checked)
or
Disable
TX
Encapsulation
Select the IP TX encapsulation.

Choice between MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP, MPEG/UDP/IP and
MPEG/Zixi/UDP/IP encapsulation.
Destination IP
address
The Unicast and Multicast IP range are all IP address

values except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.
Destination
UDP port

Default value: 5000
Zixi Parameters
This box is displayed if TX Encapsulation is set to MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP
Stream Id
Name of the stream. It must exactly match the stream

name defined at the Broadcaster.
Latency
End to end latency of the link.

Accepted values: from 300 to 4000 ms.
Fec overhead
Max FEC overhead.

Accepted values: from 0 to 30%.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

229
FEC
block
Duration
FEC block duration.

Session Adaptation Parameters

This box is displayed if TX Encapsulation is set to MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP
FEC Mode
Choice between
None: FEC is disabled
Basic: FEC protection level is set below
Expert: FEC protection L & D are set below
FEC protection
Select the FEC protection level in FEC Basic mode.

Choice between
Low: FEC corrects 5 consecutive IP frames
Medium: FEC corrects 10 consecutive IP frames
High: FEC corrects 20 consecutive IP frames
L- Column
burst length
recovery
Select the FEC L Column burst length recovery

number in FEC Expert mode.
Choice from 4 to 20
Default value: 20
D - Column
depth
Select the FEC D Column depth number in FEC Expert

mode.
Choice from 4 to 20
Default value: 4
Session Advanced Parameters

This box is not displayed if TX Encapsulation is set to MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP
230
VLAN tagging
and VLAN Id
Enable or disable the VLAN tagging (VLAN tagging

check box) and select the VLAN Id (VLAN Id field).
Virtual Source
@ and Virtual
Source IP @
IP masquerading used to replace the IP address of the

Ethernet interface in the IP datagrams (may be
required in some redundancy schemes).
Source UDP
port

Default value: 5000
Number of TP
per IP frame
This parameter sets the number of MPEG packets

conveyed per IP frame.
Default value: 7
Null
Packet
stuffing
Choice On/Off
Caution: Null packet stuffing is required for the
CP6000 / CP6100 decoder. This box must be left
checked.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

TOS
(hexadecimal
value)
DiffServ values in hexadecimal value.

Accepted values:
Best Effort (BE): 0x00,
AF11: 0x28,
AF12: 0x30,
AF13: 0x38,
AF21: 0x48,
AF22: 0x50,
AF23: 0x58,
AF31: 0x68,
AF32: 0x70,
AF33: 0x78,
AF41: 0x88,
AF42: 0x90,
AF43: 0x98,
Expedited Forwarding (EF): 0xB8
Default value: 0x00.
TTL
This parameter sets the data stream TTL (Time To

Live), expressed as a number of hops. Each time the
IP packet goes through a router, the TTL value is
decreased by one unit. When the TTL reaches zero the
packet is discarded.
Accepted values: 1 to 255
Default value: 32.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

231
LAN x Dialog Box

Figure 5-237. LAN x Dialog Box
Ethernet Interface
232
Enable
interface
Choice between
(unchecked).
Enable
(checked)
or
Disable
Port Number
Select the Ethernet port (Port Number). 1 and 2

correspond to the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports of the
board. Agg 1 and Agg 2 correspond to the LAN 1 and
LAN 2 ports of the Manager board. If Agg 1 or Agg 2
is selected, the parameters below are not displayed.
The Ethernet interfaces of the Manager board are set
in the Aggregation configuration page. Refer to
section Dialog Boxes Related to LAN 1 / LAN 2
ports on the Manager board (CP6000) on page 253.
Use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the processing
exclusive.
IP @
IP address of the interface.

Accepted values: all values except 0.0.0.0 and
255.255.255.255.
Default value: 192.168.0.1
Netmask
Netmask of the interface.

255.255.255.255.
Default
Gateway
Default gateway of the interface.

In Unicast mode only one Default Gateway must
be defined for the two interfaces LAN 1 and LAN 2.
In Multicast mode Default Gateway must be set to
0.0.0.0 for the two interfaces LAN 1 and LAN 2.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
Interface
Speed
Choice between:
Auto Negotiation
100 Mb/s
1 Gb/s
Default selection: Auto Negotiation
Interface state
when disable
Choice between:
Link
Down: The interface is not powered
electrically.
Link Up/No Traffic: The interface is powered
electrically but it does not support any traffic. A
"ping" sent to the interface will not get a response.
Link Up/No Multicast: The interface is powered
electrically but no stream is sent to the network.
"ping" sent to the interface will get a response.
Default selection: Link down
IGMP
Select the IGMP protocol used to multicast streams.

Choice between:
No IGMP
IGMPv2
IGMPv3
IGMPv3 with source address
When Source IP@ is enabled, IGMP v3 with source
address should be used to configure the reception
interface.
Default selection: IGMPv2
Routes
0 to 4 static routes can be recorded by the Ethernet port.
Click the
icon to add a route then edit its parameters.
Destination IP
@
Destination IP address.
255.255.255.255.
Netmask
Destination netmask.
255.255.255.255.
Next Hop
Next Hop router to reach the destination.

255.255.255.255.
Cost
Cost of the static route.

Accepted values: 1 to 100
Default value: 1
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

233
Dialog Boxes Related to MPEG Decoder

Figure 5-238. Decoder configuration
IP Rx box
LANx box
Service box
SDI Output
Interface box
Slot x -Dual
Decoder box
ASI Input box
Service box
SDI Output
Interface box
Slot x - Dual-Decoder Dialog Box

Figure 5-239. Dual-Decoder Dialog Box
Board Parameters
234
Slot Number
Name
Name of the slot.
Channel Mode
Not use in this release. This parameter must be set

to Dual.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

ASI INPUT Dialog Box

Figure 5-240. ASI Input Dialog Box
ASI IN
Activity
Choice between
(unchecked).
Enable
(checked)
or
Disable
Source
selector
Selection of the ASI input connector. Choice between

IO1, IO3 and IO5 (Dual Channels MPEG board) or IO1
and IO5 (Single Channel MPEG board).
Default selection: IO5
LAN x Dialog Box

Figure 5-241. LAN x Dialog Box
Refer to section LAN x Dialog Box on page 232.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

235
IP Rx Dialog Box
Figure 5-242. IP Rx Dialog Box
RTP/UDP/IP Encapsulation
Zixi/UDP/IP Encapsulation - P2P Connection
Zixi/UDP/IP Encapsulation - P2MP Connection
236
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Rx Session Connection Parameters

Enabled
Enable (checked) or Disable (unchecked) TS reception.
Name
Name of the Rx Stream.
Encapsulation
IP encapsulation type of the received TS. Choice

between MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP, MPEG/UDP/IP and
MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP.
Multicast
address
All IP address values between 224.0.0.1 and

239.255.255.255 are accepted.
Not available if Encapsulation is set to
MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP.
Destination
UDP port

Default value: 5000
Not available if Encapsulation
MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP.
is
set
to
Max IPDV
The Max IPDV value (IP Packet Delay Variation,

Network Jitter) sets the jitter removal processing
module. Not available if Encapsulation is set to
MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP.
Forward error
Correction
Enable (checked) or Disable (unchecked) the FEC

feature. Not available if Encapsulation is set to
MPEG/UDP/IP or MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP.
Zixi Parameters
This box is displayed if Encapsulation is set to MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP
Stream Id
Name of the stream. It must exactly match the stream

name defined at the Broadcaster (P2MP).
Connection
Mode
Mode of connection. Choice between:

Point to Multi-Point (P2MP): This mode requires to
be connected to a ZIXI Broadcaster.
Point to Point (P2P)
Broadcaster IP
address
IP address of the Broadcaster in Point to Multi-Point

connection mode.
Broadcaster
UDP port
UDP port of the Broadcaster in Point to Multi-Point

connection mode.
Latency
Max latency for error correction.

Fec overhead
Max FEC overhead.

Accepted values: from 0 to 30%.
Fec block
FEC block duration.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

237
Advanced Parameters
This box is not displayed if Encapsulation is set to MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP
VLAN tagging
Enable (checked) or Disable (unchecked) TS reception.
VLAN Id
Identifier of the VLAN.

Select source
IP address
and Source IP
address
Choice Enable (checked) or Disable (unchecked).

Fill in the Source IP address field if Source IP address
selection is enabled.
Input Service Dialog Box

Figure 5-243. Input Service Dialog Box
General Parameters
238
Service
selection
mode
Selection mode for the service to be decoded. Choice

between:
First service: The decoder automatically processes
the first valid service containing a video
component declared in the PAT.
By Pid
By Service Name
By Service ID
Service Name
Selection of the service if Service selection mode is

set to By Service Name. A list of service names at the
decoder input is displayed.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Service Id
Selection of the service if Service selection mode is

set to By Service Id. A list of service Ids at the decoder
input is displayed.
TS redundancy
Enabled
If checked, enables input TS redundancy.
Input
redundancy
status
Selection of the TS status. Choice between:

Nominal
Backup
Refer to section Configuration on page 189.
Descrambling
Enabled
If checked, enables the descrambling feature.
Profile
selection
Descrambling profile selection. The profiles are

defined in the Scrambling page. To display this page
click Scrambling on the Configuration toolbar:
Setting
Refer
to
section
Scrambling / Descrambling on page 200 for more
Video
(if Service selection mode is set to By Pid)
Enable video
If checked, enables decoding of the video component.
Pid
PID of the video component to be decoded.
PMT
PID of the component which carries the PMT.
Encoding
format
Encoding format of the video component to be

decoded. Choice between:
MPEG-2
H-264 (MPEG-4)
Default selection: H-264 (MPEG-4)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

239
No Video Pid
Selection of the video at the decoder output if no

video to be decoded is detected. Choice between:
Bar pattern
Black pattern
Freeze on last valid frame
Default selection: Bar pattern
(if Service selection mode is set to By Service ID, Service Name or First
Service)
No Video Pid
Selection of the video at the decoder output if no

video to be decoded is detected. Choice between:
Bar pattern
Black pattern
Freeze on last valid frame
Default selection: Bar pattern
Audio
Click
to add an audio component to be processed. Up
to 8 audio components can be processed.
Audio x:
If Enable is checked, the x audio component is

processed.
Pid
PID of the audio component to be decoded.
Output format
Encoding format of the audio component to be

processed. Choice between:
MPEG1 Layer II
Uncompressed
(SMPTE 302M) or Dolby E
Pass-Thru
AAC
Dolby Digital (AC3)
Delay
Audio delay. The value must be set between -80 to 100

ms.
Pass-Thru
If checked, audio is transmitted without decoding.
(if Service selection mode is set to By Service ID, Service Name or First
Service)
240
Audio 1 to 8
Check the box of the audio component(s) to be

processed. Audio 1 is the 1st audio in the PMT, Audio
2 is the 2nd audio in the PMT ..... .
Delay
Audio delay. The value must be set between -80 to

100 ms.
Pass-Thru
If checked, audio is transmitted without decoding.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
Ancillary/VBI
Click Add Ancillary/VBI to add an Ancillary/VBI component to be
decoded. In the release 04.10, 1 Ancillary/VBI component can be
selected.
Enable
Ancillary / VBI
If checked, enables decoding of the Ancillary / VBI

component.
Pid
PID of the Ancillary / VBI component to be decoded.
Transport
format
Transport format of the Ancillary / VBI component to

be decoded. Choice between:
SMPTE 2038
EN 301 775
HD Teletext (OP47)
RDD-11
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

241
SDI Output: Pair x Dialog Box

Figure 5-244. SDI Output Pair x Dialog Box
Output Standard = SD
Output Standard = HD
General
242
Activity
If checked, enables the SDI output.
Output Pair
Select the SDI output pair between:

Pair 1 (IO1 + IO2)
Pair 2 (IO3 + IO4) (Dual Channels MPEG board
only)
Pair 1 and Pair 2 stand for channel 1 and channel 2
respectively.
Output
Standard
Selection of the output standard between:

Auto: No format conversion and no scaling.
SD: HD to SD format conversion. Scaling mode
and type are defined below.
Note: The output is disable when 1080i/30 or
720p/60 standards are decoded.
HD 1080i: SD to HD 1080i or HD 720p to HD1080i
format conversion. Scaling mode and type are
defined below.
HD 720p: SD to HD 720p or HD 1080i to HD720p
format conversion. Scaling mode and type are
defined below.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

SD
Ratio
Aspect
If Output Standard = SD, selection of the SD output

aspect ratio. Choice between:
4:3
16:9
Scaling Mode
Selection of the scaling mode. Choice between:

Manual: The scaling depends on Scaling Type
parameter below.
AFD: The scaling depends on AFD extracted from
the input signal.
AFD with Default: The scaling depends on AFD
extracted from input signal. If AFD is missing, then
the scaling depends on Scaling Type parameter
below.
Scaling Type
Selection of the scaling type if Scaling Mode above is

set to Manual or AFD with Default.
Output Standard = SD and SD Aspect Ratio = 16:9
Choice between:
Anamorphic, 4x3 Pillarbox, 14:9 Pillarbox and
Center Cut.
Output Standard = SD and SD Aspect Ratio = 4:3
Choice between:
Anamorphic, 16x9 Letterbox, 14:9 Letterbox and
Center Cut.
Output Standard = HD
Choice between:
4x3 Pillarbox, 14:9 Pillarbox and Center Cut.
Embedded SD VBI
These parameters are displayed if Output Standard is set to SD or Auto.
Teletext
Video Program System (VPS)
Wide Screen Signaling (WSS)
Monochrome Transparent
Full Transparent
Selection of the VBI embedded in the

SDI signal. Refer to Appendix A
VBI/ANC Processing on page 373.
Embedded SD ANC
These parameters are displayed if Output Standard is set to SD or Auto.
Closed Caption EIA 708-B
Time code (ATC)
Active Format Description (AFD)
Ancillary Transparent (SMPTE-2038)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Selection of the SD ancillary

data embedded in the SDI
signal. Refer to Appendix A
VBI/ANC
Processing on
page 373.
243
Embedded HD ANC
These parameters are displayed if Output Standard is set to HD or Auto.
Closed Caption EIA 708-B
Time code (ATC)
Active Format Description (AFD)
Ancillary Transparent (SMPTE-2038)
HD Teletext (OP-47)
Ancillary Transparent (RDD-11)
Selection of the HD ancillary

data embedded in the SDI
signal. Refer to Appendix A
VBI/ANC
Processing on
page 373.
Frame Synchronization
244
Frame
Synchronizer
Enables or disables the frame synchronizer. Choice

between:
Off: Frame synchronizer is disabled.
Reference: Frame synchronizer is enabled. The
reference signal is injected on the SYN connector on
the Manager board.
Pixel offset
SDI output pair phase adjustment (+/- 32000 pixels).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Audio Outputs Dialog Box

Figure 5-245. Audio Outputs Dialog Box
If a Single Channel MPEG board is used as Decoder, this box is used to

select the audio type on the XLR connectors of the breakout cable. Refer
to section Audio Breakout Cable on page 402.
Click
to add an analog stereo audio output. Up to 2
analog stereo outputs can be created.
Click
can be created.
Click
to add an AES audio output. Up to 4 AES outputs
to delete an audio output.
Analog Audio Parameters

XLR Output
Indicate the XLR used for the analog audio. Choice

between:
Out1(L1)/Out(R1): XLR Out1 is used to the left
channel and XLR Out2 is used to the right channel
of the 1st stereo.
Out3(L2)/Out(R2): XLR Out3 is used to the left
channel and XLR Out4 is used to the right channel
of the 2nd stereo.
Source
Number of the audio component (1 to 8).
Level
Audio Level in dBu.

Accepted values: between 4 dBu and 24 dBu in 1 dBu
steps.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

245
Digital Audio Parameters

XLR Output
Indicate the XLR used for the digital audio. Choice

between:
st
Out1(AES1): XLR Out1 is used to the 1
digital
audio.
nd digital
audio.
rd
digital
audio.
th digital
audio.
Source
Number of the audio component (1 to 8).
Dialog Boxes Related to the Modulator

Figure 5-246. Modulator configuration
Slot x - Modulator
box
TS Selection
box
Modulation
box
RF/IF Output
box
ASI Monitoring
box
Slot x - Modulator Dialog Box

Figure 5-247. Modulator Dialog Box
Board Parameters
246
Slot Number
Name
Name of the slot.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

TS Selection Dialog Box

Figure 5-248. TS Selection Dialog Box
Service parameters
ITS Selection
Select the source of the TS to modulate (internal or

ASI IN x connectors):
Internal: TS comes from the MPEG Encoder
board.
Auto ASI In 1-2: TS comes from ASI IN 1. If the
ASI IN 1 stream is interrupted for at least 500 ms,
the switch to ASI IN 2 is automatic but if the ASI
IN 1 stream is restored, there is no switchback to
ASI IN 1.
ASI In 1: TS comes from ASI IN 1.
ASI In 2: TS comes from ASI IN 2.
ASI Monitoring Dialog Box

Figure 5-249. ASI Monitoring Dialog Box
Parameters
Output
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Select the source of the signal to monitor. The

monitored signal is available on the ASI OUT
connector. Choice between:
Disable: Monitoring is disabled.
ASI In 1: ASI IN 1 TS is monitored.
ASI In 2: ASI IN 2 TS is monitored.
Internal: The TS from the internal MPEG Encoder
is monitored.
Active stream: Current stream after Bitrate
management and before Modulation blocking is
monitored.
247
Modulation Dialog Box

Figure 5-250. Modulation Dialog Box
DVB-S2 or DVB-S2X Standard
DVB-S/DSNG Standard
General Parameters (DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X Standards)

Standard
Select the Modulation standard. Choice between:

DVB-S/DSNG
DVB-S/S2
DVB-S/S2X
Modcod
Select the modulation type and code rate.
Pilots Insertion
If checked, the Pilots Insertion feature is enabled.
Frame
Size of the FEC Frame. Choice between:

Normal: 64800 bits
Short: 16200 bits
Roll-Off
Select the Roll-Off value. Choice between: 0.35, 0.25,

0.20, 0.15, 0.10, 0.05 and Custom.
Roll-Off custom
value
Select the Roll-Off value if Roll-Off below is set to

custom. Value between: 0.35 and 0.05 in 0.01 steps.
Symbol Rate
Rate of symbol transmission

Default value: 45000000 Bauds
Test Mode
Select the test mode. Choice between:

Disabled: Test is not activated.
PRBS: Pseudo Random Signal is used.
PLS Mode
Select the PLS mode. Choice between:

Default: As defined in EN302307
PLS Sequence 1: The PLS Sequence 1 value
below is used.
PLS Sequence 2: The PLS Sequence 2 value
below is used.
248
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

PLS Sequence 1
Refer to PLS Mode parameter above. Sequence

initialization on 18 bits (0x0).
PLS Sequence 2
Refer to PLS Mode parameter above. Sequence

initialization on 18 bits (0x0).
Rate Adaptation
Select the rate adaptation mode. Choice between:

Null packet adaptation
Padding Insertion
Max modulated
Ts bitrate
Indicates the maximum TS bitrate that can be

modulated. This value can be used to set
automatically the TS bitrate in the encoder.
General Parameters (DVB-S/DSNG Standard)

Standard
Select the Modulation standard. Choice between:

DVB-S/DSNG
DVB-S2
Modcod
Select the modulation type and code rate.
Symbol Rate
Rate of symbol transmission

Default value: 45000000 Bauds
Test Mode
Select the test mode. Choice between:

Disabled: The test is not activated.
PRBS: Internal Pseudo Random Signal generator
is used.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

249
RF Output Dialog Box

Figure 5-251. RF Output Dialog Box
RF output Parameters.
Activity
If checked the RF output is enabled.
Reverse
Spectrum
If checked the spectrum at the modulator output is

reversed.
RF Output Tilt
Adjust the Tilt correction (in dB/MHz).

Accepted
values:
from
-0.040 dB/MHz
0.040 dB/MHz in 0.005 dB/MHz steps.
Output Level
250
to
Level of the RF Output.

Accepted values: from -30 dBm to 5 dBm in 0.1 dBm
steps.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Modulator
Frequency
RF output frequency.
Accepted values:
L- Band: From 950 MHz to 2150 MHz in 1 Hz
steps. Default value: 1550 MHz
IF - Band: From 50 MHz to 180 MHz in 1 Hz steps.
Default value: 50 MHz
Refer also to Freq. Calculator below.
Freq. Calculator
Transponder
Band
OL Translator
Transponder
Freq
Output Modulator Frequency modulator can be set

manually or via a frequency calculator to provide
help for inexperienced operators to avoid potential
fault. Calculation consists of selecting the
upconverter frequency (Transponder Band) and
entered the transponder frequency (Transponder
Freq), in KHz, given by the satellite operator.
Output Parameters
RF Power
Type
On
Carried
Modulated
Select the un-mute type. Choice between:

Direct: RF Power Off to On is abrupt
Progressive: RF Power Off to On is progressive
If checked the output signal is replaced by a simple
sine wave at the RF frequency. The level of the sinus
corresponds to the RF Output level. Among other
things, this mode enables phase noise
measurement without the need for an external
amplifier.
Auto RF Power Off Conditions

Stream
Loss
Input
If checked the RF output is muted when the TS

Stream is lost or uncorrected after the Time Out
period below.
Loss of Ref. Time

Out
If checked the RF output is muted when the external

reference is lost after the Time Out period below.
Time Out
Refer to Stream Input Loss and Loss of Ref. Time

Out parameters above.
Accepted values: From 1 min to 1440 min.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

251
Clock Synchro
Clock Reference
Select the source of the 10MHz clock reference.

Choice between:
Internal: The internal 10MHz oscillator is used.
External: The 10 MHz reference is injected on the
REF IN connector.
The processing clocks of the modulator are always
locked to the internal or external reference signal.
Carried Id
252
Global Unique
Identifier
If checked, the GUI and information below are sent.
GPS coordinates
If checked, the Latitude and Longitude coordinates

are sent.
Phone
If checked, the Phone number is sent.
Data
If checked the User Data is sent.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Dialog Boxes Related to LAN 1 / LAN 2 ports on the

Manager board (CP6000)
LAN 1 or LAN 2 ports can be used to control the equipment (TS over
IP and C&C on same port).
To configure the Manager boards LAN 1 and LAN 2 Ethernet interfaces

click the Aggregation button on the toolbar.
Figure 5-252. Access to Manager boards LAN 1/LAN 2 configuration
Aggregation button
The LAN 1/LAN 2 configuration page is displayed:

Figure 5-253. LAN 1/LAN 2 configuration page
Port to configure selection
Click LAN Agg 1 or LAN Agg 2 on the left of the page to select the
Ethernet port to configure.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

253
LAN 1 (Agg 1) LAN 2 (Agg 2) Dialog Box

Figure 5-254. Ethernet Interface Dialog Box
The LAN 1/LAN 2 configuration is not global. It should be performed

in each configuration.
Ethernet Interface
Routes
0 to 4 static routes can be recorded by the Ethernet port.
Click the
icon to add a route then edit its parameters.
254
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

6
Servicing
Chapter
Introduction
This chapter describes the following servicing operations:
Installing software options via the Command Line Interface.
Displaying Unit information.
Installing / Replacing an LCD Front Panel.
Replacing a MPEG Board.
Cleaning air inlet grill.

Ordering and Installing Software Options ............................page 256
Displaying Unit information ....................................................page 260
Installing or Replacing an LCD Front Panel (CP6000) .........page 261
Replacing a MPEG Board .........................................................page 262
Replacing a Modulator Board .................................................page 264
Cleaning the Air Inlet Grill .......................................................page 265
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

255
Chapter 6 Servicing Ordering and Installing Software Options
Ordering and Installing Software Options

Introduction
The purpose of this section is to explain the procedures for displaying
device software option status and for ordering and installing a software
option.
If the options are ordered with the product, they will be installed
in-factory and will be available to the Operator straight away.
The operations described in this section are performed using the
Command Line Interface.
Accessing the Command Line Interface

Refer to section Accessing the Command Line Interface on page 51.
Entering the Login and Password

Refer to section Entering the Login and Password on page 52.
Ordering / Installing software options

This section provides information to order software options and to install
it in the device.
Ordering software options process

To order software options from Thomson Video Networks, please
provide Thomson Video Networks:
The software options of the same type already installed in the

device.
Refer to section Displaying Software Options (lsopt) on
page 257.
The equipment code of your device. Refer to section Displaying

the Equipment Code (eqcod) on page 258.
The serial number of your device. Refer to section Status Bar

on page 95.
The software options required.
Thomson Video Networks will then supply a specific key per type of
option (which is unique and can only be used for your Platform).
256
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Installing software options process

To install software options:
Uninstall software options of the same type as those to be

installed (change in number of options of the same type).
Refer to section Uninstalling a Software Option (rmopt) on
page 258.
Install software options using the key supplied by

Thomson Video Networks. Refer to section Installing a
Software Option (insopt) on page 259.
Displaying Software Options (lsopt)

To display software options:
1. Type lsopt after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the
keyboard.
Figure 6-1. Displaying software option status - lsopt command

Id
Software option ID.
Ref.
Software option sales reference.
Status
Option status, installed indicates that the

option has been installed. "-----" indicates
that the option has not been installed.
Key
Key used to install the option.
Number
Number of options.
Comment
Option label.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

257
Displaying the Equipment Code (eqcod)

1. Type eqcod after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the
keyboard.
2. Enter the slot number 0 then press ENTER.
Figure 6-2. Reading the equipment code with the CLI - eqcod command

EQCOD
eqcod (xxxx) of the device
Uninstalling a Software Option (rmopt)

To uninstall a software option:
1. Type rmopt after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER.
2. Enter the Option id of the software option to be uninstalled (see
section Displaying Software Options (lsopt) on page 257 to know
the option IDs) then press ENTER.
Figure 6-3. Uninstalling a software option via the CLI - rmopt command
3. Type y after Do you really want to remove this option

[Y]/[N(default)]? if you wish to confirm option removal or n if you
wish to keep the option, then press ENTER.
4. As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device
(reboot command).
258
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Installing a Software Option (insopt)

To install a software option using the code supplied by Thomson Video
Networks:
1. Type insopt after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the
keyboard.
2. Enter the software option Option Key then press ENTER.
Figure 6-4. Enabling a software option via the CLI - insopt command
3. To finish installing the option reboot the device (reboot command).

4. Ensure that the option has been validated using the lsopt command
(see section Displaying Software Options (lsopt) on page 257).
When an installed option is edited (i.e. if the number of AAC audios
must be increased), this option will need to be uninstalled before
being reinstalled with the new key (see section below).
Recovering Lost Keys

If you have lost a software option key, please contact Thomson Video
Networks Customer Services with:
Option purchase order
Equipment code
Sales reference of the option relating to the lost key
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

259
Chapter 6 Servicing Displaying Unit information
Displaying Unit information

The purpose of this section is to explain the procedures for displaying the
Field Replaceable Unit information (FRU).
Displaying Field Replaceable Unit information

(frudisp)
To display the Field Replaceable Unit information (FRU):
1. Type frudisp after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER.
2. Enter the FRU slot number (1 to 4 for CP6000 or 1 to 2 for CP6100)
then press ENTER.
Figure 6-5. Displaying the FRU information- frudisp command
260
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Chapter 6 Servicing Installing or Replacing an LCD Front Panel (CP6000)
Installing or Replacing an LCD Front Panel (CP6000)

The ViBE CP6000 Front panel without LCD can be replaced by a Front
panel with LCD and keypad. The aim of the LCD front panel is to provide
a basic control/command interface for the main settings. Its operation is
described in the Front Panel Operation Chapter.
Front panel with LCD and keypad reference: CP6x00-OPT-FAV-LCD
Procedure for installing/replacing an LCD front panel
1. Remove the front panel by unscrewing the knurled knobs on the front
face.
Figure 6-6. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 fixing front panel fixing
Knurled knobs
Front panel without LCD
Front panel with LCD and Keypad
2. Install the new front panel by screwing the knurled knobs on both
sides of the front face, taking care of the correct insertion of the SubD
connectors.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

261
Chapter 6 Servicing Replacing a MPEG Board
Replacing a MPEG Board

Terminology
Hot Plug boards can be removed/installed when the device is switched
on. There is no risk of damage but all services provided by the chassis
will be disrupted.
Hot Swap boards can be removed/installed when the device is switched
on. There is no risk of damage and services which are not concerned by
the function are not disrupted.
MPEG boards are Hot swap.
MPEG board reference: CP6000-HW-MPEG-B or CP6000-HW-MPEG-C.
The CP6000-HW-MPEG-C MPEG board requires a software release of
3.0 or higher to run.
To display MPEG board version refer to section Displaying Field
Replaceable Unit information (frudisp) on page 260.
CP6HWMEDAA: CP6000-HW-MPEG-A
CP6HWMEDBA: CP6000-HW-MPEG-B
CP6HWMEDCA: CP6000-HW-MPEG-C
Procedure for replacing a MPEG board

1. Disconnect the cables on the MPEG board front panel
262
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Chapter 6 Servicing Replacing a MPEG Board
2. CP6100 only:
Unscrew the screws holding the boards retaining bracket and remove
the bracket.
Bracket
3. Pull the extractor lever to release the board contacts from the
backplane board connector
Extractor lever
LAN 1
Audio
MPEG
IO1
IO2
LAN 2
IO5
4. Remove the board

5. Wait 10 seconds
6. Insert the spare MPEG board into its slot
7. CP6100 only:
Fix the boards retaining bracket (refer to step 2)
8. Connect the cables on the MPEG board front panel
The MPEG board is automatically started and configured via the
Manager board.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

263
Chapter 6 Servicing Replacing a Modulator Board
Replacing a Modulator Board

Modulator boards are hot swap enabled.
Procedure for replacing a Modulator board
1. Disconnect the cables on the Modulator board front panel
2. CP6100 only:
Unscrew the screws holding the boards retaining bracket and remove
the bracket.
Bracket
3. Pull the extractor lever to release the board contacts from the
backplane board connector
Extractor lever
4. Remove the board

5. Wait 10 seconds
6. Insert the spare Modulator board into its slot
7. CP6100 only:
Fix the boards retaining bracket (refer to step 2 above)
8. Connect the cables on the Modulator board front panel
The Modulator board is automatically started and configured via the
Manager board.
264
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Chapter 6 Servicing Cleaning the Air Inlet Grill
Cleaning the Air Inlet Grill

To prevent the power supply from overheating, you must regularly:
Clean the rack

recommendations,
Clean ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform air inlet grills.
filter
according
to
the
manufacturers
These operations must be performed at least twice a year.

The device must be installed in a room with low dust levels. The
maximum density of dust in the air must not exceed 100 g/m3 and
the maximum number of particles with a diameter greater than 1 m
must not exceed 1 million/m3.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

265
Chapter 6 Servicing Cleaning the Air Inlet Grill
BLANK PAGE
266
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

7
Troubleshooting
Chapter
Introduction
If you face any problem with the equipment, consult the FAQ section first.
If the problem is not resolved, refer to the Troubleshooting Procedure
section where it is explained how to generate a ReportFile.bin file to be
sent to Thomson Video Customer Service. This file is critical to provide
efficient support.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ........................................page 268
Troubleshooting Procedure .....................................................page 269
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

267
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

I have lost the equipment IP address so that I cannot connect to
the equipment. What should I do?
The factory set ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform IP address
and Netmask for the Control and Command port are 192.168.1.1 and
255.255.255.0.
These were changed during the installation setup and the new customer
set IP settings (address, netmask, default gateway) are the ones that will
be required for subsequent connections.
If you have lost (or do not know) the last stored customer set IP address,
use the front panel to read the Control/Command IP address. See
Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation on page 67.
I cannot download a new package via the Equipment Setup tool.

What should I do?
Pack invalid is displayed when I download a new package via the
Equipment Setup tool.
268
Restart the download because an error occurred during the transfer of

data between the server of the Equipment Setup and CP6000.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Procedure
The procedure is composed of two steps: Generating the report and
Getting the report from the equipment. They are described in the
following sections.
Generating the Report

1. Click the About button in the bottom right corner of the Graphical User
Interface screen to open the About screen.
2. Click the Report tab in the About screen to display the Dump report
button.
Figure 7-1. Opening the About screen
3. Click Dump report button to launch the report generation.

Figure 7-2. Generating the report screen
Wait a while until report generation. A new button (Open report) will
be displayed next to the Dump report button.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

269
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 7-3. Open report button
Getting the Report From the Equipment

1. Click the Open report button.
2. Save the ReportFile on your local PC.
3. Send this file to Thomson Video Customer Service. This file is critical
for providing efficient support.
270
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

8
Tools
Chapter
Introduction
This chapter describes the Equipment Setup, Download application
and SigEditor tools delivered in the CD-ROM with the product.
The Equipment Setup tool is used to download new product packages
to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms.
The Download application is used to download new product packages
to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms. It can be
used to download new product packages from the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
3.0 software release and above.
The SigEditor tool is used to edit SI/PSI tables. In the ViBE CP6000 /
CP6100 Contribution Platforms, it is used to edit NIT tables.

Equipment Setup Tool ..............................................................page 272
Download application...............................................................page 289
SigEditor Tool.............................................................................page 300
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

271
Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool
Equipment Setup Tool

Introduction
This section describes the Equipment Setup tool delivered in the
CD-ROM with the product.
It is used to download new product packages to one or more ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms. It is built upon the Command
Line Interface (CLI) module.
Figure 8-1. Interfaces with several ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms
Description
Overview
Equipment Setup provides 3 interfaces:
272
a Graphical User Interface (GUI), which presents available commands

and the current state in a comprehensive way to Operators.
a Telnet client interface, to send CLI commands to ViBE CP6000 /

CP6100 Contribution Platform and receive data and status.
an FTP server interface, to enable ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution

Platform to be downloaded with a new product package.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

In addition, Equipment Setup can store its persistent state (list of

recently managed ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms, etc.) to
file on a local drive.
Internally to Equipment Setup, an action on the GUI results in the
sending of one or more CLI commands via the Telnet client, and each CLI
response is reflected by the GUI and available information from the
embedded FTP server.
Description of the Graphical User Interface

Figure 8-2. Description of the Graphical User Interface
Download Area
Equipment Area
Messages /Log Area
The application interface is divided into 4 areas.

1. The toolbar which displays the application logo and the connected
Operator. It also contains:
a button to set some advanced settings
a button to set the username and password of another Operator

wishing to connect to ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platform
a button to display all useful information about the application

software
2. Equipment area: This area displays information about all ViBE CP6000
/ CP6100 Contribution Platforms that the Operator can deal with.
Figure 8-3. Information available in the Equipment area
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

273
The following commands are available for the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform present in the Equipment area:
for one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
Figure 8-4. Commands available in the Equipment area for one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
or Connect
for more than one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform:
Figure 8-5. Commands available in the Equipment area for more than one ViBE CP6000
/ CP6100 Contribution Platform
or Connect
Using these commands, the Operator can:
274
add or remove an equipment item to/from this list (Remove and

Add equipment commands)
connect to or disconnect from one or more ViBE CP6000 /

CP6100
Contribution
Platforms
(Connect/Disconnect
commands)
add ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform to the

Download list (Add to download list command). This list is
displayed in the Download area
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

3. Download area: This area contains the connected ViBE CP6000 /

CP6100 Contribution Platform(s) which have been moved to the
Download list (via the Add to download list shortcut command in the
Equipment area) with all the commands and information required for
the download process.
The following commands are available for one or more ViBE CP6000 /
CP6100 Contribution Platforms present in the Download area:
Figure 8-6. Commands available in the Download area for one or more ViBE CP6000 /
CP6100 Contribution Platforms
Using these commands, the Operator can:
Select product packages via a file browser to choose the

software to download to ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platform (Select product package command).
Launch download operation (Launch download command).
Trigger the toggle to enable the newly downloaded software

(Toggle command). A toogle leads to an automatic ViBE CP6000
/ CP6100 Contribution Platform reboot (following Operator
confirmation).
Remove ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform from the

Download area.
4. Messages area: This area displays messages for the Operator

(success or failure of an operation, etc.).
Figure 8-7. Example of messages
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

275
PC Setup
The default value of the Local IP address is the default IP address of the
first network interface (OS-dependent value). The Operator can edit it in
the Advanced settings dialog box accessible via the toolbar.
Figure 8-8. Command to change the local IP address for the FTP server
Advanced settings button in the toolbar
Local IP address for FTP server text field
Here are some recommendations:
If the PC running Equipment Setup has several network interfaces

(e.g.: WiFi and Ethernet, or public and private networks, etc.) and the
Operator wants to use a particular interface (e.g.: faster by Ethernet
than WiFi) for the download, s/he must indicate the IP address
corresponding to this interface as the FTP server IP address.
If the PC has a private IP address (on the LAN) and a public IP address
(on a broader network), and the device is to connect to the PC via its
public address (e.g.: firewall or router preventing connection via the
private address), the Operator must indicate the public IP address of
the PC as the FTP server IP address.
In the case of a dynamic IP address (DHCP), it is better not to set the IP

address of the FTP server, as the next time Equipment Setup is run,
the PC IP address may be different, and it will then need to be reset for
the download to work.
Operation
This section explains:
276
how to launch Equipment Setup
how to enter the Operator Login and Password
how to add ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform to the

Equipment area and to connect to one or more of them
how to download software on to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
which type of information is available in the Messages area
Launching Equipment Setup

1. Unzip the .zip file in a dedicated directory (or in any directory).
2. Run the application.
The application can be run by simply double-clicking on
"EquipmentSetup.jar" but it is advisable to create a shortcut command by
double-clicking on "create-shortcuts.vbs" which launches a script. The
script creates two shortcut commands: "EquipmentSetup" and
"EquipmentSetup-debug".
Move or copy the shortcut commands to the Desktop, the Start menu, the
Quick Launch Bar, etc.
When Equipment Setup is run via the "EquipmentSetup-debug"
shortcut command, the logs are written in the "EquipmentSetup-log.txt"
file (this file is reset each time the application is launched).
Entering the User Name and Password

Before connecting to any ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform,
the Operator must provide a username and a password for
authentication.
If authentication with one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution

Platforms fails, the connection(s) to the concerned ViBE CP6000 /
CP6100 Contribution Platform(s) is (are) closed.
If authentication with one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution

Platforms is successful, the username used for authentication is
displayed in the main window of Equipment Setup.
Figure 8-9. Username displayed in the toolbar
Username used for authentication
Entering the Log In

At startup, a dialog window appears to enter the username and the
corresponding password to log on.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

277
Figure 8-10. Startup dialog box
User
and
Password
The default username is the last username used.

The default password is the password associated with
this username if password storage is enabled in the
Advanced settings dialog box accessible via the toolbar,
or an empty string otherwise.
Figure 8-11. Command to store user passwords
Advanced settings button in the toolbar
Store user passwords option boxes
Connect
equipments
278
In the current release, you can use the following login/password

couples: operator/operator or service/service.
For download and reboot operations, service/service is
required as login/password.
This command enables the Operator to directly connect

to ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform(s)
already added to the Equipment area in a previous
session and programmed to be connected after login
(one C checkbox is available per ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform for this purpose, as shown in the
following figure).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Figure 8-12. "C (Connection at logon)" checkbox in the Equipment area
C (Connection at logon) checkbox
After login to an equipment item or a change in the current user,

Equipment Setup gets the list of available CLI commands.
Changing User Name and Password

After connecting to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platforms, the Operator can authenticate with another username at any
time (when no operation is ongoing) using the Change user button in the
toolbar.
Figure 8-13. Change User
Change user

Equipment Area
This area displays information about all ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platforms that the Operator can deal with.
Figure 8-14. Information available in the Equipment area
From this area, the Operator can perform the following operations:
Add or remove an equipment item to/from this list (Remove and Add
equipment commands).
Connect to or disconnect from one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100

Contribution Platforms (Connect/Disconnect commands).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

279
Add ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform to the Download list

(Add to download list command). This list is displayed in the
Download area.
These operations are described hereafter.
Adding/Removing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform to/from the

Equipment Area
Adding ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
Select the Add Equipment command.

This command is available via a floating menu in the Equipment area, a
shortcut menu attached to an already declared ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform, or the Add Equipment button at the bottom of the
Equipment area.
Figure 8-15. Adding Equipment command locations
Three ways of accessing the same

Add equipment command
A dialog box is displayed to set the IP address of the ViBE CP6000 /

CP6100 Contribution Platform to be added to the Equipment area.
Figure 8-16. Adding a ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
Address
280
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 IP address or hostname

which is used to identify a declared ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Platform.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
Connect
This command is used to launch an automatic

connection to a ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform just after
it has been declared.
The IP address (or the hostname) and device name of the declared ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform are displayed in the Equipment
area.
Figure 8-17. Declared ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform displayed in the
Equipment area
Removing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
To remove one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform, select the

Remove shortcut command.
Figure 8-18. Remove shortcut command
To remove several ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms in one

step, select the relevant ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard for multiple
discontinuous selection or the SHIFT key for multiple continuous
selection then select the Remove shortcut command.
A message is displayed asking the Operator for confirmation.
Figure 8-19. Confirmation request before ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
removal
Connecting/Disconnecting to/from ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution

Platform
Once declared, a ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform can be
connected.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

281
The connection state of a ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform

can be: "Connected", "Not connected", "Connecting", "Error" and also
"Downloading", "Stopping Download", "Installing options" and
"Rebooting".
Figure 8-20. Example of connection state (Connected)
A connected ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform is eligible for

download, reboot, etc.
The declared equipment list contains one flag per ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform to indicate whether this ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform must be automatically connected when the
application is launched (and whether the Operator confirms the
connection at startup, see section Automatic Connection at Startup
After Login on page 282).
Figure 8-21. C flag in the Equipment area
C flag
Connection
Connection can be:
automatic at startup after login
automatic after ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform

declaration
manual
Automatic Connection at Startup After Login
For ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms that have already been
installed and programmed to start up automatically after Login, the Yes
button just needs to be selected in the Login/Password dialog box. ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms programmed to start up
automatically after Login are indicated by the C box, which is checked
next to each ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform. Refer to
section Entering the Log In on page 277.
282
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Automatic Connection After ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution

Platform Declaration
Automatic connection can be requested when adding a ViBE CP6000 /

CP6100 Contribution Platform to the Equipment area. Just authorize the
Connect command (button set to Yes). Refer to section Adding ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform on page 280.
Manual Connection
Prerequisites: Manual connection is only possible if the

following two conditions are met:
For ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms that have

already been installed and programmed to be automatically
connected after login, the (Connect equipment) No button must
be selected in the Login/Password dialog box when the login
details are entered. Refer to section Entering the Log In on
page 277.
For ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms to be installed,
the (Connect) No button must be selected in the Adding an
equipment dialog box when the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform is declared. Refer to section Adding ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform on page 280.
To connect to one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform, select the

Connect shortcut command.
Figure 8-22. Connect shortcut command for one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platform
To connect to several ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms

in one step, select the relevant ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platform while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard for
multiple discontinuous selection or the SHIFT key for multiple
continuous selection then select the Connect shortcut command.
Figure 8-23. Connect shortcut command for more than one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

283
If the connection is successful, the status is Connected and the software

version is displayed beside the connected ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Figure 8-24. "Connected" status with indication of the software version
Software version
If the connection fails, the status is Error and the software version is not
displayed.
Figure 8-25. "Error" status
Disconnection
To disconnect one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform, select

the Disconnect shortcut command.
Figure 8-26. Disconnect shortcut command
As in the case of connection, it is possible to disconnect several ViBE

CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms in one step. Select the relevant
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform while holding down the
CTRL key on the keyboard for multiple discontinuous selection or the
SHIFT key for multiple continuous selection then select the Disconnect
shortcut command.
Figure 8-27. Disconnect shortcut command for more than one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
A message is displayed asking the Operator for confirmation.

284
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Figure 8-28. Message before ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform disconnection
Once ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform has been

disconnected, the status becomes Disconnected.
Figure 8-29. "Disconnected" status

Download Area
The Download area contains the connected ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platforms which have been moved to the Download list (via
the Add to download list shortcut command in the Equipment area)
with all the commands and information required for the download
process, i.e.:
Select product package to select a product package to be downloaded
to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms (whether
they are connected or not), by browsing the local file system. Once one
product package is selected, the file name of the selected package is
displayed in the table for each ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platform (as well as the actual firmware/board packages stored in the two
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform memory banks) and the
download operation is available.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

285
Figure 8-30. Select product package command
Figure 8-31. Active software, Inactive software, Software to be downloaded
Active software
Inactive software
Software to be downloaded
Launch download command to launch the download operation. This

command is available only if a product package has been selected
beforehand. A progress bar is displayed for each ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform during the download operation.
Figure 8-32. Download in progress
Download progress bar
286
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

The download can be stopped at any time by using the Stop download
shortcut command.
Figure 8-33. Stop download shortcut command
Toggle command to enable the newly downloaded software. A toogle

leads to an automatic ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
reboot (following Operator confirmation). The "Toggle" operation cannot
be performed on several equipment items in one step.
Figure 8-34. Toggle shortcut command
Figure 8-35. Confirmation request before ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
reboot
Remove command to remove ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution

Platform from the Download list (no confirmation is required from the
Operator).
Figure 8-36. Remove shortcut command
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

287
Getting Information in the Messages Area

Equipment Setup displays messages for the Operator (success or
failure of an operation, etc.).
Figure 8-37. Example of messages
288
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Chapter 8 Tools Download application
Download application
Overview
This section describes the Download application delivered in the
CD-ROM with the product.
It is used to download new product packages to one or more ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms from the 3.0 software release
and above. The procedure is described below.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 feature two program banks. When downloading is
complete, the inactive bank will contain the software release that has just
been downloaded but which is inactive, and the active bank will contain
the active software release. The toggle function can be used to toggle
one software release from the inactive bank so that it becomes the active
software release in the active bank.
The {Download} application provides the following features:
Simultaneous upgrade of several ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
For an ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 or a group of ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Full upgrade (downloading + toggling)
Downloading only
Device firmware upgrades can also be performed via the
MediaFlexSUITE. Refer to the MediaFlexSUITE User Manual.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

289
Operation
Installing and running the application
Installing the application
To install the {Download} application:
1. Copy the DownloadSetup.exe file on the PCs hard drive.
2. Launch DownloadSetup.exe to install the {Download} application. The
following window will be displayed:
Figure 8-38. Installation, {Download} application 1/4
3. Click Next. The following window will be displayed:

290
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

4. Select the destination directory for the files of the {Download}

application and click Next. The following window will be displayed:
5. Click Next. The {Download} application is installed. On installation

completion the following window will be displayed:
6. Click Finish.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

291
Running the application

To run the {Download} application:
1. Open the {Download} application folder.
Figure 8-42. {Download} application folder
1. Click the Download.exe file. The applications main window will be

displayed:
Figure 8-43. Main window, {Download} application
Screen description
The main window features two pages:
Devices
Software Release
The {Download} application release number is displayed in the title bar

of the main window.
292
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Devices page
Figure 8-44. Devices page, {Download} application
This page displays the list of installed devices and their status. Click a
column header to sort its content.
Software Release page
Figure 8-45. Software Release page, {Download} application
This page is used to select (Browse) the directory containing the

software release to download.
Download procedure
The download procedure is as follows:
Declare the devices to be upgraded
Select the directory containing the file to be downloaded
Select the devices to be upgraded
Select the operation to be performed (upgrade, download or toggle)

The term software release also refers to a package.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

293
Step 1: Declaring the devices to be upgraded

Method 1:
1. Click Add on the Devices page. The following dialog box is displayed:
Figure 8-46. Name, IP address and Device family of the device to be upgraded,
{Download} application
2. Enter the device name, IP address and device family of the device to
be upgraded.
3. Click OK.
This information will be displayed in the main window.
Method 2:
1. Position the mouse cursor on the Devices page and then right-click to
display the following shortcut menu:
Figure 8-47. Devices page {Download} application
294
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

2. Click Add... . The following dialog box is displayed:

Figure 8-48. Name, IP address and Device family of the device to be upgraded,
{Download} application
3. Enter the device name, IP address and device family of the device to
be upgraded.
4. Click OK.
5. This information will be displayed in the main window.
Step 2: Selecting the directory containing the file to be
downloaded
1. Click the Software Release tab.
2. Click the Browse... button.
3. Select the directory containing the file to be downloaded.
Figure 8-49. Directory containing the file to be downloaded, {Download} application
4. Click OK.
The contents of the selected directory will be displayed:
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

295
Figure 8-50. Files displayed on the Software Release page, {Download} application
5. If necessary, select the file to be downloaded.

Step 3: Selecting devices to upgrade
1. Click the Devices tab.
2. Select the devices to upgrade.
To upgrade specific devices, use the standard shortcut operations (Shift
+ left click) or (Ctrl + right click).
To select all devices, use the Select All command in the shortcut menu.
Step 4: Selecting the operation to be performed
Select the operation to be performed on the selected devices via the
shortcut menu: Full Update... , Download only, View or Toggle...
Full Update... command
This command downloads and toggles the file chosen on the Software
Release page in each selected device.
If the file is already in the device active bank, no operation will be
performed. If it is in the inactive bank, this command will toggle it into
the active bank. If this file is neither the active bank nor the inactive bank,
the file will be downloaded into the inactive bank and then toggled into
the active bank.
Download only command
For each selected device this command checks whether the file selected
on the Software Release page is in the active or inactive bank. If it cannot
be found, the file will be downloaded into the inactive bank.
View or Toggle ... command
The View or Toggle... command will be grayed out (unavailable) if

several devices have been selected.
This command displays the software releases of the active and inactive
banks for the selected device and is used to toggle between these active
and inactive banks.
296
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Figure 8-51. View or Toggle command, {Download} application
Check the box
Inactive software release to active

Active software release
To toggle between the active and inactive banks:

1. Check the box to select the device.
2. Click OK.
On a Windows 7 platform, if the OK button is not displayed go to
Control Panel \ All Control Panel Items \ Display and switch to 100%.
Then click Apply and log off/log on.
Other application commands
Edit command
This command is used to edit the name and IP address of the device
selected in the main window.
Remove command
This command is used to delete the selected device from the main
window.
Update All... command

This button on the Devices page is a shortcut command that is
equivalent to Select All + Full Update.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

297
Status messages
The following status messages may be displayed in the Status column
on the Devices page.
Table 8-1. Status messages, {Download} application
Status messages
Indications
Connecting...
A socket has been opened to set up a

session with the device.
Logging...
The session is open. The connection

name has been sent. The application is
waiting for a reply from the device.
Read topology...
The device topology read command

has been sent. The application is
waiting for a reply.
Get SW versions...
The bank content identification

command has been sent. The
application is waiting for a reply.
Get SW versions (2nd attempt)...
The first attempt at reading the

software release has failed. The
application is trying again.
OK. SW status read
Reply
to
the
bank
content
identification command: all the
required information is present.
Setup download...
The application is checking whether

the download is necessary.
No need to download...
The download is not necessary as the

software release is already in the
active or inactive bank.
Package already downloaded and The download is not necessary as the

is active
software release is already in the
active bank.
Download started for X board(s). The command for file downloading
Please wait...
has been sent.
298
Downloading... (X %)
The FTP download is complete, the file

has been transferred to the device and
saving has begun in the flash memory.
Downloading...
The FTP download is complete, the file

has been transferred to the device and
saving has begun in the flash memory.
No information is available about the
progress of the operation.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Table 8-1. Status messages, {Download} application
Status messages
Indications
Download successful
The file has been transferred to the

inactive bank and the identification
command has confirmed that the
inactive bank contains the appropriate
software release.
Toggle done
The toggle command has been sent.
No need to update
The device does not require an

upgrade.
Error messages
The following error messages may be displayed in the Status column on
the Devices page.
Table 8-2. Error messages, {Download} application
Error messages
Failed. Connection error
Indications
Impossible to set up the session. The
device is unavailable or in the process
of rebooting.
Failed. Login rejected: Too many Too many applications are open.
connections
Failed. No answer from some Impossible to execute the command
boards
as some installed boards are not
responding.
Aborted. Already downloading!
Impossible to execute the command

as downloading is in progress.
Failed. Software error.
Software error in the {ViBE Download}

application.
Failed. Impossible to connect.
The connection has been lost.
Failed. SW not found in inactive Impossible to toggle banks as inactive

bank for X function(s)
bank does not contain the required
software.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

299
Chapter 8 Tools SigEditor Tool
SigEditor Tool
Overview
This section describes the SigEditor tool delivered in the CD-ROM with
the product. This user-friendly tool is used to edit all SI/PSI tables.
In the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms, the SigEditor tool
is used to generate and edit NIT tables. Once the table is ready, it can be
saved in a file to be downloaded to the device.
Operation
To launch the editor, double-click the SigEditor icon
Select the Signaling standard and click Ok.

Figure 8-52. SigEditor tool - Selecting the Signaling Standard
The Sigeditor tool main page is displayed

Figure 8-53. SigEditor tool - Main page
To edit a table, proceed as follows:

1. Click the Blank page button in the tool bar.
A list will be displayed enabling you to choose the table to edit.
300
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

2. Select the table type in the list.

3. Click OK.
Figure 8-54. SigEditor tool - Selecting a table to edit it
1. Click the blank page to edit a table.
2. Select the table to edit.
3. Click OK.
4. Edit the fields of section 0 which is displayed in compliance with

MPEG-2 ISO 13818-1: Generic Coding of Moving Pictures and
Associated Audio: Systems standard and ETSI EN 300 468: Service
Information (SI) in DVB Systems.
5. Add descriptors to each descriptor loop via the Add Descriptor
shortcut command.
6. Choose the descriptor type in the list then click OK.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

301
Figure 8-55. SigEditor tool - Adding a descriptor
8. Save
4. Select each field and edit the corresponding .
5. Right click Descriptor to select the Add Descriptor command.
6. Select the descriptor.
302
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

7. Edit the field(s) of the descriptor.

Figure 8-56. SigEditor tool - Editing the descriptor fields
7. Edit the descriptor.
8. Add other sections if needed via the Add Section shortcut command
attached to the root.
9. Save the table by clicking on the Save button
in the tool bar.
Figure 8-57. SigEditor tool - Adding a section
9. Save
8. Right click Table to select the Add Section command.
A file browser enables you to name the file and choose the target
directory.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

303
Figure 8-58. SigEditor tool - File browser
10. Click Save command.
10. Click Save.
304
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

A
Technical Specifications
Appendix
Introduction
This chapter gives:
specifications of the device
specifications of the MPEG Encoder, MPEG Decoder and Modulator

boards
device compliance
certifications and environmental specifications
ordering guide to order the device and its options

General Device Specifications ................................................page 306
Chassis Specifications ..............................................................page 317
Manager Board Specifications................................................page 318
MPEG Encoder Specifications.................................................page 327
MPEG Decoder Specifications.................................................page 359
DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications ..........................page 378
Standard Compliance ...............................................................page 386
Certifications and Environmental Specifications .................page 388
Ordering Guide ..........................................................................page 392
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

305
Appendix A Technical Specifications General Device Specifications
General Device Specifications

Electrical Specifications
Power supply - ViBE CP6000
AC Power Supply
for Base system with single AC PSU
Table A-1. AC Power Supply specifications for Base system with single AC PSU - CP6000
Standards
306
Title
Mains voltage
100 - 240 VAC (one range with no switching).
Mains type
50 - 60 Hz
Max. input current
3.4A - 1.5A
Inrush current
< 14A cold start up @ 230V per unit, < 5ms
Network
connection
Type A device connected with a non-industrial IEC 60320

C14 compliant plug.
Earthing
arrangement
TN/TT
For Norway and only for this country, this device can be
connected to an earthing arrangement of IT type for a
voltage of 230V between phases.
Isolation class
Installation
category
II
Overcurrent
protection
Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

for Base system with dual AC/DC PSU or AC/AC PSU
Table A-2. AC Power Supply specifications (per unit) for Base system with dual AC/DC
PSU or AC/AC PSU - CP6000
Standards
Title
Mains voltage
Mains type
50 - 60 Hz
Max. input
current.
(in normal mode)
1.75A - 0.75A (with two PSUs operating in the same

chassis).
Max. input
current.
(in default mode)
3.4A - 1.5A for a single PSU in operation (if one PSU is

faulty)
Inrush current
Network
connection
Type A device connected with a non-industrial CEI 60320

compliant plug.
Earthing
arrangement
TN/TT
Isolation class
Installation
category
II
Overcurrent
protection
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

307
DC Power Supply
for Base system with single DC PSU
Table A-3. DC Power Supply specifications for Base system with single DC PSU - CP6000
Standards
Title
Input voltage
48 VDC + 20% - 15%
Current type
DC supply
Max. input current
9A - 5.6A
Network
connection
Male/female 3-pin SubD connector.
Earthing
arrangement
DCI system (DC return isolated).
Isolation class
DC network
ETS 300132-2, September 1996
Overcurrent
protection
for Base system with dual AC/DC PSU or DC/DC PSU
Table A-4. DC Power Supply specifications (per unit) for Base system with dual AC/DC
PSU or DC/DC PSU - CP6000
Standards
308
Title
Input voltage
48 VDC + 20% - 15%
Current type
DC supply
Max. input current

(in normal mode)
3.75A - 2.6A per PSU

(with two PSUs operating in the same chassis)
Max. input current

(in default mode)
9A - 5.6A for a single PSU in operation

(if one PSU is faulty)
Network
connection
Male/female 3-pin SubD connector.
Earthing
arrangement
DCI system (DC return isolated).
Isolation class
DC network
ETS 300132-2, September 1996
Overcurrent
protection
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Power supply - ViBE CP6100

AC Power Supply)
Table A-5. AC Power Supply specifications - CP6100
Standards
Title
Mains voltage
Mains type
50 - 60 Hz
Max. input current
1.5A - 0.9A
Inrush current
Network
connection
Type A device connected with a non-industrial CEI 60320

compliant plug.
Earthing
arrangement
TN/TT
Isolation class
Installation
category
II
Overcurrent
protection
Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

309
Power Consumption
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 chassis are designed to operate at high power

to account for future upgrades. The maximum power required is:
CP6000 chassis: 340 W (primary at 240VAC) or 325 W (primary at

48VDC)
CP6100 chassis: 150 W (primary at 240VAC)
The maximum power required (primary) for the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
depends on the chassis configuration:
Table A-6. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Power Consumption
Power Consumption
(at 240VAC and 20C)
Power Consumption
(at 48VDC and 20C)
CP6000 without MPEG or

Modulator board
50 W
(170 BTU/hour)
30 W
(102 BTU/hour)
CP6100 without MPEG or

Modulator board
50 W
(170 BTU/hour)
One MPEG board
50 W
(170 BTU/hour)
50W
(170 BTU/hour)
One Modulator board
25 W
(85 BTU/hour)
25W
(85 BTU/hour)
CP6000 fully equipped with

4 MPEG boards
250 W
(852 BTU/hour)
230 W
(784 BTU/hour)
CP6000 fully equipped with

2 MPEG boards
150 W
(852 BTU/hour)
Item
If a ViBE CP6000 is equipped with 2 power supplies, the required power

is divided between the 2 power supplies.
310
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Mechanical Features
Dimensions
ViBE CP6000
ViBE CP6000 1st version
The first version of the ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform is a 1RU/19

device with the following specific Height/Width/Depth dimensions:
44.2 mm/440.4 mm/501.6 mm (+ 38.6 mm for front panel)
1.74/17.34/19.74 (+ 1.52 for front panel)
Figure A-1. ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform dimensions, 1st version
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

311
ViBE CP6000 2nd version
The second version of the ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform is a

1RU/19 device with the following specific Height/Width/Depth
dimensions:
44 mm/440.4 mm/492 mm (+ 38.6 mm for front panel)
1.74/17.34/19.74 (+ 1.52 for front panel)
Figure A-2. ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform dimensions, 2nd version
440,4
Thread M4
depht 6mm max.
134
44,1
32,9
44
34
38,6
224
35,2
303,5
492
36
483
312
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

ViBE CP6100
The ViBE CP6100 Contribution Platform is a 1RU/ 19 width device with
the following specific Height/Width/Depth dimensions:
44 mm/223 mm/416 mm
1.73/8.77/16.38
Figure A-3. ViBE CP6100 Contribution Platform dimensions
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

313
Weight
Table A-7. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform weight
Weight (Kg)
per unit
Item
CP6000 Base system (with no MPEG or Modulator board)
CP6000-1U-AC (single PS 110-220 VAC)
CP6000-1U-2AC (dual PS 110-220 VAC)
CP6000-1U-1DC (single PS 48 VDC)
CP6000-1U-2DC (dual PS 48 VDC)
CP6000-1U-ACDC (dual PS 110-220 VAC/48 VDC)
6.4 kg (14.10 lbs)

6.9 kg (15.22 lbs)
6.4 kg (14.10 lbs)
6.9 kg (15.22 lbs)
6.9 kg (15.22 lbs)
CP6100 Base system (with no MPEG or Modulator board)

CP6100-HU-AC
3.35 kg (7.4 lbs)
MPEG board
0.35 kg (0.77 lbs)
Modulator board
0.4 kg (1.10 lbs)
Blank panel (mask plate)
0.1 kg (0.22 lbs)
List of accessories delivered with the device

Cardboard packing box + CD-ROM + Quick Start guide
One Power cable if any
2.97 kg (6.55 lbs)

0.15 kg (0.33 lbs)
Example: the weight of a fully equipped platform CP6000-1U-2AC + 4

MPEG boards in its cartoon packing box + accessories + 2 cables is 11.6 kg
(25.6 lbs).
Miscellaneous
MPEG and Modulator boards are hot pluggable.
314
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Ventilation
CP6000
Table A-8. ViBE CP6000 Platform ventilation
Built-in ventilation
system
Description and Value
Ventilation
Air circulated from right to left (as seen from front)
Ventilated air flow
80 to 160 m3/h according to the ambient

temperature (and also the number of boards)
Figure A-4. ViBE CP6000 - Cooling air flow
Air in
Air out
CP6100
Table A-9. ViBE CP6100 Contribution Platform ventilation
Built-in ventilation
system
Description and Value
Ventilation
Air circulated from front to rear
Ventilated air flow
36 m3/h max according to the ambient

temperature (and also the number of boards)
Figure A-5. ViBE CP6100 - Cooling air flow
Air out
Air in
Certain precautions should be observed when mounting the device

in a rack. Refer to section Mounting in Rack on page 32.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

315
Reliability
FIT and MTBF stand for "Failures In Time" and "Mean Time Between
Failures" respectively.
Table A-10. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform FIT and MTBF
30C (86F)
Item
MTBF
(hours)
FIT
CP6000 Base system fully
equipped with 4 MPEG boards
CP6000-1U-AC
(single PS 110-220 VAC)
CP6000-1U-2AC
(dual PS 110-220 VAC)
CP6000-1U-DC
(single PS 48 VDC)
CP6000-1U-2DC
(dual PS 48 VDC)
CP6000-1U-ACDC
(dual PS 110-220 VAC/48 VDC)
40C (104F)
MTBF
(hours)
FIT
13753
72714
16285
61370
13236
75551
15778
63379
17203
58129
19745
50646
15536
64365
18078
55315
13647
73278
16189
61772
CP6100 Base system fully

equipped with 2 MPEG boards
CP6100-HU-AC
(single PS 110-220 VAC)
8053
124185
9507
105191
MPEG board
2471
404694
2985
335008
Modulator board
4000
250000
CP6000 / CP6100 Boot phase duration

After Power ON or Reboot via the Web Browser, the duration of the
CP6000 / CP6100 boot phase is 2 min. 40 s.
After Reboot via the Web Browser, the duration of an MPEG board boot
phase is 1 min. 10 s.
316
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Appendix A Technical Specifications Chassis Specifications
Chassis Specifications
CP6000 Chassis
The ViBE CP6000 chassis is composed of:
1 fixed PSU or 2 fixed PSU mounted for 1 + 1 redundancy, with diodes,

not hot swappable.
Each PSU has an attached fan and an attached power inlet.
When two PSUs are present, they share the overall chassis
consumption in normal mode. If one PSU fails, the other will supply
the whole chassis.
4 slots that can contain MPEG or Modulator boards.
1 backplane compatible with AMC standard.
A front panel with LCD and keypad.
A not extractable Manager board equipped with 2 Ethernet Ports, 1

Control Command port, 1 Sync interface, 1 GPIO interface and 1
terminal interface.
A fan unit.
CP6100 Chassis
The ViBE CP6100 chassis is composed of:
1 fixed, non-hot swap PSU.
2 slots that can contain MPEG or Modulator boards (1 Modulator

board max per chassis).
1 backplane compatible with AMC standard.
A front panel with LCD and keypad.
A not extractable Manager board equipped with 1 Control Command

port and 1 terminal interface.
A fan unit.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

317
Appendix A Technical Specifications Manager Board Specifications
Manager Board Specifications

Processing
The Manager board provides Configuration, Monitoring and

Diagnostics through:
Web GUI for configuration management and current state

browsing (ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms host a
Web server)
MediaFlexSUITE management
SNMP agent for alarm, statistics & monitoring collection, and

alarm traps. SNMP supported protocol version is V2c
Command Line Interface (CLI) accessible via a terminal port or

Telnet for configuration and current state browsing and
debugging
The Manager board manages the MPEG and Modulator boards:
It detects occupied slots.
It detects MPEG or Modulator board plug in. Board plug in is

dynamically managed: detection does not require a product
reboot.
It enables board power up then loads the board specific code

containing the board management resource and Encoder or
Decoder application.
The Manager board manages the IP datagrams (ViBE CP6000 only):
It aggregates the IP datagrams coming from each processing

modules.
It distributes the IP datagrams requested by each processing

modules.
Use of the LAN 1/LAN 2 interfaces of an MPEG board and the
Ethernet interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive.
LAN1/LAN2 interfaces can also be used to process TS over IP and to
Control & Command the device from the same port.
318
The Manager board stores Configuration, log and firmware files.

Up to 16 configurations can be stored in the Manager board.
The Manager board stores alarms in a database.

Up to 2000 alarms can be stored in the Manager board.
The alarms can be Active alarms or Closed alarms.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Interfaces
Table A-11. Manager board connectors and LEDs
Connector
Description
CP6000 Manager board Interfaces (1st version)

SYN
PPS
TERM
CP6100 Manager board Interfaces
C&C
LEDs
LED
C&C
TER
SYN
PPS
LAN 1
LAN 1
LAN 2
GPIO
GPIO
LAN 2
C&C
Term
CP6000 Manager board Interfaces (2nd version)

GPIO
SYNC
GPIO
STAT
LAN 1
LAN 2
SYNC
STAT
C&C
TER
LAN 1
LAN 2
TERM
C&C
Chassis LEDs
(CP6000 1st version)
Green LED on: There is no chassis alarm.

Red LED on: There is at least one critical or major alarm.
Green LED off and Red LED off: The chassis is not powered.
Blue LED on: The chassis is rebooting.
Chassis STAT (status)

(CP6000 2nd version)
Green: There is no chassis alarm.

Red: There is at least one critical or major alarm.
Orange: The chassis is rebooting.
SYN
Reference input for synchronization (Genlock). The signal is

common to the device.
Genlock signal could be:
SD: NTSC or PAL black burst as per ITU-R BT1700.
HD Tri-Level Sync as per SMPTE-274M for 1080 and as per
SMPTE-296M for 720.
(CP6000, 1st version)
SYNC
(CP6000, 2nd version)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Reference input/output for synchronization (Genlock). The

signal is common to the device. A 75 ohms termination must be
connected at the end of the Genlock signal distribution chain.
Genlock signal could be:
SD: NTSC or PAL black burst as per ITU-R BT1700.
HD Tri-Level Sync as per SMPTE-274M for 1080 and as per
SMPTE-296M for 720.
319
Connector
Description
PPS
(CP6000, 1st version)
Pulse Per Second input for connecting a GPS receiver. This

feature is not supported in the current release (v04.10).
TER
(CP6000 1st and 2nd
versions & CP6100)
Maintenance port (for qualified service personnel only).
C&C
(Control & Command)
(CP6000 1st and 2nd
versions & CP6100)
Purpose:
Ethernet link for device Configuration, Monitoring and
Diagnostics.
Features:
Type: IEEE 802.3 1000-BaseT
Connector: RJ45
Pinout:
Pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Name
TDP (Transmitted Data +)
TDN (Transmitted Data -)
RDP (Received Data +)
Not connected
Not connected
RDN (Received Data -)
Not connected
Not connected
Transmit LED (Yellow)

Yellow solid
Link/Activity LED
(Green/Orange)
Status
Transmit (Tx) on
Status
Off
No link
Green solid
1000Mbps - No Activity
Green blinking
1000Mbps - Activity
Orange solid
100Mbps - No Activity
Orange blinking
100Mbps - Activity
Mixed Green/Orange solid 10Mbps - No Activity
Mixed Green/Orange
10Mbps - Activity
blinking
320
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Connector
LAN 1 and LAN 2
(CP6000 1st and 2nd
versions)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Description
Purpose:
Electrical Gigabit Ethernet interface for MPEG compressed
stream input / output over IP.
Pinout and LEDs:
Refer to Table A-11 Manager board connectors and LEDs
on page 319.
Characteristics:
Standard: 1 Gbps
Operating mode: Half/Full (autonegotiation)
Auto-crossover mechanism
Input Impedance: 110
Cabling: 2 twisted pairs, category STP5 or FTP5, AWG
gauge 24, shielded cable
EMC and security: according to IEEE 802.3-2002
Permissible output jitter: according to IEEE 802.3-2002
Input jitter tolerance: according to IEEE 802.3-2002
IP Adaptation
MAC Layer: Compliant with IEEE 802.3-2002
Unicast and Multicast transfer modes
Protocol: IPv4
Destination IP @ can be statically set by the User
Routing: One default gateway and four static routes can
be set
Encapsulation
- MPEG/UDP/IP or MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP
- From 1 to 7 MPEG packets per IP frame
- Compliant with SMPTE 2022-2
VLAN tagging management
- VLAN tag compliant with IEEE 802.1q
- VLAN Id value: 50 to 4094
- Up to 16 VLANs per board
FEC
Forward Error Correction for transmission reliability
(FEC compliant with SMPTE 2022-1, FEC type Annex B).
2 FEC configuration modes are available:
- Basic mode with 3 protection profiles:
- Low: correction of 5 consecutive lost IP frames.
1D column FEC L = 5, D = 20, interleaving = 20.
Overhead = 1/D = 5%
- Medium: correction of 10 consecutive lost IP frames.
Overhead = 1/D = 10%
- High: correction of 20 consecutive lost IP frames. 1D
- Expert mode: The User can set the L and D
Latency: Refer to section IP Network Adaptation
Latency on page 336.
321
Connector
GPIO
(CP6000 1st and 2nd
versions)
Description
Purpose:
GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output) connector.
Connector: MICROFIT MOLEX RIGHT ANGLE 43045-1200
Pinout:
9 10 11 12
Refer to Figure Interfaces on page 319.

Pin
Name
Characteristics
number
1
BS Common
2
BS Relay Inactive Switched:
24 VDC or 24 VAC (110 VDC,
125 VAC max)
0.5 A (1 A max)
3
GPOUT_1
Output High voltage: 3.3 V
Output Low voltage: 0.1 V
4
GPIN_2
Input Low voltage: 1.1 V
Input High voltage: 5 V
Max input voltage: 12 V
5
GPIN_0
Refer to GPIN_2
6
GND
7
BS Relay Active Switched:
24VDC or 24VAC (110VDC,
125VAC max)
0.5 A (1A max)
8
GPOUT_0
Refer to GPOUT_1
9
GPIN_3
Refer to GPIN_2
10
GPIN_1
Refer to GPIN_2
11
P3V3_Out or
Max: 500mA
P12V Out
Max: 200mA
12
GND
322
Alarm signaling:
BS Relay Active activated indicates Critical alarms
GPOUT_0 activated indicates Major alarms
GPOUT_1 activated indicates Minor alarms or a warning
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Figure A-6. CP6000 - GPIO Interface diagram
GPO_ALIM 3V3_12V
Software CDE
4
7
GPIO
Connector
P3V3
0.5A
3V
P3V3
REVISION=A
SOP6-600-1
P3V3
P12V
REVISION=A
P3V3
CDE_GP_OUT1
REVISION=A
332
REVISION=A
220
12
REVISION=A
0.2A
REVISION=A
SOIC8
REVISION=A
F720
1
REVISION=A
OPTO1
220
REVISION=A
P3V3
CDE_GP_OUT0
REVISION=A
332
SOIC8
6
5
F725
3
REVISION=A
220
REVISION=A
BS_RELAY_INACTIVE
BS_RELAY_ACTIVE
P3V3
REVISION=A
470
4.7K
BS_COMMON
REVISION=A
P3V3
+
3V
3
1K
1%
ILD223
REVISION=A
SOIC8
F730
1
REVISION=A
220
REVISION=A
1%
5
10
4
9
3
8
2
7
8
2
4
7
0.5A
OUT
GP_OUT0
GP_IN1
REVISION=A
GP_IN3
GP_OUT1
0.2A
REVISION=A
400PF
14V
GPIO_GP_IN2
0.2A
GP_IN2
11
REVISION=A
OPTO1
REVISION=A
REVISION=A
OUT
220
REVISION=A
ILD223
REVISION=A
REVISION=A
GP_IN1
REVISION=A
GPIO_GP_IN1
CDE_BS
GP_IN0
P3V3
SOP6-600-1
P3V3
GP_IN0
0.2A
REVISION=A
400PF
14V
1K
1%
4
REVISION=A
OUT
0.2A
ILD223
REVISION=A
GPIO_GP_IN0
1K
1%
GPO_ALIM
REVISION=A
GP_IN2
0.2A
400PF
14V
REVISION=A
REVISION=A
P3V3
GPIO_GP_IN3
OUT
1K
1%
ILD223
SOIC8
REVISION=A
6
5
F735
3
REVISION=A
220
REVISION=A
GP_IN3
0.2A
400PF
14V
REVISION=A
REVISION=A
TS over IP and Control Command on Same Port

LAN 1 and LAN 2 interfaces can be used to carry the TS signal and
control the equipment at the same time. In this case TS over IP and C&C
share the same link but C&C is not included in the TS.
Figure A-7. CP6000 - TS Over IP and Control Command on Same Port configuration
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

323
License management
Licensing is based on the codec used.
If an application focuses on MPEG-2 SD 4:2:0, it will require the

corresponding license (at least CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP2SD-420 license
for the encoder and CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP2SD-420 license for the
decoder)
If an application focuses on MPEG-4 SD 4:2:2, it will require the

corresponding license (at least CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP4SD-422 license
for the encoder and CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP4SD-422 license for the
decoder)
A license can include several Formats / Standards / Video profiles as

indicated in the table below:
Table A-12. Profiles inclusion where xxx= ENC for encoder and DEC for decoder
Formats, Standards & Video Profiles
Code
MPEG-2
SD
4:2:0
MPEG-4 AVC
HD
4:2:2
4:2:0
SD
4:2:2
4:2:0
8 bits
HD
4:2:2
8 bits
4:2:0
8 bits
4:2:2
8 bits
CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP2SD-420
CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP2HD-420
CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP4HD-8b
CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP4HD-10b
4:2:2
10 bits
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
This means that if an application focuses on MPEG-4 SD 4:2:2 8 bits

at a given time and MPEG-4 HD 4:2:2 8 bits at another time, only
CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP4HD-8b license for the encoder and
CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP4HD-8b license for the decoder will be required
to satisfy both needs (at different times).
324
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Licenses are managed as a collection attached to the rack. License is

dynamically allocated to a particular channel when an MPEG board is
configured.
This license management method allows having a low spare cost,
because of licenses are not attached to the spare boards. Coupled with
the unique type of board, it allows to have a very flexible equipment.
Each MPEG board can be configured as an encoder or a decoder at
runtime. The requested licenses are allocated according to the
configuration. They are attached to the slots the MPEG boards are
attached to and not to the MPEG boards themselves.
Figure A-8. License management - Licenses are managed as a collection attached to the
rack.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

325
The diagram below shows a ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform used for
3 encoding channels and 1 decoding channel. The rack includes 3 MPEG
boards without audio interface.
Each of the two first encoders (in the first MPEG board) encodes two
MPEG-1 Layer II stereo channels. Two MPEG-1 Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC
stereo audios licenses are included in each video license.
The third encoder in the second MPEG board encodes 4 audio MPEG-1
Layer II stereo channels. It requires two additional audio stereo
licenses.
The decoder in the third MPEG board is using the MPEG-4 SD 4:2:0
decoding license so the MPEG-4 SD/HD decoding license is not used
in this example.
Figure A-9. License management - Example

.
326
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications
MPEG Encoder Specifications

An MPEG Encoder is the combination of one MPEG board and one
encoding software. There are 2 types of MPEG board:
The Dual Channels MPEG board:

This MPEG board can encode up to 2 channels SD or HD.
The Single Channel MPEG board:

This MPEG board can encode 1 channel SD or HD. It is fitted with an
audio connector.
Encoder Block Diagram

Dual Channels MPEG Encoder Board
A Dual Channels MPEG Encoder board is fitted with 5 IO interfaces (IO1
to IO5) and 2 LAN interfaces.
The IO1 and IO3 interfaces are the nominal inputs of the encoding
channel 1 and channel 2.
The IO2 and IO4 interfaces can be configured as SDI backup inputs of the
encoding channel 1 and channel 2 or as ASI outputs.
The IO5 interface can be configured as ASI output or as ASI input (ASI to
IP gateway feature).
ASI outputs are not assigned to a dedicated encoding channel. SPTS or
MPTS can be delivered on those outputs.
The LAN1 and LAN2 interfaces are the IP outputs of the encoding channel
1 and channel 2.
Figure A-10. Dual Channels MPEG Encoder board block diagram
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

327
Single Channel MPEG Encoder Board

A Single Channel MPEG Encoder board is fitted with 3 IO interfaces (IO1,
IO2 and IO5), 1 audio interface and 2 LAN interfaces.
The IO1 interface is the nominal input of the encoding channel.
The IO2 interface can be configured as SDI backup input of the encoding
channel or as ASI output.
The IO5 interface is can be configured as ASI output or ASI input (ASI to
IP gateway feature).
The audio interface can be configured as analog or digital audio inputs.
The LAN1 and LAN2 interfaces are the IP outputs of the encoding
channel.
Figure A-11. Single Channel MPEG Encoder board block diagram
328
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Interface Specifications
Table A-13. MPEG Encoder board interface specifications
Connector
Description
Dual channels MPEG board
LAN 1
MPEG
IO1
SDI input
main
IO2
SDI input
backup or
ASI output
Encoder 1
IO3
SDI input
main
IO4
SDI input
backup or
ASI output
LAN 2
IO5
Ethernet 1
output
ASI input
or
ASI output
Ethernet 2
output
Encoder 2
Single channel MPEG board

LAN 1
Audio
MPEG
IO1
Audio inputs
LED
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

SDI input
main
IO2
SDI input
backup or
ASI output
LAN 2
IO5
ASI input
or
ASI output
Ethernet 1
output
Ethernet 2
output
Red LED on: The board is powered up and there is at least one
board alarm.
Red LED off: The board is not powered or there is no board
alarm.
329
Connector
Single channel MPEG board:
Audio
Description
Purpose:
Analog or digital audio inputs
Connector: SUBD-HD26 female
Pinout:
Digital mode
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Clock GND
10 Clock Out
AES4 Out -
11 AES4 Out +
AES3 Out GND 12 AES3 Out -
AES2 Out -
AES4 In -
15 AES4 In +
23 AES4 In GND
AES3 In GND
16 AES3 In -
24 AES3 In +
AES2 In -
17 AES2 In +
25 AES2 In GND
AES1 In GND
18 AES1 In -
26 AES1 In +
13 AES2 Out +
19 AES4 Out GND

20 AES3 Out +
21 AES2 Out GND
22 AES1 Out +
Note: The shaded pins are not used in encoder mode.

Analog mode
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Signal
Clock GND
Right Ch2
Out Left Ch2
Out GND
Right Ch1
Out Left Ch1
Out GND
Right Ch2
In Left Ch2
In GND
Right Ch1
In Left Ch1
In GND
Pin
Signal
10 Clock Out
Right Ch2
11
Out +
Left Ch2
12
Out Right Ch1
13
Out +
Left Ch1
14
Out Right Ch2
15
In +
Left Ch2
16
In Right Ch1
17
In +
Left Ch1
18
In -
Pin
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Signal
Right Ch2
Out GND
Left Ch2
Out +
Right Ch1
Out GND
Left Ch1
Out +
Right Ch2
In GND
Left Ch2
In +
Right Ch1
In GND
Left Ch1
In +
Note: The shaded pins are not used in encoder mode.

A breakout cable can be fitted as an option. Refer to section
Audio Breakout Cable on page 402.
330
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Connector
Audio
(continued)
Description
Specifications:
In Digital mode
4 balanced AES inputs:

Digital audio input signal: AES-2003, Tech 3250-E
Input impedance: 110 20%
Input return loss: > 20 dB (100 kHz-128FS)
Differential voltage range: 200 mV to 10 V p to p
Commons mode range: 10 V, 50 to 20 kHz
Supported frequency: 32, 44.1, 48, 96 kHz
Supported sample width: 16, 20, 24 bits
1 AES/EBU (48 kHz) output for synchronizing an external
audio encoder
In Analog mode
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

2 balanced analog stereo inputs:

Analog Audio input
- Input impedance: > 22 k 20%
- Level for full-scale output: 0 to + 24 dBu adjustable in 1
dBu step
- Common mode input voltage: 20 V max
- Differential DC: 0.25 V max
- Common mode rejection ratio: > 72 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Analog Audio input conversion performance
- Sampling rate: 48 kHz synchronized with the video
clock
- Signal to noise ratio: > 102 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz, > 105 dB
A weighted @ 24 dBu
- THD + noise: < -75 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
- Inter channel crosstalk: < -95 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
- Inter channel gain mismatch: < 0.2 dB
- Inter channel phase mismatch: < 1
- Inter modulation distortion: < -100 dB CCIF two-tone
test, 19 & 20 kHz tones
- Frequency response: 0.1 dB relative to 1 kHz, 20 Hz
to 20 kHz
- DC offset: 1 mV
- Emphasis: No pre-emphasis or de-emphasis
- Output resolution: 20 bits
- Effective number of bits: 17 bits
331
Connector
Dual channels MPEG board:
IO1 - IO3
IO1 only
Description
332
Purpose:
SDI/SD-SDI/HD main inputs for each encoding channel:
IO1 : Nominal input for encoding channel 1
IO3 : Nominal input for encoding channel 2
Characteristics:
Connector: BNC 75
Standard compliance:
SMPTE 259M/292M/424M/272M/ITU-BT-601
Input signal level: 800 mVp-p 10% max
Return loss: -17 dB from 5 MHz to 1.5 GHz and -13 dB
from 1.5 GHz to 3.0 GHz
Tolerated input jitter: Compliant with SMPTE 259M,
SMPTE 292M and DVB ASI
The SDI input interface supports the following cable length
depending of the input format
380 m of Belden 1694A cable for SD-SDI (270Mb/s)
180 m of Belden 1694A cable for HD-SDI (1.5Gb/s)
120 m of Belden 1694A cable for HD-SDI (3.0 Gb/s)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Connector
IO2 - IO4
Description

IO2 only
IO connectors configured as SDI inputs:

Purpose:
SDI/SD-SDI/HD backup inputs for each encoding channel:
- IO2 : Backup input for encoding channel 1
- IO4 : Backup input for encoding channel 2
Characteristics:
- Connector: BNC 75
- Standard compliance:
SMPTE 259M/292M/424M/272M/ITU-BT-601
- Input signal level: 800 mVp-p 10% max
- Return loss: -17 dB from 5 MHz to 1.5 GHz and -13 dB
from 1.5 GHz to 3.0 GHz
- Tolerated input jitter: Compliant with SMPTE 259M,
The SDI input interface supports the following cable
length depending of the input format
- 380 m of Belden 1694A cable for SD-SDI (270 Mb/s)
- 180 m of Belden 1694A cable for HD-SDI (1.5 Gb/s)
- 120 m of Belden 1694A cable for HD-SDI (3.0 Gb/s)
IO connectors configured as ASI outputs:
Purpose:
IO2 and IO4 provide the encoded TS from channels 1 and
2.
Characteristics:
- Connector : Female 75BNC
- TS output compliant with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB PI)
- ASI Bitrate : 270 Mbit/s
- TS bitrate: 213 Mbit/s max
- MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS
- TS packet size: 188 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes
- Mode: Data burst or Data packet
IO2 and IO4 can not be configured as ASI outputs
if the SDI Input Redundancy feature is used. Refer
to section SDI input redundancy on page 349.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

333
Connector
and Single channel MPEG
board:
IO5
Description
Purpose:
IO5 provides the encoded TS.
Characteristics:
Connector: Female 75BNC
TS output compliant with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB PI)
ASI bitrate: 270 Mbit/s
TS bitrate: 213 Mbit/s max
MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS
TS packet size: 188 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes
Mode: Data burst or Data packet
- IO5 can be used as ASI input to add an external

component to a service. Refer to section ASI Input
for external components on page 351.
- If the ASI to IP gateway optional feature is used,
IO5 is the ASI input. Refer to section ASI to IP
Gateway on page 352.
334
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Connector
LAN 1 and LAN 2
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Description
Purpose:
Electrical Gigabit Ethernet interface for MPEG compressed
stream output over IP which can be an SPTS or MPTS. Both
LAN are active simultaneously.
The IP streams of the MPEG board can be routed to the
LAN 1/LAN 2 interfaces of the Manager board. The use of the
LAN 1/LAN 2 interfaces of the MPEG board and the LAN
interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive.
Pinout and LEDs: Refer to Table A-11 Manager board
connectors and LEDs on page 319.
Characteristics:
Standard: 100/1000 Mbps (autosensing)
IP Adaptation
MAC Layer: Compliant with IEEE 802.3-2002
Unicast and Multicast transfer modes
Protocol: IPv4
Destination IP @ can be statically set by the User
Routing: One default gateway and four static routes can
be set
Encapsulation
- MPEG/UDP/IP or MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP.
- From 1 to 7 MPEG packets per IP frame
- Compliant with SMPTE 2022-2
- Up to 4 VLANs (1 per IP Tx) per board
FEC
Forward Error Correction for transmission reliability (FEC
compliant with SMPTE 2022-1, FEC type Annex B).
2 FEC configuration modes are available:
- Basic mode with 3 protection profiles:
- Low: Correction of 5 consecutive lost IP frames.
Overhead = 1/D = 5%
- Medium: Correction of 10 consecutive lost IP frames.
- High: Correction of 20 consecutive lost IP frames. FEC
- Expert mode: The User can set the L and D values
Latency: Refer to section IP Network Adaptation
Latency on page 336.
335
IP Network Adaptation Latency

Sources of latency are:
FEC calculation delay in transmitter
Reordering
FEC packet loss recovery
Jitter absorption delay
End-to-end delay introduced by FEC processing

The end-to-end delay introduced by FEC processing (including
reordering) varies with TS rate. When the frame size is set to n
packets/frame, the time delay (expressed in milliseconds) is:
32 + 2LD n 188 8
EndtoEndDelayForFEC = --------------------------------------------------------------------- TSRateInKbitPerSecond
L is the number of columns and D is the number of rows of the FEC
matrix.
Delay introduced by reordering
The equivalent delay when not using FEC processing only includes
reordering: R frames (where R = 10 in the CP6000). When the frame size
is set to n packets/frame, this produces a time delay (expressed in
milliseconds) of:
R n 188 8
DelayForReordering = --------------------------------------------------------------------- TSRateInKbitPerSecond
Delay introduced by jitter absorption
The delay introduced by jitter absorption does not change with TS rate.
IPDVInMilliseconds is the IP absorption buffer. Delay introduced by jitter
absorption (expressed in milliseconds) is:
8 IPDVInMilliseconds
DelayForJitterAbsorption = ---------------------------------------------------------------- + 3milli sec onds
7
Total end-to-end delay
The total end-to-end delay is equal to
336
EndtoEndDelayForFEC
processing is enabled.
DelayForReordering + DelayForJitterAbsorption when FEC processing

is disabled.
DelayForJitterAbsorption
when
FEC
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

1st Example: End-to-End Delay with FEC processing Tx + Rx

where
Number of packets per IP Packet is n = 7
Number of rows in the FEC matrix is D = 10
Number of columns in the FEC matrix is L = 10
Transport Stream Bitrate is TSRateInKbitPerSecond = 40 000 kbps
IP absorption buffer is IPDVInMilliseconds = 20 ms
Reordering buffer size is R = 10 IP frames
32 + 2 10 10 7 188 8
EndtoEndDelayForFEC = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- = 61milli sec onds
40000
8 20
DelayForJitterAbsorption = --------------- + 3 = 26milli sec onds
7
The total end-to-end delay is equal to 61 ms + 26 ms = 87 ms
2nd Example: End-to-End Delay without FEC processing
where
Number of packets per IP Packet is n = 7
Transport Stream Bitrate is TSRateInKbitPerSecond = 40 000 kbps
IP absorption buffer is IPDVInMilliseconds = 20 ms
Reordering buffer size is R = 10 IP frames
10 7 188 8
DelayForReordering = --------------------------------------- = 3milli sec onds
40000
8 20
DelayForJitterAbsorption = --------------- + 3 = 26milli sec onds
7
The total end-to-end delay is equal to 3 ms + 26 ms = 29 ms
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

337
MPEG system layer

Table A-14. MPEG system layer specifications
Parameter
System layer
Description
Additional service component

formats
(VBI, ANC data)
DVB compliant ETSI TS 101 154 v1.8.1
Signaling
DVB Signaling
MPEG TS number
Per MPEG encoder board

1 MPTS (Channel 1 and Channel 2) and 2 SPTS
(Channel 1 / Channel 2)
1 SPTS
MPEG TS bitrate
256 kbit/s to 400 Mbit/s per TS in 1 kbit/s

increments. The bitrate can be set manually or
computing automatically by the Encoder (s) or the
Modulator connected to the TS.
Multiplexing
The following components are multiplexed:

Video
Audio
VBI
Signaling
Component PID allocation
PSI/SI rule compliant

In compliance with WBU_ISOG recommendation,
a PID is automatically allocated to a component by
the encoder but it can be set manually.
Number of services and

components generated
338
MPEG-4: ISO/IEC 13818-1 & Amendment 3:

Transport of AVC video data over ITU-T Rec
H.222.0 compliant
MPEG-2: ISO/IEC 13818-1
Services: Up to 2 per encoding channel

Video component: 1 per encoding channel
Audio components: Up to 8 per encoding
channel
Ancillary component: Up to 2 per encoding
channel
VBI component (SD Video Encoding): Up to 4
per encoding channel
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Video Processing
Input video encoding formats
Table A-15. Input video encoding formats
Frame Rate (Fps)
Vertical Resolution
Horizontal Resolution
25 / 29.97 / 30
1080i
1920
50 / 59.94 / 60
720p
1280
25
576i
720
29.97
480i
720
Horizontal Picture Rescaling

The Horizontal Picture Rescaling feature is used to manage very low
encoding rates. It consists of activating a low pass filter to reduce the
number of active pixels per line according to the input format.
Horizontal Picture Rescaling can be set by the User.
Table A-16. Horizontal Picture Rescaling
Input Formats
Available Horizontal Resolutions
1920 x 1080i
1920, 1440, 1280, 960
1280 x 720p
1280, 960, 640
720 x 576i
720, 704, 640, 544, 528, 480, 352
720 x 480i
720, 704, 640, 544, 528, 480, 352
Picture Filtering
The Picture Filtering feature is used to manage very low encoding rates.
It consists of decreasing picture complexity by activating a filter to
reduce the high frequency spatial texture.
Picture Filtering can be set to None, Weak or Strong by the User.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

339
Video processing
Table A-17. MPEG-2, Video Encoding Profiles /Levels
Video Format
MPEG- 2 Profile
MPEG-2 SD
MPEG-2 HD
4:2:0, 8 bits, MP
MP@ML
MP@HL
4:2:0, 8 bits, HP
HP@ML
HP@HL
4:2:0, 8 bits, 422P
422P@ML
422P@HL
4:2:2, 8 bits, 422P
422P@ML
422P@HL
Table A-18. MPEG-4 (H264), Video Encoding Profiles /Levels
Video Format
MPEG-4
(H264) Profile
340
MPEG-4 (H264)
SD
MPEG-4 (H264)
720P
MPEG-4 (H264)
1080i
4:2:0, 8 bits,
CBP
CBP@L3.0 (< 10 Mbit/s)

CBP@L3.1 (> 10 Mbit/s,
< 14 Mbit/s)
< 20 Mbit/s)
CBP@L3.2 (< 20 Mbit/s)

< 50 Mbits)
4:2:0, 8 bits,
MP
MP@L3.0 (< 10 Mbit/s)

MP@L3.1 (> 10 Mbit/s,
< 14 Mbit/s)
MP@L3.2 (> 14 Mbit/s,
< 20 Mbit/s)
MP@L3.2 (< 20Mbit/s)

MP@L4.1 (> 20 Mbit/s,
< 50 Mbits)
MP@L4.0 ( <20 Mbits)

MP@L4.1 (>20 Mbits,
< 50 Mbits)
4:2:0, 8 bits,
HiP
HIP@L3.0 (< 12.5 Mbit/s)

HIP@L3.1 (> 12.5 Mbit/s,
< 17.5 Mbit/s)
HIP@L3.2 (> 17.5 Mbit/s,
< 25 Mbit/s)
HIP@L3.2 (< 25Mbit/s)

HIP@L4.1 (> 25 Mbit/s,
< 62.5 Mbits)
HiP@L4.0 ( <25 Mbits)

HiP@L4.1 ( >25 Mbits,
< 62.5 Mbits)
4:2:0, 10 bits,
Hi10P
HI10P@L3.0 (< 30 Mbit/s)

HI10P@L3.1 (> 30 Mbit/s,
<42 Mbit/s)
HI10P@L3.2 (> 42 Mbit/s,
<60 Mbit/s)
HI10P@L3.2 (< 60 Mbit/s)

HI10P@L4.1 (> 60 Mbit/s,
< 80 Mbits)
Hi10P@L4.0 ( <60
Mbits)
Hi10P@L4.1 ( >60
Mbits, < 80 Mbits)
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Table A-18. MPEG-4 (H264), Video Encoding Profiles /Levels
Video Format
MPEG-4
(H264) Profile
MPEG-4 (H264)
SD
MPEG-4 (H264)
720P
MPEG-4 (H264)
1080i
4:2:2, 8 bits,
Hi422P
HI422P@L3.0 (<40 M/bit/s) HI422P@L3.2 (< 80 Mbit/s)

HI422P@L3.1 (> 40 Mbit/s,
< 56 Mbit/s)
HI422P@L3.2 (> 56 Mbit/s,
<80 Mbit/s)
Hi422P@L4.0 ( <80
Mbits)
4:2:2, 10 bits,
Hi422P
HI422P@L3.0 (<40 M/bit/s) HI422P@L3.2 (< 80 Mbit/s)

HI422P@L3.1 (> 40 Mbit/s,
< 56 Mbit/s)
HI422P@L3.2 (> 56 Mbit/s,
< 80 Mbit/s)
Hi422P@L4.0 ( <80
Mbits)
Refer to section Video Profiles & Bitrates recommendations on page 403.

Table A-19. MPEG Encoder board, Video processing specifications
Parameter
Description
Video Bitrates
SD
HD
Min
Max
Min
(kbit/s) (kbit/s) (kbit/s)
Max
(kbit/s)
MPEG-4 4:2:0 8 bits
650
25000
650
62500
MPEG-4 4:2:0 10 bits
650
60000
650
80000
MPEG-4 4:2:2 8 bits
650
80000
650
80000
MPEG-4 4:2:2 10 bits
650
80000
650
80000
MPEG-2 4:2:0 8 bits
650
15000
650
80000
MPEG-2 4:2:2 8 bits
650
20000
650
80000
In 1 kbit/s steps. Refer to section Video Profiles & Bitrates

Video bitrate change is done without rebooting the encoder.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

341
Table A-19. MPEG Encoder board, Video processing specifications
Parameter
GOP
Description
GOP size: 1 N 300.

An automatic GOP size mode is available.
P picture period: 1 M 3.
An automatic P picture period mode is available.
Low Delay
Standard Delay
Auto
P (Continuous Decoder
Refresh) / Infinite
Auto I, B, P
frame / Infinite
I-Only
IP / lenght up to 300
IP / lenght up to 300
IBP
N/A
IBP / lenght up to 300
IBBP
N/A
IBBP / lenght up to 300
IBBBP
N/A
IBBBP / lenght up to 300
IP
Notes:
- I frame is systematically inserted on scene cut to optimize
video quality.
- Closed GOP mode is available: This mode is used to break
temporal dependency between GOPs.
Picture Structure
Standard Delay
Interlaced input standard: MBAFF (MPEG-4 only) / Field
Progressive input standard: Frame
Low Delay: Field
Entropy Coding
(MPEG-4)
CABAC, CAVLC
Miscellaneous
features
End to End Delay
Scene cut detection

Fade detection
If there is no input signal, the Encoder can automatically:
Generate a Black Pattern, Bar Pattern or Moving Color
Pattern or
Disable the service (service bitrate is null, there is no
signaling and the TS bitrate for this service is null) or
stop the video (video component bitrate is null,
signaling and all other components are present)
Two compression delays are available:

Standard Delay: 770ms (encoding delay: about 670 ms)
Low Delay: 270ms (encoding delay: about 170 ms)
Delays are fixed whatever codec or bitrate used.
* Encoding processing is always dual-pass whatever the
compression delay selected.
342
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Audio processing
Table A-20. MPEG Encoder board, Audio processing specifications
Parameter
Source
Description
Capabilities
A Video channel encodes:

(audio input = SDI):
Stereo (2.0) components: Up to 8 or
Surround (5.1) components: Up to 2 or
Mixed stereo (2.0) and surround (5.1)
components: Up to 2 (2.0) and 2 (5.1)
1 Dolby E / Uncompressed stream can be
transmitted instead of a stereo stream.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


Audio embedded in accordance with SMPTE 272M
is extracted from the SDI signal.
Audio
embedded in accordance with
SMPTE 272M is extracted from the SDI signal.
Analog Audio or Digital Audio from Audio
connector.
Single channel MPEG board):

Stereo (2.0) components: from SDI (up to 8) or
AES (up to 4) or Analog (up to 2) or
Surround (5.1) components: from SDI (up to 2)
or AES (up to 1) or
Mixed stereo (2.0) and surround (5.1)
components: from SDI (up to 2 (2.0) and 2 (5.1))
or AES (up to 1 (2.0) and 1 (5.1)).
1 Uncompressed stream can be transmitted instead
of a stereo stream from SDI or AES or Analog.
1 Dolby E stream can be transmitted instead of a
stereo stream from SDI or AES.
The mix of SDI, AES and Analog inputs is
authorized.
343
Parameter
Encoding formats and bitrates
344
Description
MPEG-1 Layer II
Mono (1.0) bitrate (kbit/s): 32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96,
112, 160, 192
Stereo (2.0) or Dual Channel bitrate (kbit/s): 64,
96, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320, 384
AAC-LC*
48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256,
320, 384
Surround (5.1) bitrate (kbit/s): 96, 112, 128, 160,
192, 224, 256, 320, 384, 448, 576, 640
HE-AAC*
48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192
Surround (5.1) bitrate (kbit/s): 96, 112, 128, 160,
192, 224, 256, 320, 384, 448, 576
HE-AAC v2*
Stereo (2.0) bitrate (kbit/s): 32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96
Dolby Digital (AC3) (option)
Stereo (2.0) bitrate (kbit/s): 96, 112, 128, 160,
192, 224, 256, 320, 384, 448, 576, 640
Surround (5.1) bitrate (kbit/s): 224, 256, 320,
384, 448, 576, 640
Uncompressed compliant with SMPTE 302M-2002
(16, 20 bits@48KHz modes)
Audio Pass-thru (for precompressed audio)
MPEG-1 Layer II (1.0, 2.0)
AAC-LC (2.0, 5.1)
HE-AAC (2.0, 5.1)
HE-AAC v2 (2.0)
Dolby E
Dolby Digital (AC3) (2.0, 5.1)
At the Encoder input, the audio signal must be
compliant with SMPTE 337M-2010.
* With MPEG-2 / MPEG-4 Syntax and ADTS / LOAS
Encapsulation
HE-AAC and HE-AAC v2 are not available in Low
Delay compression mode
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Parameter
Description
Audio Auto configuration
In Audio auto configuration mode the Audio encoder

detects the audio input format (PCM or
precompressed). The Operator sets an audio
configuration for PCM audio for each audio channel.
When PCM audio is detected the PCM audio encoding
parameters are applied to encode the audio, when
precompressed audio is detected Pass-thru mode is
used to encode it.
Supported precompressed formats:
AAC-LC (2.0, 5.1)
HE-AAC (2.0, 5.1)
HE-AAC v2 (2.0)
Dolby E
Miscellaneous features
Multi Audio Frame per PES mode in Standard End

to End Delay only.
This mode allows to reduce the audio PES bitrate
overhead. In the Multi Audio Frame mode:
Multiple Audio frames are transported in a

TS packet.
The number of audio frames in a PES payload

is not a integer value, it is between 8 and 9
The start of audio frame is not aligned with
frame header
The PTS refers to the first access unit
commencing in the PES packet
If there is no audio input signal, the Encoder will
generate an audio component containing a Sine
Tone (400 Hz or 1000 Hz) or silence.
Audio Delay can be set from -100 to 400 ms (step
1 ms) to adjust lipsync.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

345
VBI/ANC processing
VBI processing (SD Format)
Table A-21. SD VBI processing
Data
Teletext
Transparent
lines (Y + C)
VBI signal
Transport
Possible
lines
ETS 300 706

ETSI EN 300 472
DVB A056
ETSI EN 301 775
50 Hz only
from 6 to 22
from 319 to 335
DVB A056
ETSI EN 301 775
Monochrome
lines (Y)a
DVB A056
ETSI EN 301 775
VITC
(Time Code)b
IEC 60461
SMPTE 12M-1
ISO/IEC 14496-10
AFDc
(Active Format
Description)
First part of the SMPTE

RP186 Video Index
ETSI EN 101 154
WSS
ETS 300 294
Max. lines
processed
/ frame
50 Hz
from 6 to 22
from 319 to 335
59.94 Hz
from 10 to 21
from 273 to 284
50 Hz
from 6 to 22
from 319 to 335
59.94 Hz
from 10 to 21
from 273 to 284
32
50 Hz
from 6 to 22
from 319 to 335
59.94 Hz
from 10 to 21
from 273 to 284
50 Hz
11 and 324
59.94 Hz
14 and 277
1/2 line 23
16
59.94 Hz only
from 21 or 284
DVB A056
ETSI EN 301 775
346
VPS
ETS 300 231

ETSI EN 301 775
CC
(Closed caption)
EIA-608
ATSC A/53
Between CP6000 Encoder and Decoder only. Use the Transparent mode to transport Monochrome Lines.
Between CP6000 Encoder and Decoder only. Use the Transparent mode to transport VITC.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

- Aspect Ratio (4:3, 16:9): The User can select the Picture Format 4:3 or 16:9.
- Active Format Description (AFD) information: The User can select the source of the AFD information (Active
format (letter box ...) and Aspect Ratio (4:3, 16:9)) between incoming ancillary AFD (SMPTE 2016-3) or incoming
Video Index (SMPTE RP186).
- UK Video Index is supported.
VBI data can be sent by a maximum of 4 PIDs per encoding channel
ANC processing (SD and HD Format)

Table A-22. ANC processing
VBI signal
Transport
Data
Transparent mode
Specification
SMPTE 2038
All the VANC are transported in the
EN 301 775 Transport Stream.
SMPTE RDD-11
All the SDI HD ANC are transported in the
EN 301 775 Transport Stream.
OP47 Subtitles
SMPTE RDD-8
DID = 143h
EN 301 775 SDID = 102h
The OP-47 Subtitling Distribution Packet
(SDP) data is transported in a dedicated
PID.
Time Code (ATC)
SMPTE 12M-2
AFD/BARa
SMPTE 2016
DID = 41h
ETSI TS 101 54 SDID = 05h
CC
(Closed caption)
EIA 608
DID = 61h
ATSC A/53D SDID = 02h
DTVCC
(Digital Television
Closed caption)
EIA 708
DID = 61h
ATSC A/53D SDID = 01h
DID = 60h
SDID = 60h
- Aspect Ratio (4:3, 16:9): The User can select the Picture Format 4:3 or 16:9.
- Active Format Description (AFD) information: The User can select the source of the AFD information
(Active format (letter box ...) and Aspect Ratio (4:3, 16:9)) between incoming ancillary AFD (SMPTE 2016-3) or
incoming Video Index (SMPTE RP186).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

ANC data can be sent by a maximum of 2 PIDs per encoding

channel.
In the release 04.10 SDI HD ANC can be sent in RDD-11 format by
a maximum of 1 PID per encoding channel.
347
Automatic Encoding configuration

Automatic Encoding configuration according to the input video format
feature is available.
The SDI incoming format is automatically analyzed and the pre-defined
Encoding profile is automatically applied based on the detected input
format.
Encoding profile is included in each configuration (not global). This
implementation choice allows having self contained configuration that
can be applied to any equipment.
For example when an SDI HD 1080i signal is detected the HD 1080i profile
is applied automatically, and when the incoming signal changes from HD
1080i to SD 576i, the SD 576i profile is activated without user
intervention.The decoder automatically detects the new format and
changes accordingly without User intervention if encoding format does
not change when By PID mode is selected as Service selection mode
in the decoder.
The maximum number of profiles is 24.
Input formats supported:
720 x 576i @ 25 Hz, 720 x 576i @ 29.97 Hz
1920 x 1080i @ 25 Hz, 1920 x 1080i @ 29.97 Hz, 1920 x 1080i @ 30 Hz
1280 x 720p @ 50 Hz, 1280 x 720p @ 59.94 Hz, 1280 x 720p @ 60Hz
Figure A-12. Automatic Encoding configuration
348
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

SDI input redundancy

Automatic SDI input redundancy feature is available (1 nominal input
and 1 backup input per channel).
The Input backup mode can be selected between:
Auto Switchback on nominal faultless: When no signal is received on

the nominal SDI input, the input switches automatically to the backup
SDI input. When a signal is received on the nominal SDI Input, the
system switches automatically to this nominal input.
The time to switch from nominal SDI input to backup SDI input when
no signal is received can be set from 0 to 30 s.
The time to switch from backup SDI input to nominal SDI input when
a signal is received on the nominal SDI input can be set from 0 to 30 s.
Auto Switchback on redundant fault: When no stream is received on

the nominal SDI input, the input switches automatically to the backup
SDI input. The system stays on the backup SDI input until a redundant
fault occurs.
Figure A-13. Nominal and backup SDI inputs, SDI mode

LAN 1
Audio
MPEG
IO1
Nominal
SDI in
IO2
LAN 2
IO5
Backup
SDI in
SDI input redundancy feature is not available if IO2 / IO4 interfaces

are configured as ASI outputs.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

349
Scrambling
Scrambling is an optional feature. 1 option must be installed per MPEG
board and enable multiple services scrambling.
This feature is used for BISS mode 1 and BISS E scrambling:
BISS mode 1, DVB scrambling. The components are scrambled with a

fixed control word (CW) derived from an unscrambled session word
of 12 characters (SW). The Session Word is sent to the Encoder using
the Web Interface.
BISS E, DVB scrambling. The components are scrambled with a fixed

control word (CW) derived from a encrypted session word of 16
characters (ESW). This scrambling mode operates with a Injected ID
or an Buried ID (BISS E Buried mode):
BISS E Injected mode: The Injected ID (16 characters) is sent to

the Encoder using the Web Interface.
BISS E Buried mode: The Buried ID is set at the factory and can
not be changed or displayed. The Buried ID is the same for all
the CP6000 Encoders / Decoders.
The BISS E Buried scrambling mode should only be used
between CP6000 Encoders / Decoders.
When a service is scrambled, scrambling is performed on all the
service components.
350
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

ASI Input for external components

IO5 can be used as an ASI input to inject external components (eg DVB
Subtitle components).
These external components are added to the output services.
Figure A-14. ASI Input for external DVB Subtitle components
Table A-23. IO5 used as ASI input specifications
Parameter
Capability
Characteristics

Up to 8 external components can be extracted from
the IO5 ASI input and added to the output encoded
services (up to 4 components per service).
An external component can be added to only one
output encoded service.
Up to 4 external components can be extracted from
the IO5 ASI inputs and added to the output encoded
service.
Bitrate
Min bitrate: 15 kbit/s
Synchronizing
Some external components require to be synchronous (DVB

sub) with the incoming SDI video signal some other it is not
required.
Signaling
For each component to be extracted from the ASI input, the

User gives the components PID values (In and Out from 33
to 3190), Stream type (used to create signaling tables). The
User also has the option of creating a specific descriptor for
each component, in order to add it to the signaling tables.
Scrambling
If the output encoded service is scrambled, any external

component added to this service is scrambled.
IO5 cannot be used as ASI input for External components if the "ASI
to IP Gateway" feature is used. Refer to section ASI to IP Gateway
on page 352.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

351
ASI to IP Gateway
Refer also to section IP to ASI Gateway on page 376.
ASI to IP gateway is an optional feature. It allows an MPEG Transport
stream to be exchanged between a CP6000 Encoder and a remote
CP6000 Decoder. The Transport Stream is transported transparently and
bit-accurately. Two options must be installed (1 per MPEG Encoder board
and 1 per MPEG Decoder board).
In the MPEG Encoder board the feature allows a TS stream to be
transported from an ASI input to an IP output.
Figure A-15. ASI to IP Gateway feature. Example: MPEG board without audio interface

refer to section IP to ASI Gateway on page 376
Specifications
ASI to IP gateway runs simultaneously with the video encoder(s).
Incoming ASI is converted to TS over IP.
ASI to IP gateway has an integrated rate shaper to limit the output to the
user-defined rate to avoid network overload in the event of a high
incoming ASI rate.
The "ASI to IP Gateway" feature is not available if IO5 is used as ASI
inputs for external components. Refer to section ASI Input for
external components on page 351.
Table A-24. ASI to IP gateway specifications
Parameter
Characteristics
Capability
1 ASI to IP gateway per MPEG Encoder board
IP Output
LAN1, LAN2 on the MPEG Encoder board or LAN1, LAN2 on

the Manager board (CP6000 only)
ASI Input
352
ASI In: IO5

Bitrate: 270 Mbit/s
TS bitrate: From 15 kbit/s to 110 Mbit/s
TS packet size: 18 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Multiplexing Across Boards

Multiplexing across boards is an optional feature. It allows an MPTS to
be formed from all the components generated on the different Encoder
boards of the device.
One option (1 multiplexer) can be instantiated per MPEG Encoder board.
Multiplexing runs simultaneously with encoders.
Figure A-16. Multiplexing across board feature - Use cases
Specifications
Table A-25. Multiplexing across board specifications
Parameter
Capability
Characteristics
CP6000: Up to 4 multiplexers (1 per Encoder board).

Each multiplexer can multiplex up to 8 services.
CP6100: Up to 2 multiplexers (1 per Encoder board).
Each multiplexer can multiplex up to 4 services.
An SPTS encoded by an encoding channel can be
used to generate up to 3 MPTSs.
MPTS output
The MPTS output is available on either:

an ASI and/or Ethernet output (MPEG Encoder or
Manager board ports (CP6000 only))
a Modulator board
MPTS bitrate
Up to 400 Mbit/s
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

353
SCTE 104 to SCTE 35

SCTE 104 to SCTE 35 is an optional feature used to translate SCTE-104
messages to SCTE 35 messages.
One option can be instantiated per MPEG Encoder board.
Figure A-17. SCTE 104 to SCTE 35 message translation
SCTE104
SCTE104
SCTE35
SCTE35
IPIP
CP6000encoder
encoder
CP6000
SDIinin
SDI
Splicer
Splicer
TSTS
SCTE104messages
messagesembedded
embeddedin
SCTE104
in SDI
according
SMPTE-2010or
SDI
according
to SMPTE-2010
or from
IP input
from
IP input
TSTS
Service 1
Service 1
Video
Video
Audio
Audio
Data SCTE35
Data SCTE35
SCTE35messages
messagesconverted
convertedfrom
fromincoming
incoming
SCTE35
SCTE104messages.
messages.
SCTE104
NoIDR
IDRinsertion
insertionatatsplice
splicepoint
point
No
Specifications
Table A-26. Multiplexing across board specifications
Parameter
Messages source
Characteristics
354
From SDI input according to SMPTE 2010.

From C&C IP input according to SCTE 104.
SCTE 104 IP port value: between 1024 and 65535.
SCTE 35 table repetition
Can be set from 1 to 255
IDR Insertion
No IDR insertion at splice point
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Contribution & Distribution Over Unmanaged

Networks
Overview
Contribution & Distribution Over Unmanaged Networks is an optional
feature. It offer the capability to deliver transport stream over
unmanaged networks, typically internet.
In release 04.10, this feature is not available on the Ethernet
interfaces of the Manager board. It is available on the Ethernet
interfaces of the MPEG board.
The feature consists of:
Providing a robust protection algorithm to cope with unmanaged

network impairments.
Reporting information to monitor the unmanaged network.
Support Point to Point and Point to Multi-Points applications:
Figure A-18. Point to Point application
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

355
Figure A-19. Point to Multi-Points application
Zixi Broadcaster
Internet is Unicast, it means it is only possible to establish point to

point system. To address Point to Multi-points architecture a
broadcaster must be included in the system. Broadcaster is in charge
of duplicating incoming stream to each destination. Broadcaster is
either software running in a private server or service running in the
cloud.
Licensing
On MPEG board configured as Decoder, receiver license is applied per
board: that means up to two decoders with Zixi input protected IP
streams can operate with one license.
No license is required on MPEG board configured as Encoder (Zixi
Feeder)
Two Type of licenses
Point to Point and Point to Multi-Points application

- Zixi receiver for point to point and point to multi-points
application: CP6x00-LIC-ZIXI-RX-PP
Point to Multi-Points application

- Zixi receiver for point to multi-points application:
CP6x00-LIC-ZIXI-RX-PMP
Maximum operational performances

When the ZIXI encapsulation is activated to operate on an un-managed
network. Lost packets on the decoder can be recovered by 2 different
methods depending on latency value versus round trip time (value
reported in the GUI snap shot).
FEC mode operates setting prevents to send back lost packets as

below
RETRY mode operates when setting allows to send back lost packets
FEC & RETRY modes can run simultaneously
356
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Table A-27. ZIXI, maximum operational performances
Default values
Max total Useful bitrate
(1 to 4 IP protected TS)
Latency
FEC Overhead
FEC Block
FEC & RETRY mode
RETRY mode only
24 Mbits/s
50 Mbits/s
L < 2 seconds
L 2 seconds
20%
0%
50 ms
0 ms
Zixi back pressure

Transmission bandwidth over satellite depends from weather network
conditions. To benefit from optimize the channel bandwidth availability,
the transmission rate is adjusted according to the channel condition.
When link errors appear, the ZIXI receiver sends a rate change request
message back to the streamer. The process occurs is repeated until a
defined minimum rate or until the link is error free of error.
Max FEC overhead & FEC block settings

ViBE CP6000 performances, on an un-managed network, are strongly
linked to TS bitrate and the settings of the ZIXI modules. Below, the
maximum settings are reported to operate the system in normal
conditions when FEC mode functions.
FEC overhead / FEC block table depending on TS bitrate on Encoder
Table A-28. ZIXI, FEC overhead / FEC block table depending on TS bitrate on Encoder
Total useful TS bitrate
Max FEC overhead
Max FEC block duration
> 15 Mbits/s
20 %
50 ms
12 Mbits/s
20 %
50 ms
9 Mbits/s
20%
50 ms
6 Mbits/s
30 %
100 ms
3 Mbits/s
30 %
100 ms
< 1 Mbits/s
30 %
100 ms
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

357
FEC overhead / FEC block table depending on Latency value on

Decoder in Point to Multi-Points
Table A-29. ZIXI, FEC overhead / FEC block table depending on Latency value on Decoder
in Point to Multi-Points
Latency
Max FEC overhead
Max FEC block duration
400 ms
20 %
50 ms
800 ms
20 %
50 ms
1200 ms
20%
50 ms
1600 ms
20 %
50 ms
2000 ms
0%
100 ms
358
FEC overhead / FEC block duration: Default values to optimize

resources usage:
FEC overhead: 10 %
FEC block duration: 50 ms
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications
MPEG Decoder Specifications

An MPEG Decoder is the combination of one MPEG board and one
decoding software. There are 2 types of MPEG board:
The Dual Channels MPEG board:

This MPEG board can decode up to 2 channels SD or HD.
The Single Channel MPEG board:

This MPEG board can decode 1 channel SD or HD. It is fitted with an
audio connector.
Decoder Block Diagram

Dual Channels MPEG Decoder Board
A Dual Channels MPEG Decoder board is fitted with 5 IO interfaces (IO1
to IO5) and 2 LAN interfaces.
The LAN1 and LAN2 interfaces are the IP inputs of the decoding channel
1 and channel 2.
The IO2 and IO4 interfaces are the SDI outputs of the decoding channel 1
and channel 2.
The IO1 and IO3 interfaces can be configured as SDI outputs from the
decoding channel 1 and channel 2 or as ASI inputs.
The IO5 interface can be configured as ASI input or ASI output from the
channel 1 or channel 2.
ASI inputs are not assigned to a dedicated decoding channel.
Figure A-20. MPEG Decoder block diagram
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

359
Single Channel MPEG Decoder Board

A Single Channel MPEG Decoder board is fitted with 3 IO interfaces (IO1,
IO2 and IO5), 1 audio interface and 2 LAN interfaces.
The IO2 interface is the SDI output of the decoding channel.
The IO1 interface can be configured as SDI output from the decoding
channel or as ASI input.
The IO5 interface can be configured as ASI input or ASI output (ASI to IP
gateway feature).
The audio interface can be configured as analog or digital audio outputs.
The LAN1 and LAN2 interfaces are the IP inputs of the decoding channel.
Figure A-21. Single Channel MPEG Decoder board block diagram
360
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Table A-30. MPEG Decoder board interface specifications
Connector
Description
LAN 1
MPEG
IO1
IO2

or
ASI input
Decoder 1
IO3

or
ASI input
IO4
LAN 2
IO5
Ethernet 1
input
ASI output
or
ASI input
Ethernet 2
input
Decoder 2

Audio
MPEG
IO1
Audio outputs
LED
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

IO2
SDI output SDI output ASI output

or
or
ASI input
ASI input
LAN 1
LAN 2
Ethernet 1
input
Ethernet 2
input
IO5
board alarm.
Red LED off: The board is not powered or there is no board alarm.
361
Connector
AUDIO
Description
Purpose:
Analog or digital audio ouputs
Connector: SUBD-HD26 female
Pinout:
Digital mode
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Clock GND
10 Clock Out
AES4 Out -
11 AES4 Out +
AES2 Out -
AES4 In -
15 AES4 In +
23 AES4 In GND
AES3 In GND
16 AES3 In -
24 AES3 In +
AES2 In -
17 AES2 In +
25 AES2 In GND
AES1 In GND
18 AES1 In -
26 AES1 In +
13 AES2 Out +
19 AES4 Out GND

20 AES3 Out +
21 AES2 Out GND
22 AES1 Out +
Note: The shaded pins are not used in decoder mode.

Analog mode
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Signal
Clock GND
Right Ch2
Out Left Ch2
Out GND
Right Ch1
Out Left Ch1
Out GND
Right Ch2
In Left Ch2
In GND
Right Ch1
In Left Ch1
In GND
Pin
Signal
10 Clock Out
Right Ch2
11
Out +
Left Ch2
12
Out Right Ch1
13
Out +
Left Ch1
14
Out Right Ch2
15
In +
Left Ch2
16
In Right Ch1
17
In +
Left Ch1
18
In -
Pin
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Signal
Right Ch2
Out GND
Left Ch2
Out +
Right Ch1
Out GND
Left Ch1
Out +
Right Ch2
In GND
Left Ch2
In +
Right Ch1
In GND
Left Ch1
In +
Note: The shaded pins are not used in decoder mode.

A breakout cable can be fitted as an option. Refer to section
Audio Breakout Cable on page 402.
362
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Connector
Audio
(continued)
Description
Specifications:
In Digital mode
4 balanced AES outputs:

Digital audio output Signal: AES-2003, Tech 3250-E
Data jitter: 20ns
Output Rise/Fall Time: 5 ns to 30 ns @ 110
Output impedance: 110 20%
Output return loss: > 15 dB (100 kHz-128FS)
Output resolution: 24 bits
Differential voltage range: 3.4 V p to p 0.2 V @ 110
Sampling rate (FS): 48 kHz
In Analog mode
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

2 balanced analog stereo outputs:

Analog Audio output
- Output impedance: 100 20%
- Output signal level for full-scale output: + 4 to + 24 dBu
adjustable in 1 dBu step
- Drive capability maximum: + 24 dBu balanced @ 10K
load
- Differential DC: 0.25 V max
Analog Audio output conversion performance
- Sampling rate: 48 kHz synchronized with the video clock
- Signal to noise ratio: > 102 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz, > 105 dB
A weighted @ 24 dBu
- Inter modulation distortion: < -80 dB CCIF two-tone test,
19 & 20 kHz tones
- THD + noise: < -75 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
- Inter channel crosstalk: < -80 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
- Inter channel gain mismatch: < 0.2 dB
- Inter channel phase mismatch: < 1
- Frequency response: 0.2 dB relative to 1 kHz, 20 Hz to
20 kHz
- DC offset: 50 mV
- Output resolution: 20 bits
- Effective number of bits: 17 bits
363
Connector
IO1 - IO3
Description

IO1 only

IO2-IO4
IO2 only
IO connectors configured as ASI inputs:

Purpose:
MPEG compressed inputs to decoding channels 1 and 2
Characteristics:
- TS input compliant with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB PI)
- Input signal level: 800 mVp-p 10% max
- Return loss: -17 dB
- Bitrate: 270 Mbit/s
- TS bitrate: From 15 kbit/s to 213 Mbit/s
- TS packet size: 18 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes with automatic
detection
- Mode: Data burst or Data packet
- Tolerated input jitter: Compliant with SMPTE 259M,
IO connectors configured as SDI outputs:
Purpose:
SDI/SD-SDI/HD outputs for each decoding channel.
- IO1: Output for decoding channel 1 (mirror IO2 below)
- IO3: Output for decoding channel 2 (mirror IO4 below)
Characteristics:
- Connector: BNC 75
- Standard compliance:
SMPTE 259M/292M/424M/272M/ITU-BT-601
Synchronization: Based on Genlock with Horizontal phase
adjustment (+/- 32000 pixels)
Purpose:
SDI/SD-SDI/HD outputs for each decoding channel:
IO2: Output for decoding channel 1
IO4: Output for decoding channel 2
Characteristics:
Connector: BNC 75
Standard compliance:
SMPTE 259M/292M/424M/272M/ITU-BT-601
Synchronization: Based on Genlock with Horizontal phase
adjustment (+/- 32000 pixels)
364
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Connector
and Single channel MPEG
board:
IO5
Description
IO connector configured as ASI input

Purpose:
MPEG compressed input to decoding channels 1 and 2
Characteristics:
- TS input compliant with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB PI).
- Bitrate : 270 Mbit/s
- TS bitrate: From 15 kbit/s to 213 Mbit/s
- TS packet size: 18 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes with automatic
detection
- Mode : Data burst or Data packet.
IO connector configured as ASI output
Purpose:
ASI output for MPEG compressed
- Channel 1 or channel 2 encoded output
Characteristics:
- TS input compliant with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB PI).
- Bitrate : 270 Mbit/s
- TS bitrate: 213 Mbit/s max
If the IP to ASI gateway optional feature is used,
IO5 is the ASI outputs. Refer to section IP to ASI
Gateway on page 376.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

365
Connector
LAN 1 and LAN 2
366
Description
Purpose:
Electrical Gigabit Ethernet interface for MPEG (SPTS or MPTS)
compressed A/V input over IP.
LAN 1/LAN 2 interfaces of the Manager board can be used as
MPEG over IP inputs. The use of the LAN 1/LAN 2 interfaces of
the MPEG board and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is
exclusive.
Pinout and LEDs:
Refer to Table A-11 Manager board connectors and LEDs on
page 319.
Characteristics:
Standard: 100/1000 Mbps (autosensing)
IP Adaptation:
TS over UDP or RTP/UDP decapsulation
2 IP receive module per Ethernet interface (up to 4 TS
streams on reception per MPEG decoder board)
Unicast or Multicast modes
IGMPv2,
IGMPv3, IGMPv3 SSM (Source Specific
Multicast, which is an IP technology where the destination
host can select a source when joining a multicast group)
- Up to 4 VLAN (1 per IP Rx) can be configured per board
FEC error correction ANNEX B with automatic FEC
configuration
Jitter: Advanced clock recovery to minimize the effects of
IP jitter up to 200 ms
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

TS Processing
Table A-31. MPEG Decoder board, TS Processing
Parameter
TS number and
processing
Description
Monitoring
Two TS IN per decoding channel to redundancy:

SPTS or MPTS from Ethernet inputs or ASI inputs
TS processing:
MPEG-2 Transport Stream compliant with ISO/IEC
13818-1
TS with a bitrate of 400 Mbit/s max
CBR TS
SPTS or MPTS
TS characteristics
- Number of services per TS: up to 32
- Number of videos per service: up to 4
- Number of audios per service: up to 28
- Number of VBIs per service: up to 10
The services carried by the TS source are displayed. For

each service, the service name, service Id, PMT PID and
components with their PID are displayed.
To allow downstream redundancy based on SDI presence,
the SDI output signal can be disabled in the following
cases:
Service Selection
modes
The service to decode can be selected:
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

No Stream received
Service name or service id missing
Video PID missing
1st service in the PMT (default mode)

In this mode the decoder automatically processes the
first valid service containing a video component
declared in the PAT. Other components contained in the
service are processed.
By Service name
By Service Id
By PID (the PID of each component must be indicated)
367
Video Processing
Table A-32. MPEG Decoder board, Video Processing
Parameter
Description
Video decoding
formats
The Decoder board supports the formats encoded by the

CP6000 Encoder board. Refer to section Input video
encoding formats on page 339.
Video decoding profile

and bitrate
The Decoder board supports the profiles and bitrates

encoded by the CP6000 Encoder board. Refer to section
Video processing on page 340.
Video Rescaling
The
Decoder
handles
Upscaling,
Progressive/Interlaced format conversion.
Downscaling
and
The following rescaling modes are supported:

Table A-33. MPEG Decoder board, Video rescaling
Video Rescalinga
HD to SD Downscaling b
1080i/25 to 576i/25
1080i/29.97 to 480i/29.97
SD to HD Upscaling
576i/25 to 1080i/25
480i/29.97 to 1080i/29.97
Progressive & Interlaced

Conversion
HD to SD c
720p/50 to 576i/25
720p/59.94 to 480i/29.97
SD to HD
576i/25 to 720p/50
480i/29.97 to 720p/59.94
HD 1080i to HD 720p
1080i/25 to 720p/50
1080i/29.97 to 720p/59.94
1080i/30 to 720p/60
HD 720p to HD 1080i
720p/50 to 1080i/25
720p/59.94 to 1080i/29.97
720p/60 to 1080i/30
Frame rate conversion is not supported.
The 1080i/30 and 720p/60 standards are not supported.
c The
368
1080i/30 and 720p/60 standards are not supported.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

The following rescaling types are supported (AFD out values are
indicated):
Table A-34. MPEG Decoder board, Video Scaling types and AFD information
Source
4/3 display
Scaling type and AFD
information
16/9 display
Scaling type and AFD
information
16/9
Anamorphic
No change
AFD 4x3: 1000

Center cut
AFD 4x3: 1000

Letter box
AFD 4x3: 1010

4/3
No change
Anamorphic
AFD 16x9: 1000

Center cut
AFD 16x9: 1001

Pillar box
AFD 16x9: 1001
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

369
HD to SD down-conversion
Input / Output
Incoming TS includes:
- HD video
- Audio
- HD teletext component
- DVB subtitle
SDI output inserts:

- SD video (HD video down converted)
- Audio
- SD Teletext in VBI (HD teletext down converted)
- AFD, WSS in VBI
Figure A-22. HD to SD down -conversion
370
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

User commands
The following commands can be set by the User:
Figure A-23. HD to SD down -conversion, User commands
Video rescaling and WSS generation
Video output rescaling is based on user setting (scaling mode:

Manual) or from incoming AFD (scaling mode: AFD or AFD with
default).
WSS is generated from AFD output.
Figure A-24. Video rescaling and WSS generation
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

371
Audio Processing
Table A-35. MPEG Decoder board, Audio Processing
Parameter
Output
Description
Capabilities
Decoding formats
A Video channel decodes:

(audio output = SDI):
Stereo (2.0) components: Up to 8 or
Surround (5.1) components: Up to 2 or
Mixed stereo (2.0) and surround (5.1) components: Up
to 2 (2.0) and 2 (5.1)
Single channel MPEG board):

Stereo (2.0) components: to SDI (up to 8) or AES (up to
4) or Analog (up to 2) or
Surround (5.1) components: to SDI (up to 2) or AES (up
to 1) or
Mixed stereo (2.0) and surround (5.1) components: to
SDI (up to 2 (2.0) and 2 (5.1)) or AES (up to 1 (2.0) and 1
(5.1)).
MPEG-1 Layer II
AAC-LC*
HE-AAC / HE-AAC v2 (2.0, 5.1 (option))
Dolby Digital (AC3) (2.0, 5.1) (option)
Uncompressed (SMPTE 302M-2002)
Audio Pass-thru
AAC (2.0, 5.1)
Dolby E
Audio Pass-thru are compliant with SMPTE 337M-2008.
Miscellaneous
features
372

Audio embedded in accordance with SMPTE 272M is
inserted in the SDI signal.
Audio embedded in accordance with SMPTE 272M is
inserted in the SDI signal or available as analogue or
digital audio on Audio connector.
Audio Delay can be set from -80 to 100 ms (step 1 ms) to

adjust lipsync.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

VBI/ANC Processing
Table A-36. MPEG Decoder board, VBI/ANC Processing
Parameter
Description
VBI/ANC
components
If VBI/ANC informations are transported in specific components,

2 VBI/ANC components can be decoded at the same time.
SD VBI
SD VBI processing compliant with ETSI EN 301 775 (transport of

Transparent Lines VBI only from CP6000 Encoder to CP6000
Decoder).
The following VBI can be enabled / disabled on SDI output:
Teletext, Video Program System (VPS), Wide Screen Signaling
(WSS), Monochrome Transparent, Full Transparent.
ANC
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

ANCillary processing:
Compliant with SMPTE 2038 (transport of ANC from
CP6000 Encoder to CP6000 Decoder).
Compliant with RDD-11 (transport of HD SDI Ancillary
Data in an MPEG-2 Transport Stream).
Closed Caption EIA-608B & EIA-708B, Ancillary Time Code
(ATC_VITC) and Active Format Description (AFD
SMPTE-2016-2) are extracted from the Video Stream and
inserted in the SDI output.
HD Teletext (OP47): HD Teletext (Standard SMPTE RDD-8,
Transport EN 301775) ancillary data PID is decoded to deliver
the dedicated DID (143h) and SDID (102h) in the SDI output
stream.
The following ANC can be enabled / disabled on SDI output:
SD ANC
Closed Caption (EIA 708-B), Time code (ATC), Active
Format Description (AFD), Ancillary Transparent
(SMPTE-2038).
HD ANC
Closed Caption (EIA 708-B), Time code (ATC), Active
Format Description (AFD), Ancillary Transparent
(SMPTE-2038), Ancillary Transparent (RDD-11), HD Teletext
(OP-47).
373
VBI/ANC Processing in Video Rescaling mode

Table A-37. MPEG Decoder board, VBI/ANC Processing in Video Rescaling mode
VIDEO IN / VIDEO OUT

SD / SD
HD / SD
SD / HD
HD / HD
Yes (VBI
teletext)
N/A
To ANC teletext
OP-47
N/A
Video, Program System

(VPS)
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
Wide Screen Signaling

(WSS)
Yes
Created from
AFD
N/A
N/A
Monochrome
transparent
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
Full transparent
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
Closed caption EIA 608

(Line 21)
No
N/A
N/A
N/A
Video Index
No
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Yes
N/A
Time Code (ATC)
Yes
N/A
Yes
N/A
Active Format
Description (AFD)
Yes
N/A
Yes / Refer to
Table A-34 on
page 369
N/A
Transparent
SMPTE-2038
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Yes
Time Code (ATC)
N/A
Yes
N/A
Yes
Active Format
Description (AFD)
N/A
Yes / Refer to
Table A-34 on
page 369
N/A
Yes
Transparent
SMPTE-2038
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Transparent RDD-11
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
HD teletext (OP47)
N/A
To VBI teletexta
N/A
Yes (ANC
Teletext OP47)
SD VBI
Teletext
SD Ancillary
HD Ancillary
a Only
374
OP47 subtitling distribution packet (SDP) data is processed to deliver a VBI Teletext.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

TS Redundancy
If the nominal TS is missing in an MPEG Decoder, it will be replaced by a
backup TS. TS inputs can be from ASI or (and) Ethernet input(s).
Redundant mode can be selected from the following:
Force nominal TS: The selected TS is always the nominal TS.
Auto Switchback on nominal faultless:

When no TS Stream is received on the nominal input, the input
automatically switches to the backup input after a time which can be
set from 0 to 30s.
When the TS stream is received on the nominal input, the system
automatically switches to this nominal input after a time which can be
set from 0 to 30s.
Auto Switchback on redundant fault: When no TS stream is received

on the nominal input, the input automatically switches to the backup
input after a time which can be set from 0 to 30s. The system stays on
the backup input until a redundant fault occurs. When a redundant
fault occurs, the input automatically switches to the nominal input
after a time which can be set from 0 to 30s.
Force backup TS: The selected TS is always the backup TS.
Figure A-25. TS redundancy, examples
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

375
Descrambling
Descrambling is an optional feature. 1 option must be installed per MPEG
board and enable multiple services descrambling.
This feature is used for BISS mode 1 and BISS E descrambling. Refer to
section Scrambling on page 350.
IP to ASI Gateway
Refer also to section ASI to IP Gateway on page 352.
IP to ASI gateway is an optional feature. The feature allows an
MPEG Transport stream to be exchanged between a CP6000 Encoder and
a remote CP6000 Decoder. The Transport Stream is transported
transparently and bit-accurately. Two options must be installed (1 per
MPEG Encoder board and 1 per MPEG Decoder board).
Figure A-26. ASI to IP and IP to ASI Gateway feature. Example: MPEG board without
audio interface

refer to section ASI to IP Gateway on page 352
Specifications
The IP to ASI gateway runs with the video decoder(s) simultaneously.
The incoming TS over IP is converted to ASI.
Table A-38. IP to ASI gateway specifications
Parameter
Characteristics
Capability
1 IP to ASI gateway per MPEG Decoder board
IP Input
ASI Output
376
IP In: LAN1, LAN2 on the MPEG Decoder board or

LAN1, LAN2 on the Manager board (CP6000 only)
Includes user configurable input buffer to cope with
network jitter
ASI Out: IO5
Bitrate: 270 Mbit/s
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Contribution & Distribution Over UnManaged

Networks
This feature is optional. Refer to section Contribution & Distribution
Over Unmanaged Networks on page 355.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

377
Appendix A Technical Specifications DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications
DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications

A single Modulator board per ViBE CP6000 or ViBE CP6100 is allowed.
There are 2 types of Modulator:
IF - Band Modulator (from 50 MHz to 180 MHz)
L- Band Modulator (from 950 MHz to 2150 MHz).

The L - Band Modulator comes with a Diplexer. Refer to section
Diplexer Specifications on page 385.
Modulators are compliant with DVB-S / DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X / DVB-DSNG

standards.
Modulator Block Diagram

A Modulator is fitted with:
3 TS inputs:
2 ASI inputs (ASI in1 and ASI in2)
1 TS input from the backplane
1 TS output (ASI OUT) for monitoring
1 RF output (RF)
1 RF output (MON) for monitoring
1 clock reference input (REF IN) for external synchronization
1 clock reference output (REF OUT)
Figure A-27. Modulator block diagram
In the current release (v04.10) the TS (SPTS or MPTS) of only one

MPEG board can be linked to the Modulator board via the TS from
the backplane input.
378
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Table A-39. Modulator board interface specifications
Connector
Description
LED
board alarm.
Red LED off: The board is not powered or there is no board alarm.
RF OUT
MON OUT
REF IN
REF OUT
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Purpose:
RF output (band depends on Modulator type)
Characteristics:
Connector: SMA - 50
Standards: DVB-S / DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X / DVB-DSNG
Frequency:
- L- Band modulator: 950 MHz to 2150 MHz in 1 Hz steps
- IF - Band modulator: 50 MHz to 180 MHz in 1 Hz steps
Bandwidth: 0.1 MHz to 72 MHz
SNR: > 34 dB @ 0dBm over the entire RF frequency range
Spurious rejection > -65 dBc over the entire RF frequency
range (except OL rejection -60dBc at 1600 MHz on the
L- Band modulator)
Power level range: From -30 to + 5 dBm in 0.1 dB steps
If needed, the output spectrum can be reversed.
Purpose:
RF output monitoring
Characteristics:
Connector: SMA - 50
Bandwidth: 0.1 MHz to 72 MHz
Level: -20 dB under the RF OUT power
Purpose:
Frequency reference input
Characteristics:
Frequency: 10 MHz
Level: From -15 to + 15 dBm
Purpose:
Frequency reference output
Characteristics:
Frequency: 10 MHz
Level: 0 dBm 3 dB
379
Table A-39. Modulator board interface specifications
Connector
ASI OUT
Description
ASI IN1
ASI IN2
380
Purpose:
Provides the ASI IN1 TS, ASI IN2 TS, TS from the internal
MPEG Encoder or TS stream after bitrate adaptation
processing for monitoring.
Characteristics:
TS packet size: 188 bytes
Purpose:
MPEG compressed input 1
Characteristics:
TS input compliant with EN 50083-9,
ETSI TR101 891 v1.1.1
TS packet size: 188 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes with automatic
detection. In 204 bytes mode, the last 16 bytes are not
processed and consequently not modulated
Purpose:
MPEG compressed input 2
Characteristics: Refer to ASI IN1 above
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Miscellaneous Specifications
Table A-40. Miscellaneous specifications
Input Stream
Management
Two modes are available to configure the modulator input:

Manual mode: The Operator selects ASI IN1, ASIN2 or
Internal input (TS stream from an MPEG Encoder board).
Automatic mode: The Operator selects an input combination
from ASI IN1/ASI IN2.
If the ASI IN1 and ASI IN2 streams are available, the
modulator always takes ASI IN1 as its input stream. When
the ASI IN1 stream is interrupted for at least 500ms, the
modulator switches to ASI IN2. If it does not find another
available stream in the next 1000ms, it generates an alarm.
In this mode, in the event of ASI IN1 stream loss the switch
to ASI IN2 is automatic but if the ASI IN1 stream is restored,
there is no switchback to the ASI IN1 stream.
Input Bitrate
Management
This process allows the modulator to build a constant bitrate at

the modulation kernel input. The Modulator board offers
different possibilities to smooth the bitrate:
Null packet adaptation (DVB-S / DVB-S2 / DVB-DSNG): In this
operating mode, the unit discards or inserts Null packets to
adapt the TS input bitrate to the precise bitrate defined by
the selected DVB-S or DVB-S2 mode. PCR (Program Clock
Reference) restamping is then executed accordingly.
Padding insertion (DVB-S2): This method is described in
DVB-S2 standard EN 302 307. It does not modify the
incoming MPEG-TS stream (like the previous method) but
the useful input stream bitrate must be less than the channel
modulation bitrate capability. The process involves
completing the DVB-S2 BBFrame (Base Band Frames) with
padding. The receiver must remove this padding at the
reception end. In this case, the satellite link is transparent for
the MPEG-TS because there is no PCR restamping.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

381
Table A-40. Miscellaneous specifications
Clock and
synchronization
The modulator includes its own clock and synchronization

generator. A high stability 10 MHz oscillator provides the
internal clock reference to the modulator clock system.
An external 10 MHz clock signal can be chosen as a reference
clock for the modulator. The modulator clock reference source
can be configured as:
Internal 10MHz (by default)
Locked to the external 10 MHz signal reference
The 10MHz input (REF IN connector) signal can be used to
synchronize several modulators in parallel when they all
broadcast adjacent carriers in the same transponder. However,
internal clock stability is usually sufficient without 10MHz input
in this situation.
If the modulator is synchronized with an external 10 MHz
reference and the reference disappears, the modulator uses its
own clock during a programmable time from 0 to 1440 min (24
hours). After this time the RF output signal is muted.
The 10MHz output (REF OUT connector) signal can be used to
control an up-converter if required.
10 MHz Internal
oscillator
RF output
ON/OFF
Frequency: 10MHz
Stability versus temperature: < 2.5 ppm (0C to 50C)
Aging: < 0.8 ppm /year, < 1.10-8/day
Tuning: 3 ppm
The Operator can enable or disable RF signal muting according

to the following events:
Stream input:
Stream lost
Input packet structure error
TS packet format (incorrect TS packet header)
Buffer overflow/underflow
The default stream detection interval is equal to 1 second.
Lost of external 10MHz Reference Synchronization. A
time out can be set by the Operator.
Manual mute
NB: If the Operator disables automatic mute, PRBS TS packets
are inserted to reach the bitrate.
Un-mute can be configured as direct (abrupt un-muting) or
progressive.
Carrier
Modulated OFF
=> Sinus tone
generation
382
In this mode, the output signal is replaced by a simple sine

signal at the RF frequency. The level of the sinus tone
corresponds to the output power (configurable from -30 to
+5 dBm).
Among other things, this mode allows phase noise
measurement without the need for an external amplifier.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

DVB-S Specifications
Table A-41. DVB-S Specifications
Parameter
Description
Standard
EN 300 421
Modulation
Outer/Inner FEC: Reed Solomon/Viterbi

Modulation Type and Code rate:
QPSK: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
Roll-off value: 0.35
Useful bitrate
Up to 86 Mbit/s depending on the modulation parameters.

An internal computer indicates the maximum TS bitrate
that can be modulated.
Symbol Rate
0.1 to 53.3 Mbaud
Bandwidth
0.1 to 72 MHz
DVB-DSNG Specifications
Table A-42. DVB-DSNG Specifications
Parameter
Description
Standard
EN 300 210
Modulation
Outer/Inner FEC: Reed Solomon/Viterbi

Modulation Type and Code rate
QPSK: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
8PSK: 2/3, 5/6, 8/9
16QAM: 3/4, 7/8
Roll-off value: 0.35
Useful bitrate

An internal computer indicates the maximum TS bitrate
that can be modulated.
Symbol Rate
0.1 to 53.3 Mbaud
Bandwidth
0.1 to 72 MHz
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

383
DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X Specifications

Table A-43. DVB-S2 Specifications
Parameter
Description
Standards
EN 300 321, EN 302 307
Modulation
Outer/Inner FEC: BCH/LDPC

Modulation Type and Code rate
QPSK: 1/4, 1/3, 2/5, 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10
8PSK: 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10
16APSK: 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10 (option)
32APSK: 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10 (option)
PL Scrambling codes [0, 264143]
Supported DVB modes:
CCM: Constant Coding and Modulation
DVB-S2 Short frames: 16 200 bits
Additional Modulation type and Code rate in DVB-S2X
(option):
QPSK: 11/45, 4/15, 14/45, 7/15, 8/15, 32/45
8PSK: 7/15, short, 26/45, 32/45
16APSK: 7/15, 8/15, 26/45, 3/5, 32/45
32APSK: 32/45
DVB-S2 Normal frames: 64 800 bits
Additional Modulation type and Code rate in DVB-S2X
(option):
QPSK: 13/45, 9/20, 11/20
8PSK: 5/9-L, 26/45-L, 23/36, 25/36, 13/18
16APSK: 1/2-L, 8/15-L, 5/9-L, 26/45, 3/5, 3/5-L, 28/45, 23/36,
2/3-L, 25/36, 13/18, 7/9, 77/90
32APSK: 2/3-L, 32/45, 11/15, 7/9
64APSK: 32/45-L, 11/15, 7/9, 4/5, 5/6
Roll-off values: 0.05 to 0.35 in 0.01 steps (DVB-S2X compliant)
Pilots ON or OFF
Useful bitrate

An internal computer indicates the maximum TS bitrate that can
be modulated.
Symbol Rate
0.1 to 68 Mbaud
Bandwidth
0.1 to 72 MHz
Carried Id
CID contents:
GUI (Global Unique Identifier)
GPS coordinates
Phone number
User data
Signaling
A signaling table Editor (SigEditor) can be found on the CD-ROM shipped
with the device. This tool provides a user-friendly graphical interface
384
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

representing the NIT table structure with the possibility of modifying or

adding fields and descriptors (selected in a popup menu). Once the table
is ready, it can be saved in a file to be downloaded to the CP6000.
The NIT table is injected on the TS feeding the Modulator Board.
Table A-44. NIT Specifications
Parameter
Description
Standard
Compliant with ISO/IEC 13818-1
Repetition rate
500 ms
NIT Table edition
NIT is edited via the Web Browser Interface
Diplexer Specifications
A Diplexer is used to mix the 10 MHz REF OUT and L- Band RF OUT
signals generated by the Modulator. The mixed signals are sent in a
single cable to the Up converter and Amplifier.
Figure A-28. Diplexer and CP6000, use case
Up converter and Amplifier
L Band and 10 MHz

in a single cable
RF Out (L Band)
REF Out (10 MHz)
Figure A-29. Diplexer connections
High pass (L Band)

Common
Low pass (Ref 10 MHz)
The
detailed
diplexer
specifications
are
described
in
the
Diplexer_ZDPLX-2150+.pdf document on the CD-ROM shipped with the
product.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

385
Appendix A Technical Specifications Standard Compliance
Standard Compliance
Table A-45. Standard compliance
Standards
Title
TV standards
386
ANSI/SMPTE 125M -1995 3
Component Video Signal 4:2:2 - Bit-Parallel Digital

Interface
SMPTE 259M-2006
SDTV Digital Signal/Data Serial Digital Interface
SMPTE 260M-1999
1125/60 High-Definition Production System Digital

Representation and Bit-Parallel Interface
SMPTE 272M
Television - Formatting AES/EBU Audio and Auxiliary

Data into Digital Video Ancillary Data Space
SMPTE 274M-2005
1920 x 1080 Image Sample Structure, Digital

Representation and Digital Timing Reference Sequences
for Multiple Picture Rates
SMPTE 291M-2006
Ancillary Data Packet and Space Formatting
SMPTE 292M-2006
1.5 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface
SMPTE 296M-2001
1280 x 720 Progressive Image Sample Structure

Analog and Digital Representation and Analog Interface
SMPTE 302M-2002
Mapping of AES Data into an MPEG-2 Transport Stream
SMPTE 337M-2008
Format for Non-PCM Audio and Data in an AES3 Serial

Digital Audio Interface
SMPTE 424M-2006
3 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface
SMPTE 425M-2008
3 GB/s Signal/Data Serial Interface Source Image

Format Mapping
SMPTE 2010
Vertical Ancillary Data Mapping of ANSI/SCTE 104

Messages
SMPTE 2016-1
Format for Active Format Description and Bar Data
SMPTE 2016-3
Vertical Ancillary Data Mapping of Active Format

Description and Bar Data
SMPTE 2022-2
Unidirectional Transport of Constant Bit Rate MPEG-2

Transport Streams on IP Networks
SMPTE 2038M-2008
Carriage of Ancillary Data Packets in an MPEG-2

Transport Stream
SMPTE RDD 11
Carriage of HDSDI Ancillary Data in an MPEG-2

Transport Stream
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Appendix A Technical Specifications Standard Compliance
Table A-45. Standard compliance
Standards
Title
SMPTE RP 168-2002
Definition of Vertical Interval Switching Point for

Synchronous Video Switching
SMPTE RP 165-1994
Error Detection Checkwords and Status Flags for Use in

Bit-Serial Digital Interfaces for Television
SMPTE RP 178-2004
Serial Digital Interface Checkfield for 10-Bit 4:2:2

Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals
SMPTE RP 184-2004
Specification of Jitter in Bit-Serial Digital Systems
SMPTE RP 186
Video Index Information Coding for 525 and 625 Line

Television Systems
SMPTE RP 198-1998
Bit-Serial Digital Checkfield for Use in High-Definition

Interfaces
DVB standards
ETSI EN 301 210
Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB);

Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for
Digital Satellite News Gathering (DSNG) and other
contribution applications by satellite
ETSI EN 302 307

Second generation framing structure, channel coding
and modulation systems for Broadcasting, Interactive
Services, News Gathering and other broadband satellite
applications (DVB-S2)
ETSI EN 300 421

Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for
11/12 GHz satellite services
Chassis standards
AMC.0 R2.0
Advanced Mezzanine Card Base Specification
PICMG MTCA.0 R1.0
Micro Telecommunications Computing Architecture

Base Specification
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

387
Appendix A Technical Specifications Certifications and Environmental Specifications
Certifications and Environmental Specifications

Table A-46. Safety Standards
Category
Safety
388
Standard
Designed/tested for compliance with:
2006/95/EEC
European Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/E replacing

73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC.
IEC 60950
Standard for Safety for Information Technology Equipment

- Safety - Part 1: General Requirements, (IEC 60950-1, Second
Edition, 2005, Corrigendum: 01-2007).
EN60950
Safety of Information Technology Equipment, including

Electrical Business Equipment, (EN 60950-1, Second Edition,
September 2006).
ANSI / UL60950
Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment Safety - Part 1: General Requirements, (ANSI/UL 60950-1,
Second Edition, Dated March 27, 2007). Certified.
CAN/CSA C22.2,
No. 60950
Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment Safety - Part 1: General Requirements, (CAN/CSA-C22.2
No. 60950-1-07. Second Edition). Certified.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Table A-47. EMC Standards
Category
EMI
Standard
2004/108/EEC

EMC European Directive 2004/108/EC replacing 89/336/EEC
and 93/68/EEC.
EN 55022 standard Electromagnetic compatibility (Europe). Information

technology equipment - Radio disturbance characteristics Limits and methods of measurement:
EN 61000-3-2: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-2:
Limits - Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment
input current up to and including 16 A per phase).
EN 61000-3-3: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-3:
Limits - Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and
flicker in public low-voltage supply systems, for equipment
with rated current <= 16 A per phase and not subject to
conditional connection.
EN55024 standard Electromagnetic compatibility (Europe). Information
technology equipment - Immunity characteristics - Limits and
methods of measurement:
EN 61000-4-2: Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test.
EN 61000-4-3: Radiated, Radio-Frequency Electromagnetic
Field Immunity Test.
EN 61000-4-4: Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity Test.
EN 61000-4-5: Surge Immunity Test.
EN 61000-4-6: Immunity to Conducted Disturbances, Induced
Radio-Frequency Fields.
EN 61000-4-8: Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity Test.
EN 61000-4-11: Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions and Voltage
Variations Immunity Tests.
EMF
CE labeling
US FCC CFR 47
part 15
Federal Communication Commission - part 15 (USA): Radio

Frequency devices.
AS/NZS 3548
C-Tick: Electromagnetic compatibility (Australia & New

Zealand).
Information technology equipment, modems, fax machines,
BPL modem.
VCCI V-3 / 2011.04
CISPR22:Ed 6.0:2008 Conducted Disturbance Measurement &

Radiated Electric Field
ICES-003 Ed4
Digital Apparatus (Canada).
Council
recommendation
1999/519/EC
Recommendation on the limitation of exposure of the general

public to electromagnetic fields.
EN 62311:2008
Assessment of electronics and electrical equipment related to

human exposure restrictions for electromagnetic fields.
765/2008 EC
REGULATION of the European Parliament and of the council

setting out the requirements for accreditation and market
surveillance relating to the marketing products.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

389
Table A-48. Environmental Specifications
Category
ROHS II
Standard
Directive
2011/65/EU
Pollution
specifications
Protection
specifications
Operating
Temperature
390
Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in

electrical and electronic equipment.
No. 2 pollution.
CEI 60529: 1989
Ram with
built-in lithium
battery type
Recycling
product
IP20 protection.
M4T32-BR-12SH1, ST-Microelectronics, 2.8V 120 ma
Directive
2012/19/EU
Directive on Waste Electric and Electronic Equipment (

WEEE)
Refer to section Recycling the Product on page 428.
- 5C to + 50C (+23F to +122F)
(Recommended +10C to + 35C (+50F to +95F))
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Table A-49. Environmental Standards
Category
Environment
testing
Standard
ETS 300 019-1-3
Classification of environmental conditions; Stationary use at

weather protected locations:
Environmental class 3.1 and 3.1E.
Operation in temperature-controlled locations.
+ 5C to + 50C (+41F to +122F) @ 85% humidity compliant
with the climatogram featured in the standard
(Platform tested from -5 to +55C).
ETS 300 019-1-2
Classification of environmental conditions; Transportation:

Environmental class 2.2: "Careful transportation" for
mechanical conditions.
- 25C to + 70C (-13F to +158F).
95% humidity compliant with the climatogram featured in
the standard.
Sinusoidal vibrations in packaging.
Random vibrations in packaging.
Shocks in packaging.
Falls in packaging.
Falls in packaging - Green Book Option.
ETS 300 019-1-1
Classification of environmental conditions; Storage

Environmental class 1.2.
Storage in weather-protected, partly temperature-controlled
locations.
- 25C to + 70C (-13F to +158F).
95% humidity compliant with the climatogram featured in
the standard.
Shocks during In-Use.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

391
Appendix A Technical Specifications Ordering Guide
Ordering Guide
Figure A-30. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform Ordering guide
392
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Base Systems
Table A-50. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Rack Options
Code
Description of the CP6000 rack options
CP6000-1U-1AC
ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform. 1U, LCD front panel, 2

GbE ports, single power supply 110-220 VAC. 4 hot
swappable slots for Encoding and Decoding boards.
Software Release + boards + licenses MUST be ordered.
CP6000-1U-2AC

GbE ports, redundant dual power supply 110-220 VAC. 4 hot
Software Release + boards + licenses MUST be ordered
CP6000-1U-1DC

GbE ports, single DC (WARNING: LONG LEAD TIME). 4 hot
Software Release + boards + licenses MUST be ordered.
CP6000-1U-2DC

GbE ports, redundant dual power supply DC (WARNING:
LONG LEAD TIME). 4 hot swappable slots for Encoding and
Decoding boards. Software Release + boards + licenses
MUST be ordered.
CP6000-1U-ACDC

GbE ports, redundant mixed AC & DC (WARNING: LONG
LEAD TIME). Power supply. 4 hot swappable slots for
Encoding and Decoding boards. Software Release + boards
+ licenses MUST be ordered.
CP6100-HU-AC
ViBE CP6100 Contribution Platform. Half-size 1RU chassis,

LCD front panel, single AC power supply. 2 hot-swappable
slots. Software Release + boards + licenses (common to
CP6000 & CP6100) MUST be ordered.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

393
Hardware Options
MPEG Board
Table A-51. CP6000-CP6100 Hardware Options 1/2
Code
Description of Hardware Options
CP6x00-OPT-MPG
ViBE CP6000 MPEG encoder/decoder board. Encodes or

decodes up to 2 SD/HD channels. Includes 5 BNC
connectors for SD-SDI, HD-SDI and ASI inputs/outputs,
and 2 GbE elect. Requires SW version 3.00 or higher.
CP6x00-OPT-MPG-AUD
ViBE CP6000 single channel encoder/decoder board.

Includes 3 BNC connectors for SD-SDI, HD-SDI and ASI
inputs/outputs, 2 GbE elect, 4 audio stereo AES or 2 audio
stereo analog. Breakout cable required for audio. Requires
SW version 4.00 or higher.
Modulator Board
Table A-52. CP6000-CP6100 Hardware Options 2/2
Code
Description
CP6x00-OPT-MOD-RF
ViBE CP6000 DVB-S/S2/DSNG modulator board with

L-Band output (950Mhz to 2150Mhz). Hot swappable.
Includes QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM. Symbol rate up to
68Mbaud.
CP6x00-OPT-MOD-IF
ViBE CP6000 DVB-S/S2/DSNG modulator board with

IF-Band output (50Mhz to 180Mhz). Hot swappable.
Includes QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM. Symbol rate up to
68Mbaud.
CP6000 Front Panel

Table A-53. CP6000 Hardware Options
Code
CP6x00-OPT-FAV-LCD
394
Description
ViBE CP6000 Front panel with LCD & Keyboard. For
upgrade of chassis without LCD.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

CP6100 Adaptation Kit

Table A-54. CP6100 Adaptation Kit Option
Code
Description
CP6100-OPT-RACK-KIT
ViBE CP6100 Mechanical kit to mount one or two CP6100

in 19" rack.
Audio Cable
Table A-55. AC Mains Cable Options
Code
Description
CPx000-CAB-AUD
CP6K Audio cable In/Out, AES & analog
AC Mains Cables
Table A-56. AC Mains Cable Options
Code
Description
N900PCEUAA
Power cord for continental Europe.
N900PCUSAA
Power cord for US and Japan.
N900PCUKAA
Power cord for UK.
N900PCSWAA
Power cord for Switzerland.
N900PCAUAA
Power cord for Australia.
N900PCARAA
Power cord for Argentina.
Software Options
Product Release
Table A-57. License for CP6000-CP6100 Product release
Code
CP6x00-SW-BASE
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Description
ViBE CP6000 Software Release V4.10
395
Encoder
Table A-58. Licenses for MPEG Encoder board - Video
Code
Description of Encoder video options
CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP2SD-420
ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-2 SD 4:2:0 encoding,

includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC.
CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP2HD-420
ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-2 SD/HD 4:2:0 encoding,

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-2 SD 4:2:0/4:2:2 encoding,

includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC. Up
to 2 per MPEG board (CP6000-HW-MPEG), attached to the
chassis.
ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-2 SD/HD 4:2:0/4:2:2

encoding, includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or
AAC/HE-AAC.
Up
to
2
per
MPEG
module
(CP6000-HW-MPEG).
ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD 4:2:0/4:2:2 8 bits

AAC/HE-AAC.
Up
to
2
per
MPEG
board
(CP6000-HW-MPEG), attached to the chassis.
ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD 4:2:0 8 bits encoding,

to 2 per MPEG module (CP6000-HW-MPEG).
ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD/HD 4:2:0 8 bits

AAC/HE-AAC.
Up
to
2
per
MPEG
module
(CP6000-HW-MPEG).
CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP4HD-8b
ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD/HD 4:2:0/4:2:2 8 bits

AAC/HE-AAC.
Up
to
2
per
MPEG
board
CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP4HD-10b

AAC/HE-AAC.
Up
to
2
per
MPEG
board
Table A-59. Licenses for MPEG Encoder board - Audio
Code
Description of Encoder audio options
CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP1L2-AAC
ViBE CP6000 - License for one additional stereo audio MPEG1

Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC encoding. Up to 6 per video encoding
channel, attached to the chassis.
CP6x00-LIC-ENC-DD20
ViBE CP6000 - License for one audio stereo Dolby Digital

(AC-3) encoding. Up to 8 per video encoding channel,
attached to the chassis.
396
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Table A-60. Licenses for MPEG Encoder board - Others
Code
Description
CP6x00-LIC-SCR-BISS
ViBE CP6000 - License for BISS 1/E scrambling. Up to 1 per

MPEG board (CP6000-HW-MPEG).
CP6x00-LIC-ASI-IP-GW
ViBE CP6000 license: enables ASI-to-IP gateway (on encoder)

and IP-to-ASI (on decoder). One license max per
encoder/decoder board.
CP6x00-LIC-SCTE
ViBE CP6000 - License enables SCTE104 to SCTE35 from SDI

or IP input (no IDR insertion).
CP6x00-LIC-MUX
ViBE CP6000 - License enables one MULTIPLEXER with input

from another board.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

397
Decoder
Table A-61. Licenses for MPEG Decoder board - Video
Code
Description of Decoder video options
CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP2SD-420
ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-2 SD 4:2:0 decoding,

CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP2HD-420
ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-2 SD/HD 4:2:0 decoding,

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-2 SD 4:2:0/4:2:2 decoding,

to 2 per MPEG board (CP6000-HW-MPEG), attached to the
chassis.
ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-2 HD 4:2:0/4:2:2 decoding,

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD 4:2:0/4:2:2 8bits

decoding, includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or
AAC/HE-AAC Up to 2 per MPEG board (CP6000-HW-MPEG),
CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP4HD-8b

AAC/HE-AAC. Up to 2 per MPEG board (CP6000-HW-MPEG),
CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP4HD-10b

AAC/HE-AAC. Up to 2 per MPEG board (CP6000-HW-MPEG),
ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD 4:2:0 8bits decoding,

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD/HD 4:2:0 8 bits

AAC/HE-AAC.
Up
to
2
per
MPEG
module
(CP6000-HW-MPEG).
Table A-62. Licenses for MPEG Decoder board - Audio
Code
Description of Decoder audio options
CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP1L2-AAC
ViBE CP6000 - License for one additional stereo audio MPEG1

Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC decoding. Up to 6 per video decoding
channel, attached to the chassis.
CP6x00-LIC-DEC-DD20
ViBE CP6000 - License for one audio stereo Dolby Digital

(AC-3) decoding. Up to 8 per video decoding channel,
398
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Table A-63. Licenses for MPEG Decoder board - Others
Code
Description of Decoder options
CP6x00-LIC-DSC-BISS
ViBE CP6000 - License for BISS descrambling. Up to 1 per

MPEG board (CP6000-HW-MPEG).
CP6x00-LIC-ASI-IP-GW
ViBE CP6000 license: enables ASI-to-IP gateway (on encoder)

and IP-to-ASI (on decoder). One license max per
encoder/decoder board.
CP6x00-LIC-ZIXI-RX-PP
ViBE CP6000 - Zixi receiver for point to point and point to

multi-points application.
CP6x00-LIC-ZIXI-RX-PMP
ViBE CP6000 - Zixi receiver for point to multi-points

application.
Modulator
Table A-64. Licenses for Modulator board
Code
Description of Decoder video options
CP6x00-LIC-MOD-16APSK
ViBE CP6000 license: enables DVB-S2 16APSK modulation

mode
CP6x00-LIC-MOD-32APSK
ViBE CP6000 license:

modulation modes.
CP6x00-LIC-MOD-S2X
ViBE CP6000 license: enables DVB-S2X ModCods and

64APSK mode.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

enables
DVB-S2
16&32APSK
399
Bundles
8 bundles offer a single HD channel configurations housed either in a
rack chassis (ViBE CP6100) or in a 1RU chassis (ViBE CP6000). They are
fixed configurations regarding hardware items.
Bundles are delivered with the last software version.
Bundles Common Features
Table A-65. Bundles common features
Feature
Commun features
Frame
Single AC PSU
Encoder
Interfaces
SD/HD SDI input & ASI input
Video
Video bitrate up to 80 Mbit/s
CABAC or CAVLC up to 80 Mbit/s
Audio
Audio AES, Analog & SDI embedded
MPEG-1 Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC stereo encode
Linear PCM or Dolby-E Pass-thru
Dolby Digital (AC3) & AAC Pass-thru
Output
BISS scrambling
ASI or dual Giga Ethernet output
Modulator (bundles with modulator)
400
DVB-S2X modulator 950 to 2150 MHz
Symbol rate 0.1 to 68 Mbaud
Roll off 5% to 35% by 1% step
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Bundles Ordering Guide

CP6000 Bundles
Table A-66. ViBE CP6000 Bundles
Code
Description of the CP6000 Bundles
CP6000-BDL-HD420-V2
ViBE CP6000 bundle: Single channel MPEG-2/MPEG-4 SD/HD

420 encoder up to 80Mbps. One AC PSU chassis.. Interfaces:
SDI, AES & analog audio, ASI, IP. Includes 4 stereo MP1
L2/AAC, BISS, FEC, Zixi streaming.
CP6000-BDL-HD422-V2

420/422 8/10bit encoder up to 80Mbps. One AC PSUAC
chassis. Interfaces: SDI, AES & analog audio, ASI, IP. Includes
8 stereo MP1 L2/AAC, BISS, FEC, Zixi streaming.
CP6000-BDL-HD420-MOD-V2

420/422 8/10bit encoder up to 80Mbps. One AC PSUAC

420/422 8/10bit encoder up to 80Mbps with S2/S2X
QPSK/8PSK L-Band modulator. One AC PSUAC chassis.
Interfaces: SDI, AES & analog audio, ASI, IP. Includes 8 stereo
MP1 L2/AAC, BISS, FEC, Zixi streaming.
CP6100 Bundles
Table A-67. ViBE CP6100 Bundles
Code
Description of the CP6000 Bundles
CP6100-BDL-HD420-V2

420 encoder up to 80Mbps. Half size One AC PSUAC chassis.
Interfaces: SDI, AES & analog audio, ASI, IP. Includes 4 stereo
MP1 L2/AAC, BISS, FEC, Zixi streaming.
CP6100-BDL-HD422-V2

420/422 8/10bit encoder up to 80Mbps. Half size One AC
PSUAC chassis. Interfaces: SDI, AES & analog audio, ASI, IP.
Includes 8 stereo MP1 L2/AAC, BISS, FEC, Zixi streaming.

420 encoder up to 80Mbps with S2/S2X QPSK/8PSK L-Band
modulator. Half size One AC PSU AC chassis. Interfaces: SDI,
AES & analog audio, ASI, IP. Includes 4 stereo MP1 L2/AAC,
BISS, FEC, Zixi streaming.

420/422 8/10bit encoder up to 80Mbps with S2/S2X
QPSK/8PSK L-Band modulator. Half size One AC PSU AC
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

401
Appendix A Technical Specifications Appendix
Appendix
Audio Breakout Cable
This cable is optional.
Commercial Reference: CP6x00-OPT-MPG-AUD
Figure A-31. Audio breakout cable
Cable Length: 1.80 m

OUT 1
AES OUT 1 or
Analog OUT 1 Right
IN 1
AES IN 1 or
Analog IN 1 Right
OUT 2
AES OUT 2 or
Analog OUT 1 Left
IN 2
AES IN 2 or
Analog IN 1 Left
OUT 3
AES OUT 3 or
Analog OUT 2 Right
IN 3
AES IN 3 or
Analog IN 2 Right
OUT 4
AES IN 4 or
Analog OUT 2 Left
IN 4
AES IN 4 or
Analog IN 2 Left
CLOCK REF OUT
Connectors Pinout
SUB-D HD26 connector

Refer to audio connector in Table A-13 MPEG Encoder board
interface specifications on page 329 or audio connector in
Table A-30 MPEG Decoder board interface specifications on
page 361.
XLR connectors
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
GND
402
BNC connector
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Clock Out (48 kHz)
GND
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Video Profiles & Bitrates recommendations

Depending on the application the following Video Profiles & Bitrates are
recommended:
Table A-68. Recommended Video Profiles & Bitrates for Contribution applications
News
Standard
Premium
SD MPEG-2
4:2:0 / 6 Mbit/s
4:2:2 / 8 Mbit/s
4:2:2 / > 12 Mbit/s
HD MPEG-2
4:2:0 / 18 Mbit/s
4:2:2 / 35 Mbit/s
4:2:2 / > 60 Mbit/s
SD MPEG-4
4:2:0 / 3 Mbit/s
4:2:2 8 bits / 6 Mbit/s
4:2:2 8 bits / > 12 Mbit/s
HD MPEG-4
4:2:0 / 6 Mbit/s
4:2:2 8 bits / 20 Mbit/s 4:2:2 10 bits / > 40 Mbit/s
Primary distribution uses 4:2:0 video profiles.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

403
BLANK PAGE
404
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

B
Safety Instructions
Appendix
ENGLISH
Read and follow the important safety information in section Safety
Summary (English) on page 406, noting especially those instructions
related to risk of fire, electric shock or injury to persons. Additional
specific warnings not listed there may be found throughout the manual.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, never remove the cover of the
equipment.
If you remove the cover of the equipment, the warranty ceases to
apply.
GERMAN
Lesen
und
befolgen
Sie
die
nachstehenden,
wichtigen
Sicherheitshinweise (section Sicherheit - berblick (Deutsch) on
page 410). Beachten Sie insbesondere die Anweisungen bezglich
Brand-, Stromschlag- und Verletzungsgefahr. Das Handbuch enthlt
weitere, hier nicht angefhrte spezifische Warnhinweise.
Um die Stromschlaggefahr zu verringern, die Gerteabdeckung
niemals entfernen. Andernfalls erlischt die Garantie.
FRENCH
Il est recommand de lire, de bien comprendre et surtout de respecter les
informations relatives la scurit qui sont exposes au paragraphe
Consignes de scurit (Franais), page 415 notamment les consignes
destines prvenir les risques dincendie, les dcharges lectriques et
les blessures aux personnes. Les avertissements complmentaires, qui
ne sont pas ncessairement repris dans le paragraphe sus-cit, mais
prsents dans tous les paragraphes du manuel, sont galement
prendre en considration.
Pour prvenir les risques de dcharges lectriques, nenlevez jamais
le capot de lquipement.
Si le capot de lquipement est enlev, la garantie cesse de
sappliquer.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

405
Appendix B Safety Instructions Safety Terms and Symbols
Safety Summary (English)

Safety Terms and Symbols
Terms on the Product
The following terms may appear on the product:
DANGER A personal injury hazard is immediately accessible as you
read the marking.
CAUTION A hazard to property, product, and other equipment is
present.
Symbols on the Product

The following symbols may appear on the product:
Indicates that dangerous high voltage is present within the
equipment enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock.
Indicates that user, operator or service technician should refer to
product manual(s) for important operating, maintenance, or service
instructions.
This is a prompt to note fuse rating when replacing fuse(s). The fuse
referenced in the text must be replaced with one having the ratings
indicated.
Identifies a protective grounding terminal which must be connected
to earth ground prior to making any other equipment connections.
Identifies an external protective grounding terminal which may be
connected to earth ground as a supplement to an internal
grounding terminal.
Indicates that static sensitive components are present which may
be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Use anti-static procedures,
equipment and surfaces during servicing.
406
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Appendix B Safety Instructions Danger
Danger
The following warning statements identify conditions or practices
that can result in personal injury or loss of life.
Mains Power Safety Instructions

RELIABLE EARTHING The product is designed for connection to an
earth-grounded AC outlet and must be correctly earthed through the
main outlet of cable. To avoid risk of electrical shock or equipment
damage, do not disconnect the grounding plug.
DC MAINS POWER CORD Use the power supply cords shipped with
the device. See section Power Supply and Protective Ground on

page 41.
AC MAINS POWER CORD AC mains cords are only shipped with
equipment if ordered. Otherwise, it is advisable to use mains cords as

described in section Power Supply and Protective Ground on page 41.
The mains power cords should comply with the legislation in force in the
country of installation.
MAINS POWER/CIRCUIT OVERLOADING For each branch circuit, the
connection panel should feature overload and earth fault protection and
a bipolar cut-off device or a differential circuit breaker.
MAINS POWER/CONNECTION PANEL The connection panel should
comply with the legislation in force in the country of installation.

Connection panel position in the rack must ensure that plugs and power
cords are within easy reach for switching off purposes.
OVERLOAD PROTECTION Power supply unit has integrated overload
protection which cannot be accessed or reset. In the event of a
malfunction, please contact the Thomson Video Networks Customer
Services Department.
POWER DISCONNECTING The equipment may or does feature more
than one power supply cords. To reduce the risk of electric shock,
disconnect all power supply cords before any intervention.
Rack Mount Safety Instructions

ELEVATED OPERATING AMBIENT If installed in a closed or multi-unit
rack assembly, the operating air ambient temperature of the rack
environment may be greater than room ambient. Provide proper
ventilation as described in section Mounting in Rack on page 32 to
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

407
Appendix B Safety Instructions Danger
keep the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum

operating temperature (Tma = 50C) specified by the manufacturer.
MECHANICAL LOADING Mounting of the equipment in the rack
should be such that a hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven
mechanical loading.
CIRCUIT OVERLOADING Considerations should be given to the
connection of the equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that
overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and
supply wiring.
RELIABLE EARTHING Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment
should be maintained. Particular attention should be given to supply

connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (e.g. use
of power strips).
L-PROFILES USE The equipment must not be fixed with its rack
mounting ears only. If you intend to install it in a rack, L-profiles are

required and you must observe the ventilation and safety instructions
described in section Mounting in Rack on page 32.
HANDLING PRECAUTIONS To avoid injury while installing the
equipment in a rack (or removing it from a rack), take all the necessary
precautions. Ask another person for help or use an adapted carry lift.
Operating Safety Instructions

DO NOT OPERATE IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE To avoid injury or
fire hazard, do not operate this equipment in an explosive environment
(atmosphere and materials).
DO NOT OPERATE IN WET/DAMP CONDITIONS To avoid electric
shock, this equipment should only be operated in dry conditions.
REPLACEMENT OF LITHIUM BATTERY OR RAM WITH BUILT-IN LITHIUM
BATTERY Some equipment contains a lithium battery or non-volatile
RAM with a built-in lithium battery.

In this equipment, if for any reason replacement of these components
proves necessary, please observe the following conditions:
The operation must only be performed by qualified personnel;
Only replace with components that have identical features;
Ensure the component is inserted the right way round;
Please dispose of dead components according to the manufacturers

instructions.
Danger of explosion if component is incorrectly replaced.
408
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Appendix B Safety Instructions Cautions
The lithium battery or RAM with a built-in lithium battery comply with
IATA and 49CFR regulations. They require no special declaration,
packaging or labeling.
Cautions
The following caution statements identify conditions or practices
that can result in damage to equipment or other property.
USE CORRECT POWER SOURCE Do not operate this equipment from

a power source that applies a voltage outside the range of voltage
specified for the product.
PROVIDE PROPER VENTILATION To prevent product overheating,
provide equipment ventilation in accordance with installation
instructions. All empty slots should be fitted with blank panels (mask
plates) so as not to impair ventilation.
DO NOT OPERATE WITH SUSPECTED EQUIPMENT FAILURE If you
suspect equipment damage or equipment failure, have the equipment
inspected by qualified service personnel.
ENSURE MAINS DISCONNECT As mains switch is not provided, the
power cord(s) of this equipment provide the means of disconnection.

The socket outlet must be installed near the equipment and must be
easily accessible.
ROUTE CABLE PROPERLY Route power cords and other cables so that
they are not likely to be damaged. Properly support heavy cable bundles
to avoid connector damage.
RETAIN ORIGINAL PACKAGING If equipment is returned to the
Customer Service Department, the faulty equipment must be packed
where possible in its original packaging (protective corners and boxes).
If you no longer have the packaging, the faulty equipment must be
protected against shocks during transportation. The Customer Service
Department examines packaging on arrival and can refuse to carry out
repairs if the packaging has been visibly damaged during transportation
and this has led to further damage in addition to the fault originally
noted.
Transportation costs and risks for equipment returns are borne by the
customer. Equipment should only be returned with a Return Material
Authorisation form.
WARRANTY COMPLIANCE Observe the following rules:
Only pluggable board replacement by a qualified personel is allowed.

In all other cases replace the equipment by a spare one.
Never remove the cover of the equipment.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

409
Appendix B Safety Instructions Sicherheit - Begriffe, Hinweise und Warnzeichen
Sicherheit - berblick (Deutsch)

Sicherheit - Begriffe, Hinweise und Warnzeichen
Am Produkt angebrachte Hinweise
Folgende Hinweise knnen sich am Produkt befinden:
GEFAHR Dieser Warnhinweis verweist auf eine unmittelbare
Verletzungsgefahr.
VORSICHT Dieser Warnhinweis verweist auf ein bestehendes Risiko
fr das Gert, Produkt oder Betriebsmittel.
Am Produkt angebrachte Warnzeichen

Folgende Warnzeichen knnen sich am Produkt befinden:
Warnung vor einer gefhrlichen elektrischen Spannung im
Gertegehuse, die stark genug sein kann, um eine
Stromschlaggefahr darzustellen.
Aufforderung an den Benutzer, Bediener oder Servicetechniker, die
in den Produkthandbchern angefhrten wichtigen Bedienungs-,
Wartungs- und Seviceanweisungen zur Kenntnis zu nehmen.
Aufforderung, beim Auswechseln von Sicherungen den
vorgeschriebenen Nennwert fr die im Text angefhrte Sicherung
einzuhalten.
Obligatorische Erdungsklemme zur ordnungsgemen Erdung,
bevor weitere Gerte angeschlossen werden knnen.
Zustzliche, nicht obligatorische externe Erdungsklemme als
Ergnzung zur internen Erdungsklemme.
Statikempfindliche Bauteile, die durch elektrostatische Entladung
(ESD) beschdigt werden knnen, sind durch ESD-geeignete
Verfahren, Werkzeuge und antistatische Oberflchen whrend der
Wartung zu schtzen.
410
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Appendix B Safety Instructions Gefahr
Gefahr
Folgende Warnungen verweisen auf Situationen und Handlungen,
die Verletzungs- oder Lebensgefahr zur Folge haben knnen.
Sicherheitshinweise bezglich des Stromnetzes

ORDNUNGSGEME ERDUNG Das Gert muss an einen geerdeten
AC-Ausgang angeschlossen und ordnungsgem ber den
Hauptkabelausgang
geerdet
werden.
Zum
Vermeiden
von
Stromschlaggefahr und Gerteschden den Schutzkontaktstecker nicht
herausziehen.
AC NETZKABEL Gerte werden ohne AC-Netzkabel geliefert. Diese
sind separat zu bestellen. Netzkabel sollten stets gem den

Anweisungen im Abschnitt Power Supply and Protective Ground auf
page 41 verwendet werden und den anwendbaren Rechtsvorschriften im
jeweiligen Installationsland entsprechen.
DC NETZKABEL Gerte werden mit AC-Netzkabel geliefert.
BERSPANNUNG DES STROMNETZES/STROMKREISES Fr jeden
Abzweigstromkreis ist an der Anschlussplatte ein berspannungs- und
Erdschlussschutz sowie eine doppelpolige Abschaltung oder ein
Differentialschutzschalter vorzusehen.
STROMNETZ/ANSCHLUSSPLATTE Die Anschlussplatte hat den
landesspezifischen Rechtsvorschriften zu gengen. Die Anschlussplatte

ist so im Rack zu montieren, dass alle Stecker und Netzkabel zum
Ausschalten leicht zugnglich sind.
BERSPANNUNGSSCHUTZ Das Netzanschlussgert ist mit einem
nicht zugnglichen und nicht zurcksetzbaren berspannungsschutz
ausgestattet. Fr die Behebung eventueller Strungen ist der
Kundendienst von Thomson Video Networks zustndig.
TRENNUNG DER STROMVERSORGUNG Einige Gerte verfgen ggf.
ber mehrere Spannungsversorgungskabel. Zur Verringerung der

Stromschlaggefahr sind vor jedem Eingriff smtliche Kabel
herauszuziehen.
Sicherheitshinweise bezglich Rackgehuse

BETRIEBSTEMPERATURUMGEBUNG Bei geschlossenen Racks bzw.
Mehrfach-Racks kann die Umgebungstemperatur im Rack hher als die
Raumtemperatur sein. Durch eine ausreichende Belftung gem
Abschnitt Mounting in Rack on page 32 ist dafr zu sorgen, dass die
vom Hersteller vorgeschriebene maximale Betriebstemperatur nicht
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

411
Appendix B Safety Instructions Gefahr
berschritten wird (Temperaturangaben siehe Abschnitt Technische

Daten des Benutzerhandbuchs, (Tma=50C)).
STROMKREIS-BERLASTUNG Beim Anschluss des Gerts an den
Stromkreis
sind
die
eventuellen
Auswirkungen
einer
Stromkreis-berlastung auf den berstromschutz und die elektrischen
Leitungen zu bercksichtigen.
ORDNUNGSGEME ERDUNG Rack-montierte Gerte sind
vorschriftsmig zu erden. Hierbei ist besonders auf Netzanschlsse
ohne direkten Anschluss an den Abzweigstromkreis zu achten (z. B. bei
der Verwendung von Mehrfachsteckdosen).
VERWENDUNG VON L-PROFILEN Zur ordnungsgemen Anbringung
des Gerts im Rack sind neben den Tragsen L-Profile zu verwenden.
Beim Einbau sind die im Abschnitt Mounting in Rack on page 32
angefhrten Sicherheitshinweise und Belftungsanweisungen zu
beachten.
SICHERHEITSMANAHMEN BEIM EIN-/AUSBAU Zur Vermeidung von
Verletzungen beim Ein- und Ausbau des Gerts in das bzw. aus dem Rack
sind alle erforderlichen Vorsichtsmanahmen zu treffen. Es sollte eine
weitere Person um Hilfe gebeten oder eine entsprechende
Hubvorrichtung verwendet werden.
Sicherheitshinweise bezglich des Betriebs

GERTEBETRIEB IN EXPLOSIONSGESCHTZTER UMGEBUNG Zur
Vermeidung von Verletzungen und Brandgefahr darf das Gert nicht in

explosionsgefhrdeten Umgebungen betrieben werden (Atmosphre
und Stoffe).
GERTEBETRIEB IN TROCKENER UMGEBUNG Zur Vermeidung von
Stromschlaggefahr darf das Gert nicht in feuchter oder dunstiger
Umgebung betrieben werden.
AUSWECHSELN DER LITHIUMBATTERIE ODER DES RAM-SPEICHERS
MIT EINGEBAUTER LITHIUMBATTERIE Einige Gerte besitzen eine
Lithiumbatterie bzw. einen nicht flchtigen RAM-Speicher mit

eingebauter Lithiumbatterie.
Sollten in diesen Gerten aus welchem Grund auch immer diese
Komponenten auszuwechseln sein, sind folgende Anweisungen zu
beachten:
412
Das Auswechseln hat durch qualifiziertes Personal zu erfolgen;
Dieselben bzw. gleichwertigen Komponenten verwenden;
Auf die richtige Positionierung der neuen Komponenten achten;
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Appendix B Safety Instructions Vorsichtshinweise
Alte Komponenten gem den Anweisungen des Herstellers

entsorgen.
Bei nicht ordnungsgem installierten Komponenten
besteht Explosionsgefahr.
Das Produkt enthlt eine Lithiumbatterie bzw. einen RAM-Speicher mit

eingebauter Lithiumbatterie, die mit den IATA- und 49CFR
Gefahrgutvorschriften bereinstimmen und keine besondere Erklrung,
Verpackung und Beschriftung erfordern.
Vorsichtshinweise
Folgende Vorsichtshinweise verweisen auf Situationen und
Handlungen, die zu Schden an den Gerten oder sonstigen
Betriebsmitteln fhren knnen.
Angemessene Stromquelle verwenden Das Gert darf nicht an eine
Stromquelle angeschlossen werden, die eine hhere oder untere

Spannung liefert, als fr das Produkt zulssig ist.
Gert ausreichend belften Um einer berhitzung des Gerts
vorzubeugen, ist fr eine angemessene Belftung gem den
Anweisungen in Abschnitt Installation des Benutzerhandbuchs zu
sorgen. Leere Gerteeinschbe sind mit Leerblenden zu verschlieen.
Gert nicht bei Strung betreiben Wird ein Gerteschaden oder eine
Strung vermutet, ist das Gert von qualifizierten Servicetechnikern zu
berprfen.
Trennung vom Stromnetz sicherstellen Verfgt das Gert ber keine(n)
Netzschalter, ist das Gert durch Ziehen des/der Netzkabel vom

Stromnetz zu trennen. Die Steckdose(n) ist/sind leicht zugnglich in
unmittelbarer Nhe des Gerts anzubringen.
Kabel richtig verlegen Netzkabel und sonstige Kabel sind so zu verlegen,
dass sie nicht beschdigt werden knnen. Schwere Kabelbndel sind
ordnungsgem abzusttzen, um Schden an den Steckverbindungen
vorzubeugen.
Originalverpackung aufbewahren Ist das Gert beschdigt und an den
Kundendienst zurckzuschicken, sollte zum sicheren Transport mglichst

die Orginalverpackung (mit Eckenschutz und Schutzhllen) verwendet
werden oder das Gert zumindest stosicher verpackt werden. Bei der
Annahme des Gertes untersucht der Kundendienst die Verpackung auf
eventuelle Transportschden und kann die Reparatur ablehnen, sollte die
Verpackung whrend des Tranports beschdigt worden sein und dies
zustzliche Schden am Gert verursacht haben.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
413
Appendix B Safety Instructions Vorsichtshinweise
Die mit der Rckgabe und den Transport verbundenen Kosten und
Risiken sind vom Kunden zu tragen. Dem eingeschickten Gert ist ein
ordnungsgem ausgefllter Rckgabeschein beizulegen.
Garantieleistung Folgende Regeln sind fr die Inanspruchnahme der
Garantie zu beachten:
414
Das Auswechseln der Steckkarte hat ausschlielich durch qualifiziertes

Personal zu erfolgen. In allen anderen Fllen ist das Gert durch ein
Ersatzgert zu ersetzen.
Niemals die Abdeckungen des Gertes abnehmen.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Appendix B Safety Instructions Consignes et symboles de scurit
Consignes de scurit (Franais)

Consignes et symboles de scurit
Signaltique appose sur le produit
La signaltique suivante peut tre appose sur le produit :
DANGER Risque de danger imminent pour lutilisateur.
MISE EN GARDE Risque dendommagement du produit, des
installations ou des autres quipements.
Symboles apposs sur le produit

Les symboles suivants peut tre apposs sur le produit :
Signale la prsence dune tension leve et dangereuse dans le
botier de lquipement ; cette tension peut tre suffisante pour
constituer un risque de dcharge lectrique.
Signale que lutilisateur, loprateur ou le technicien de
maintenance doit faire rfrence au(x) manuel(s) pour prendre
connaissance des instructions dutilisation, de maintenance ou
dentretien.
Il sagit dune invite prendre note du calibre du fusible lors du
remplacement de ce dernier. Le fusible auquel il est fait rfrence
dans le texte doit tre remplac par un fusible du mme calibre.
Identifie une borne de protection de mise la masse qui doit tre
raccorde correctement avant de procder au raccordement des
autres quipements.
Identifie une borne de protection de mise la masse qui peut tre
connecte en tant que borne de mise la masse supplmentaire.
Signale la prsence de composants sensibles llectricit statique
et qui sont susceptibles dtre endommags par une dcharge
lectrostatique. Utilisez des procdures, des quipements et des
surfaces antistatiques durant les interventions dentretien.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

415
Appendix B Safety Instructions Avertissements
Avertissements
Les avertissements suivants signalent des conditions ou des
pratiques susceptibles doccasionner des blessures graves, voire
mme fatales.
Instructions de scurit relatives lalimentation

secteur
MISE LA TERRE DE PROTECTION Assurez-vous que la mise la
terre est correctement effectue avant de mettre lappareil sous tension.
La mise la terre de protection se fait au travers du cordon
dalimentation. Pour viter tout risque de chocs lectriques ou de
dommage lquipement, ne dconnectez jamais la fiche de terre.
CORDON DALIMENTATION SECTEUR (AC) Les cordons secteur ne
sont fournis avec lquipement que sils ont t commands. Sinon

utilisez des cordons conformes ceux dcrits au paragraphe
Alimentation et terre de scurit, page 41. Les cordons secteur doivent
tre en conformit avec la lgislation du pays o le produit est install.
CORDON DALIMENTATION CONTINUE (DC) Utilisez les cordons
fournis avec lquipement. Sinon utilisez des cordons conformes ceux
dcrits au paragraphe Alimentation et terre de scurit, page 41.
ALIMENTATION SECTEUR ET PROTECTIONS LECTRIQUES Pour
chaque circuit lectrique, le cblage doit comporter une protection contre

les surintensits, une protection contre les dfauts de fuite la terre et un
systme de coupure des deux ples ou un disjoncteur diffrentiel.
ALIMENTATION SECTEUR/PANNEAU DE CONNEXION Le panneau de
connexion doit tre conforme la lgislation du pays o le produit est
install. Ce panneau de connexion doit tre plac dans la baie de telle
sorte que les prises et les cordons dalimentation soient porte de main
afin de permettre la mise hors tension de lquipement.
PROTECTION CONTRE LES SURINTENSITS Lalimentation lectrique
dispose dune protection intgre contre les surintensits, non

accessible et non rarmable. En cas de dysfonctionnement, contactez le
Dpartement Services Clients de Thomson Video Networks.
SOURCES DALIMENTATION ET INTERVENTION DANS LE CHSSIS
Le chssis peut tre aliment par deux sources dalimentation pourvues
pour chacune delles dun cordon dalimentation. Dconnectez tous les
cordons dalimentation avant toute intervention.
416
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Appendix B Safety Instructions Avertissements
Instructions de scurit relatives linstallation du

chssis dans une baie
TEMPRATURE DAMBIANCE LEVE Si lquipement est install
dans une baie, la temprature dambiance de lquipement peut tre

suprieure la temprature du local technique. Assurez-vous que la
ventilation est conforme ce qui est indiqu au paragraphe Montage en
baie, page 32 pour maintenir lquipement dans un environnement
compatible avec la temprature ambiante maximum spcifie par le
Constructeur (Tma=50C).
CHARGE MCANIQUE Si lquipement est install dans une baie,
veillez ce que les conditions de montage soient conformes ce qui est

indiqu au paragraphe Montage en baie, page 32.
CIRCUIT DE SURCHARGE Le produit est quip de circuit de
protection de surcharge des circuits dalimentation et de protection

contre les court-circuits. Appliquez les valeurs appropries indiques sur
la plaque signaltique.
LIAISON DE TERRE Assurez-vous de la continuit de la liaison de terre
pour lquipement mont en baie. Une attention particulire doit tre

apporte en cas dutilisation de nourrices ou de botiers de
raccordement.
EQUERRES INVERSES OU QUERRES EN L Il est strictement interdit
de supporter le chssis par ses oreilles. Si le chssis doit tre install
dans une baie, posez le chssis sur des querres inverses ou sur des
querres avec profil en L et observez les rgles de ventilation et de
scurit nonces au paragraphe Montage en baie, page 32.
PRCAUTIONS LORS DES MANIPULATIONS Prenez toutes les
prcautions ncessaires pour ne pas vous blesser lors du montage /

dmontage de lquipement dans une baie. Nhsitez pas demander
lassistance dune autre personne ou utiliser un chariot lvateur
adapt.
Instructions de scurit gnrales

ATMOSPHRE EXPLOSIVE Ne mettez en service le produit quen zone
exempte de tout risque dexplosion (atmosphre et matriaux).

HUMIDIT De faon viter tout risque de choc lectrique, ne mettez
en service le produit quen zone sche.

REMPLACEMENT DE PILE AU LITHIUM OU DE MMOIRE AVEC PILE AU
LITHIUM INCORPORE Certains quipements contiennent une pile au
lithium o une mmoire sauvegarde avec une pile au lithium

incorpore.
Dans ces quipements, si pour une raison quelconque le remplacement
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

417
Appendix B Safety Instructions Mises en garde
de ce composant savre ncessaire, il convient de respecter les

conditions suivantes :
Lopration ne doit tre ralise que par un personnel qualifi;
Le composant doit tre remplac par un composant de mmes

caractristiques;
Le sens de montage du composant doit tre respect;
La mise au rebut du composant usag doit seffectuer suivant les

consignes du fabricant du composant.
Il y a risque dexplosion si le composant est mont de
manire incorrecte.
La batterie au lithium ou la mmoire avec pile au lithium incorpore sont

conformes aux rglementations de l'IATA et du 49CFR. Elles ne
ncessitent pas de dclaration, demballage ni dtiquetage spcifiques.
Mises en garde
Les mises en garde suivantes signalent les conditions et les
pratiques susceptibles doccasionner des dommages lquipement
et aux installations.
SOURCE DALIMENTATION ADQUATE Ne branchez pas ce produit
une source dalimentation qui dlivre une tension hors de la plage de
tension nominale spcifie pour ce produit.
VENTILATION ADQUATE Pour viter tout risque de surchauffe,
ventilez correctement le produit. Reportez-vous au paragraphe Montage

en baie, page 32. Pour ne pas perturber la ventilation, tous les
emplacements non occups par des cartes doivent tre obturs par des
caches de bouchement.
DYSFONCTIONNEMENT SUSPECT Si vous constatez une anomalie,
faites procder une vrification par un personnel qualifi.
MARCHE/ARRT DE LQUIPEMENT Le chssis ne comporte pas
dinterrupteur Marche/Arrt. Les cordons dalimentation doivent tre
porte de main afin de permettre la mise hors tension de lquipement.
ACHEMINEZ LES CBLES CORRECTEMENT Acheminez les cbles
dalimentation et les autres cbles de telle faon quils ne risquent pas

dtre endommags. Supportez correctement les enroulements de
cbles afin de ne pas endommager les connecteurs.
EMBALLAGE DORIGINE En cas de retour au Dpartement Service
Clients, l'quipement dfectueux doit tre plac autant que possible dans
418
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Appendix B Safety Instructions Mises en garde
son emballage d'origine (cales de protection et botes). Si vous ne

disposez plus de l'emballage, l'quipement dfectueux doit tre protg
afin de supporter les chocs pendant le transport. Notre Dpartement
Service Clients examine les emballages l'arrive et pourra refuser
d'effectuer une rparation en cas de dfaut visuel sur l'emballage d au
transport et ayant entran de nouveaux dfauts par rapport la nature
de l'anomalie que vous avez constate.
Il est rappel que le transport pour le retour des quipements est la
charge et aux risques du Client. Lquipement ne doit tre retourn
quaccompagn dune autorisation de retour dquipement RMA (Return
Material Authorisation).
ANNULATION DE GARANTIE Respectuez les rgles suivantes pour ne
pas annuler la garantie :
Seul le remplacement des cartes enfichables et qui ne requiert pas le

dmontage du capot est autoris. Dans tous les autres cas, remplacez
lquipement par un quipement de rechange.
Ne dmontez jamais le capot.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

419
Appendix B Safety Instructions Specific Safety Instructions
Safety Instructions for Finland, Norway,

Sweden
Specific Safety Instructions
SPECIFIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR FINLAND Laite on liitettv
suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan.
SPECIFIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR NORWAY Apparatet m
tilkoples jordet stikkontakt.

SPECIFIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR SWEDEN Apparaten skall
anslutas till jordat uttag.
420
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

C
Regulatory Notices
Appendix
FCC Emission Control

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by Thomson Video Networks
Group can affect emission compliance and could void the users
authority to operate this equipment.
Canadian EMC Notice of Compliance

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference
Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Le prsent appareil numrique nmet pas de bruits radiolectriques
dpassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe
A prscrites dans le Rglement sur le brouillage radiolectrique dict
par le ministre des Communications du Canada.
EN55022 Class A Warning

In a domestic environment, products that comply with Class A may cause
radio interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

421
Appendix C Regulatory Notices VCCI Class A Warning
VCCI Class A Warning
422
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

D
Customer Services
Appendix
Introduction
This chapter indicates what you should do if you have a problem with
equipment, whether you need to repair it, to return it or to dispose of it.

Support Center Contacts..........................................................page 424
Warranty .....................................................................................page 425
Services.......................................................................................page 426
Spare Parts .................................................................................page 426
Returning Equipment................................................................page 426
Repackaging for Shipment ......................................................page 426
Recycling the Product ...............................................................page 428
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

423
Appendix D Customer Services Support Center Contacts
Support Center Contacts

Our international call center provides Thomson team members to
answer your product and customer service questions. It is available by
phone or e-mail 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
The Thomson call center phone numbers are available on our website
(Service & Support / Contact Support page):
http://www.thomson-networks.com
After your call is logged by our call center, you are called back by a
technical support engineer.
424
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Appendix D Customer Services Warranty
To contact the Thomson support center by email please write to us at:

Email: contact.support@thomson-networks.com
To ensure fast customer service please include the following information
when contacting Thomson by email:
Your contract number
Your geographical location (i.e. country you are in)
The name of your product
Any additional system configuration information relating to

your product
Warranty
Thomson Video Networks guarantees that the product will be free from
defects in materials and workmanship, and that the product and/or
software will conform to the applicable specifications, within the
duration of the warranty.
The product is under warranty for a period of twelve (12) months.
The software is under warranty for a period of ninety (90) days.
Concerning the software warranty, Thomson guarantees that, for a
period of 90 days, after the products delivery date, or after a systems
Site Acceptance Test, the physical media will be free from defects and
viruses and the embedded software will conform to applicable
specifications. There is no warranty that Thomson software will be
error-free. The purchase of a software license entitles the customer to use
the Thomson software release shipped at the time the license is
purchased. Rights to new releases (upgrades) are only provided through
a Thomson OneCare service level agreement or can be priced upon
request.
Concerning third party firmware & software (e.g. Java,
SunMicrosystems, etc.), when supplied with a Thomson product,
Thomson is not responsible for supplying any support or information
regarding said software.
The Distributor Warranty Policy
distributorship agreement applies.
described
in
the
individual
For details on the Thomson warranty policy, please contact your

Thomson sales representative (list of sales representatives available on
the Thomson website at: http://www.thomson-networks.com/
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

425
Appendix D Customer Services Services
Services
Training and assistance service offers are available and can be quoted for
upon request.
Thomson OneCare service level agreement offers apply to this product.
Spare Parts
The spare parts are
the base unit of the product with no MPEG board inside
the MPEG board(s)
There are no other subsets available as spare parts.
Returning Equipment
Please contact the call center with questions about the process for
returning Thomson equipment. Within the standard Thomson warranty
period, there is a 30 day turnaround (factory in/out) guarantee for repairs.
Unless specifically agreed, cost and risks for return shipment of
equipment are borne by the Customer. The faulty device must be packed
where possible in its original packaging (protective corners and boxes) If
you no longer have the packaging, the faulty device must be protected
against shocks during the transportation. The company may not be held
liable for any consequence resulting from non-observance of this return
procedure. The company will not be able to guarantee a repair time for
any RMA request for which we do not have a clear and complete fault
description. If no fault is found, a fixed price will be raised to cover
shipping and testing of the unit.
Repackaging for Shipment

Retain original packaging Unless specifically agreed, cost and risks for
return shipment of equipment are borne by the Customer. The faulty
device must be packed where possible in its original packaging
(protective corners and boxes) If you no longer have the packaging, the
faulty device must be protected against shocks during the transportation.
The company may not be held liable for any consequence resulting from
non-observance of this return procedure. The Thomson Customer
Service Department will examine packaging on arrival and can refuse to
carry out repairs if the packaging has been visibly damaged during
426
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Appendix D Customer Services Long Term Product Support
transportation and this has led to further damage in addition to the fault
originally noted.
Long Term Product Support

Long-Term Product Support (LTPS) is the Thomson support provided
during the product life cycle, starting at the announcement of the end of
product manufacture and ending at the announcement of the end of
services.
After product phase-out announcement, LTPS data is provided by the
Thomson Regional Sales and Field Services organizations.
The Thomson OneCare SLA commitment concerning LTPS data and
associated services may differ from those included as part of the general
Thomson LTPS policy. In such cases, LTPS data and associated services
governed by the terms and conditions of OneCare contracts override the
general LTPS policy.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

427
Appendix D Customer Services Recycling the Product
Recycling the Product

Thomson Video Networks has developed a comprehensive
end-of-life product take back program for recycling or
disposal of end-of-life products. Our program meets the
requirements of the European Unions WEEE Directive and,
in the United States, those of the Environmental Protection
Agency, individual state or local agencies.
All Thomson Video Networks products are labeled per the
CENELEC WEEE marking standard EN 50419. In addition,
Thomson Video Networks ensures that all requirements for
registration, reporting, design and data tracking are
completed to meet the objectives of the WEEE directive.
Under the European Union's Waste Electrical Equipment
and Electronic (WEEE) directive, Thomson Video Networks
is defined as a producer in the business-to-business
category and its products fall under a Category III
classification.
Thomson Video Networks guarantees the proper disposal
of your end-of-life products. A Certificate of Recycling or a
Certificate of Destruction, depending on the ultimate
disposition of the product, can be sent upon request.
Thomson Video Networks will be responsible for all costs
associated with recycling and disposal, including freight,
however you are responsible for the removal of the
equipment from your facility and packing the equipment
ready for pickup.
When the equipment is at end of life, it must be recycled.
You can:
- put it in your regular circuit as for your other equipments
- give it to our partner who will ensure the collection and
the recycling. Just call it to indicate the type and the
number of equipments, as well as the place of removal. You
can find this contact on our website :
http://www.thomson-networks.com/
428
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

E
Alarms
Appendix
Introduction
This chapter gives the list of alarms which can be displayed on the
CP6000. For each alarm the diagnostics, action to be performed and
alarm severity are given.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

429
Appendix E Alarms
430
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00
Probable Cause
1353/Audio standard mismatch
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Audio standard mismatch
Wording (French)
Norme audio incompatible
Diagnosis (English)
Input standard is different from the declared standard.
Diagnosis (French)
La norme dtecte est diffrente de celle dfinie dans la configuration.
Action (English)
Change preferred standard in configuration or change standard of input signal
Action (French)
Redfinir la norme dans la configuration ou modifier la norme du signal d'entre.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:
Selectable
Upstream autobackup:
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
Page 2
Impossible
Probable Cause
1354/Audio standard unknown
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Audio standard unknown
Wording (French)
Norme vido inconnue
Diagnosis (English)
The audio standard is unknown.
Diagnosis (French)
La norme audio est inconnue.
Action (English)
Check input signal or change standard configuration of input signal
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal dentre ou modifier la configuration standard du signal dentre.
Current autobackup:
Selectable

Page 3
Impossible
Probable Cause
1230/bitrate overflow
Category
Quality of service
Default severity
minor
Wording (English)
Bitrate overflow
Wording (French)
Dpassement du dbit
Diagnosis (English)
Bit rate too high (above 200Mb/s for NFP)
Diagnosis (French)
Dbit trop lv (suprieur 200 Mb/s pour NFP)
Action (English)
Check signal bit rate
Action (French)
Vrifier le dbit du signal
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[2] SI bitrate overflow %2[%3]Kb/s
[6] Bitrate overflow [%5]Kb/s
[35] PID %1 stopped
[111] Bitrate overflow
[117] bitrate overflow
[121] Data overflow on UDP port %1
[135] Tributary rate too high
[140] Input bitrate overflow
[140] Input bitrate overflow
[145] Overflow
[190] Input overflow
[190] Tributary rate too high
[190] Service cell buffer overflow
[190] Service packet buffer overflow
Page 4
Selectable

[2] Dbordement dbit SI %2[%3]Kb/s
[6] Dbordement dbit [%5]Kb/s
[35] PID %1 bloqu
[111] Dpassement du dbit
[117] Dpassement du dbit
[121] Dbordement dbit sur port UDP %1
[135] Dbit affluent trop haut
[140] Dbit d'entre trop important
[140] Dbit d'entre trop important
[145] Vitesse trop leve.
[190] Dbordement de l'interface
[190] Dbit affluent trop haut
[190] Dbordement du buffer cellule service
[190] Dbordement du buffer paquet service
Page 5
Probable Cause
1229/bitrate underflow
Category
Quality of service
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Bitrate underflow
Wording (French)
Dbit trop faible
Diagnosis (English)
Bit rate too low (below 1,5Mb/s for NFP)
Diagnosis (French)
Dbit trop faible (infrieur 1,5 Mb/s pour NFP)
Action (English)
Check received signal bit rate
Action (French)
Vrifier le dbit du signal
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[34] Video bitrate too low
[48] GID %1 underflow [%3kb/s]
[49] PID %1 underflow [%3kb/s,GID %2]
[50] SRV %1 underflow [%3kb/s,GID %2]
[51] %1 underflow [%3kb/s,GID %2]
[77] DATA-%1 underflow %2[%3]Kb/s
[102] Bitrate underflow
[103] Bitrate underflow
[117] bitrate underflow
[135] Tributary rate too low
[140] Input bitrate underflow
[140] Input bitrate underflow
[155] Filtering CBR bitrate too low
[190] Tributary rate too low
Page 6
Selectable

[34] Dbit vido trop faible
[48] Sous dbit GID %1[%3kb/s]
[49] Sous dbit PID %1[%3kb/s,GID %2]
[50] Sous dbit SRV %1[ %3kb/s,GID %2]
[51] Sous dbit %1[%3kb/s,GID %2]
[77] Carence DATA-%1 %2[%3]Kb/s
[102] Dbit trop faible
[135] Dbit affluent trop bas
[140] Dbit d'entre trop faible
[140] Dbit d'entre trop faible
[155] Dbit de filtrage CBR trop faible
[190] Dbit affluent trop bas
Page 7
Probable Cause
1091/buffer overflow
Category
Equipment
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Buffer overflow
Wording (French)
Dbordement de buffer
Diagnosis (English)
FIFO or buffer overflow detected
Diagnosis (French)
Le rsultat du calcul d'un ECM pour la voie (identifie par %1) sur le gnrateur d'ECM
(identifi par %2) n'est pas parvenu pour le prendre en compte pour la prochaine priode
d'embrouillage. L'embrouillage des services du groupe d'accs s'effectue avec le dernier ECM
calcul valide.
Action (English)
Reboot the device. If the alarm registers again, contact Customer Service.
Action (French)
Vrifier que le nombre de cartes mres associes au gnrateur d'ECM en question est
suffisant.
Current autobackup:
Impossible

[9] COUPLER FIFO overflow
[9] OUTPUT FIFO overflow
[9] FIFO overflow
[66] Input buffer overflow
[97] Computed ECM buffer overflow
[155] TS Buffer overflow
[155] Decoder Buffer Overflow
Page 8
Selectable

[9] Dbordement FIFO COUPLEUR
[9] Dbordement FIFO OUTPUT
[9] Dbordement FIFO
[66] Sur dbit du buffer d'entre
[97] Trop de calcul en stock
[155] Overflow du buffer TS
[155] Overflow du flux de sortie du codeur
Page 9
Probable Cause
1110/buffer underflow
Category
Equipment
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Buffer underflow
Wording (French)
Buffer sous aliment
Diagnosis (English)
FIFO or buffer underflow detected
Diagnosis (French)
FIFO ou buffer sous aliment
Action (English)
Action (French)
Current autobackup:
Impossible

[155] Decoder Buffer Underflow
[155] Underflow du flux de sortie du codeur
Page 10
Impossible
Probable Cause
1040/component error
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Component error
Wording (French)
Erreur de composante
Diagnosis (English)
Component error.
Diagnosis (French)
Erreur de composant.
Action (English)
Check input stream
Action (French)
Vrifier le flux d'entre.
Current autobackup:
Impossible

[107] component error
[107] Erreur de composant
Page 11
Impossible
Probable Cause
160/configurationOrCustomisationError
Category
Processing error
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
Configuration or customization error
Wording (French)
Erreur de configuration ou de personnalisation
Diagnosis (English)
Configuration or customization error detected.
Diagnosis (French)
Erreur de configuration ou de personnalisation dtect.
Action (English)
Check consistency between configuration of board or equipment declared and the booad or
equipment physically installed. If the problem persists, contact Customer Service.
Action (French)
Vrifier la cohrence entre la configuration de la carte ou de lquipement dclar et la carte
ou lquipement physiquement prsent. Si le problme persiste, contacter le Service Clients.
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[34] Flextream configuration error
[63] Failed to update the configuration
[64] Failed to update the configuration
[66] Output port configuration failed
[87] Configuration or customisation error
[87] replaceable unit configuration mismatch
[94] Configuration or customisation error
[134] Board programmation lost
[135] Board programmation lost
[136] Board programmation lost (code lost)
[145] Transmit parameter signal out of loop
Page 12
Selectable

[34] Erreur de configuration du Flextream
[63] Impossible de changer la configuration
[64] Impossible de changer la configuration
[66] Echec de la configuration du port de sortie
[87] Erreur de configuration ou de personnalisation
[87] Configuration de l'unit incompatible
[94] Erreur de configuration ou de personnalisation
[134] Perte de la programmation
[145] Paramtres de transmission non synchronisable
Page 13
Probable Cause
202/congestion
Category
Quality of service
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Congestion
Wording (French)
Congestion
Diagnosis (English)
Incorrect resource/interface bitrate or service bandwidth too high for the specified traffic
contract.
Diagnosis (French)
Dbit de la ressource/l'interface incorrect.
Action (English)
Increase bitrate or check your throughput configuration in the complete system
Action (French)
Augmenter le dbit.
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[102]
[103]
[110]
[111]
[115]
[116]
[118]
[135]
[183]
[188]
[189]
[190]
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Page 14
Selectable

[102]
[103]
[110]
[111]
[115]
[116]
[118]
[135]
[183]
[188]
[189]
[190]
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Page 15
Probable Cause
22/connectionEstablishmentError
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Connection establishment error
Wording (French)
Erreur d'tablissement de connexion
Diagnosis (English)
Connection has been broken or cannot be established.
Diagnosis (French)
La connexion a t rompue ou ne peut tre tablie
Action (English)
Check the connection. If the problem persists, contact Customer Service.
Action (French)
Vrifier la connexion. Si le problme persiste, contacter le Service Clients.
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[27] communication problem
[34] Communication problem
[34] DSP communication problem
[34] Dynamux problem with master
[43] Communication problem SIMS->MUX
[43] Communication problem MUX->SIMS
[45] communication problem
[86] TCP connection from the Mediation Unit impossible
[94] Connection establishment error
[134] Board not responding
Page 16
Selectable

[145] No response
[145] Tuner fail
[145] No response
[145] No response
[146] No response
[147] No response
[168] Communication problem with Mediation Unit
[168] Device does not respond
[207] Application Equipment Interface does not respond
[27] Problme de communication
[34] Problme communication VTCE
[34] Problme communication DSP
[34] Problme de communication Dynamux avec le matre
[43] Problme communication SIMS->MUX
[43] Problme communication MUX->SIMS
[45] probleme de communication
[86] Connexion impossible avec l'Unit de Mdiation
[94] Erreur dtablissement de connexion
[134] Problme dialogue
[145] Pas de rponse
[145] Communication impossible avec le demodulateur
[145] Pas de rponse
[145] Pas de rponse
[146] Pas de rponse
[147] Pas de rponse
[168] Problme communication avec l'Unit de Mdiation
[168] Pas de rponse de l'quipement
[183] Problme de dialogue
[207] Lapplication Interface Equipement ne rpond plus
Page 17
Probable Cause
1074/Corrected error
Category
Communications
Default severity
minor
Wording (English)
Corrected error
Wording (French)
Erreur corrige
Diagnosis (English)
The board is delivering a fully valid signal while frame losses are corrected with the FEC
algorithm.
Diagnosis (French)
La carte fournit un signal parfaitement valide alors que des pertes de trame sont corriges par
l'algorithme FEC.
Action (English)
Check the transmission quality to improve the received signal conformity.
Action (French)
Vrifier la qualit de la transmission pour amliorer la conformit du signal reu.
Current autobackup:
Impossible

[115] Corrected error
[116] Corrected error
[115] Erreur corrige
[116] Erreur corrige
Page 18
Impossible
Probable Cause
3/degradedSignal
Category
Communications
Default severity
minor
Wording (English)
Degraded signal
Wording (French)
Signal dgrad
Diagnosis (English)
Input signal is degraded or fluctating.
Diagnosis (French)
Lorsque cet vnement se produit, le champ Problme spcifique indique un code interne
utilis pour dterminer la cause de la dgradation du signal.
Action (English)
Check input signal and cable(s). May be due to unexpected switch behaviour
Action (French)
Vrifier le(s) cble(s) et le signal d'entre. Peut tre d une commutation intempestive du
signal .
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[110] Degraded signal
[120] Degraded signal
[137] Signal low
[145] Fluctuating input
[155] Satellite BER too high
[155] Eb/N0 too low
[110] Signal dgrad
[120] Signal dgrad
[137] Signal faible
Page 19
Selectable

[145] Entre fluctuante
[155] Taux d'erreur trop lev
[155] Eb/N0 trop faible
Page 20
Probable Cause
1075/hardware failure
Category
Equipment
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
Hardware failure
Wording (French)
Dfaillance matrielle
Diagnosis (English)
One or more key hardware modules of the unit are not responding.
Diagnosis (French)
Un ou plusieurs modules matriels cls de la carte ne rpondent pas.
Action (English)
Reboot the equipment. If the alarm registers again, contact Customer Service
Action (French)
Rebooter l'quipement. Si l'alarme est toujours leve, contacter le Service Clients.
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[17]
[26]
[34]
[34]
[34]
[34]
[34]
[45]
[45]
[63]
[64]
[95]
[97]
[97]
Encoder out of use

Encoder out of use
Encoder out of use
HDLC link out of use
1rst pass encoding out of use
Helper channel out of use
Bad SSEB MIGHT for 4150
encoder C1P out of use
Bad SuperEncoder MIGHT for 4150
Failed to update the alarm LED
Failed to update the alarm LED
Hardware failure
ECM computed without associated card
ECM computed without associated card
Page 21
Selectable

[97] the ciphering module has broken down
[97] ECMG out of order
[97] no ciphering module
[97] smart card unknown
[97] ECMG is shutting down
[98] ECM computed without associated card
[98] ECMG out of order
[98] no ciphering module
[98] smart card unknown
[98] ECMG is shutting down
[102] Hardware failure
[132] Ancillary data block <-> composite decoder link failed
[132] Automatic calibration failure
[132] LTCe FIFO overflow failure
[132] Ancillary data processing hardware default
[132] Front panel <-> User Maintenance link fail synthesis
[132] Front panel <-> Supervisor link fail synthesis
[132] Front panel <-> CIVA link fail synthesis
[138] Hardware malfunction from the synthetiser
[138] Hardware malfunction from the RF phase lock DRO
[138] Hardware malfunction from the 100MHz local oscillator PLL
[138] Hardware malfunction from the 70MHz local oscillator PLL
[138] MC&C board internal alarm
[138] Modulator board internal alarm
[138] Function/module interface internal alarm
[138] Unexpected architecture
[140] System fault
[144] Hardware error
[144] MMI initialisation failed
[144] Input initialisation failed
[144] Euroboard input failed
[144] TS initialisation failed
[144] CA initialisation failed
[144] DEC initialisation failed
[147] 625 Ln no response
[147] 525 Ln no response
[147] PTS no response
[147] Genlock no response
[148] No response
[148] No response
[148] No response
[149] No response
[149] Audio not running
[150] No response
[151] No response
[151] No response
[151] No response
[151] No response
[154] Hardware failure (%3)
[173] NV RAM Fault
[173] Watchdog Timer Fault
[173] Program Code Checksum Error
[179] Bad NVRAM Checksum. (All MCC options invalidated)
[180] Factory configuration problem on MCC board
Page 22

[183]
[184]
[190]
[191]
Hardware failure
Hardware failure
Hardware failure
Hardware failure

[17] Encodeur hors service
[26] Compresseur HS
[34] Compresseur HS
[34] Lien HDLC HS
[34] Codage premire passe HS
[34] Helper channel HS
[34] Mauvaise SSEB MIGHT pour 4150
[45] compresseur C1P hors service
[45] Mauvais SuperEncoder MIGHT pour 4150
[63] Impossible de mettre jour la LED indiquant une alarme
[64] Impossible de mettre jour la LED indiquant une alarme
[95] Dfaillance matrielle
[97] Calcul ECM sans carte associe
[97] Module de calcul HS
[97] ECMG HS
[97] Pas de module de calcul
[97] Carte fille inconnue
[97] L'ECMG est en cours d'arrt
[98] ECMG HS
[98] Pas de module de calcul
[98] Carte fille inconnue
[98] L'ECMG est en cours d'arrt
[132] Dfaut liaison bloc donnes auxiliaires-dcodeur composite
[132] Echec de lautocalibration
[132] Dbordement FIFO dentre LTCe
[132] Problme dans le bloc donnes auxiliaires
[132] Dfaut sur liaison face avant - liaison maintenance utilisateur
[132] Dfaut sur liaison face avant - liaison dexploitation distante
[132] Dfaut sur liaison face avant - carte interne de traitement
[138] Dysfonctionnement hardware du synthtiseur
[138] Dysfonctionnement hardware de la RF phase lock DRO
[138] Problme hardware sur l'oscillateur local 100MHz
[138] Dysfonctionnement hardware sur l'oscillateur local 70MHz
[138] Alarme interne la carte MC&C
[138] Alarme interne la carte de modulation
[138] Alarme interne au module dinterface
[138] Architecture non reconnue
[140] Dfaut systme
[144] Erreur matrielle
[144] Linitialisation du module MMI a chou
[144] Linitialisation du module dentre a chou
[144] Entre Euroboard en panne
[144] Linitialisation du module TS a chou
[144] Linitialisation du module de contrle daccs a chou
[144] Linitialisation du module de decodage a chou
Page 23

[147] 625 Ln, pas de rponse
[147] 525 Ln pas de rponse
[147] PTS pas de rponse
[147] Genlock pas de rponse
[148] Pas de rponse
[148] Pas de rponse
[148] Pas de rponse
[149] Pas de rponse
[149] Audio ne fonctionne pas
[150] Pas de rponse
[151] Pas de rponse
[151] Pas de rponse
[151] Pas de rponse
[151] Pas de rponse
[154] Dfaillance matrielle (%3)
[173] Dfaut de la NV RAM
[173] Dfaut de l'horloge interne de l'organe de surveillance
[173] Checksum du code du programme erron
[179] Mauvais checksum de la NVRAM. Toutes options du MCC dsactives
[180] Problme de configuration usine de la carte MCC
Page 24
Probable Cause
123/highTemperature
Category
Environmental
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
High temperature
Wording (French)
Temprature leve
Diagnosis (English)
Internal temperature is over maximum ratings. The device may be permanently damaged if
kept in that state.
Diagnosis (French)
La temprature interne excde la limite maximum. L'quipement risque d'tre dfinitivement
endommag si son tat n'est pas modifi.
Action (English)
Check if the ventilation is running, if air inlet and outlet are not obstructed, and ambiant
external temperature is below 40C.
Action (French)
S'assurer que la ventilation fonctionne, que les entres et sorties d'air ne sont pas obstrues
et que la temprature ambiante externe est infrieure 40 C. Autre action possible:
rinitialiser l'quipement et attendre que la temprature se stabilise pendant 25 minutes. Si
l'alarme se produit de nouveau, mettre hors tension le chassis contenant l'quipement
concern et contacter le Customer Service.
Current autobackup:
Impossible

[11] Excessive temperature
[94] High temperature
Page 25
Selectable

[132] CIVA board overheating
[133] Overheating
[137] Temperature high
[146] Excessive temperature
[11] temprature excessive
[94] Temprature leve
[132] Surchauffe de la carte
[133] Temprature excessive
[146] Temprature excessive
Page 26
Probable Cause
1067/Link down
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Link down
Wording (French)
Liaison coupe
Diagnosis (English)
The line transceiver of the board cannot lock on signal. Note : This event, as many other
reception alarms, is generally produced by transmission problems in the network. It can also
comes for a device partial failure. The quality of transmission shall be analysed by skilled staff.
A check of network state shall be made. If no cause is directly detected there, a transmission
analyser shall be used in place of the device for comparison. If a test system is not available a
device exchange can be performed. Hereunder analysis proposal covers only trivial causes.
Diagnosis (French)
Lmetteur-rcepteur de lignes de la carte ne peut pas verrouiller le signal. Remarque : cet
vnement est gnralement d des problmes de transmission du rseau. Il peut
galement provenir dune dfaillance partielle de lquipement. La qualit de la transmission
doit tre analyse par un personnel qualifi. Ltat du rseau doit galement tre vrifi. Si
aucune cause nest directement dtecte de cette manire, remplacer lquipement par un
analyseur de transmission et effectuer une comparaison. Si aucun systme de test nest
disponible, il est possible dchanger les quipements.
Action (English)
Check if the good cable is plug on the board. If signal conformity is proved, de plug and re plug
the board. Wait until it is recognised by the control and command software.
Action (French)
Sassurer que le cble appropri est correctement raccord la carte. Si la conformit du
signal est tablie, retirer, puis rinsrer la carte.
Current autobackup:
Impossible
Page 27
Impossible

[111] Link down
[116] Link down
[135] Unconnected linked tributary
[136] Unconnected linked tributary
[155] Fast ethernet link down
[183] No data link
[184] Lower layer down
[187] SSCOP link down
[187] ILMI link down
[111] Liaison coupe
[116] Liaison coupe
[135] Affluent li non connect
[136] Affluent li non connect
[155] Liaison coupe
[183] Pas de lien data
[184] Couche infrieure HS
[187] Perte du lien de signalisation
[187] Perte du lien ILMI
Page 28
Probable Cause
8/lossOfSignal
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Loss of signal
Wording (French)
Perte de signal
Diagnosis (English)
No input signal detected on physical interface.
Diagnosis (French)
Pas de signal d'entre dtect sur l'interface physique.
Action (English)
Check signal at the input physical interface and check cable.
Action (French)
Vrifier le cble et le signal dentre sur le connecteur physique.
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[7] no signal in PES INTF
[17] No SDI signal
[25] No signal
[26] No analog signal
[26] No SDI signal
[27] no signal
[27] no reference signal
[34] No SDI signal
[45] no SDI signal
[47] Internal secure mode activated
[63] Signal is lost at the input port %2
[64] Signal is lost at the input port %2
[110] Loss of signal
Page 29
Selectable

[132] No signal on reference input
[132] No signal on digital video input
[132] No signal on analog video input
[134] Signal lost
[135] Tributary lost
[137] Input data loss
[138] ASI optical signal loss
[138] LVDS input signal loss
[140] Input Loss
[140] Input Loss
[145] Absence RF
[145] No signal
[145] No G703 signal
[146] No input
[147] No signal
[154] No signal is detected (input %1)
[186] Signal lost
[190] Tributary lost
[7] Aucun signal sur PES INTF
[17] Pas de signal SDI
[25] Aucun signal en entre
[26] Pas de signal analogique
[27] Pas de signal analogique
[27] Absence de synchro
[45] absence signal SDI
[47] Scurisation interne active
[63] Pas de signal sur lentre %2
[64] Pas de signal sur lentre %2
[110] Perte de signal
[132] Absence de la rfrence synchroniseur
[132] Absence de la vido incidente numrique
[132] Absence vido analogique dentre
[134] Perte du signal
[135] Perte du signal affluent
[137] Donnes perdues
[138] Perte du signal ASI optique
[138] Perte du signal LVDS
[140] Pas de signal en entre
[140] Pas de signal en entre
[145] Absence RF
[145] Absence de signal
[145] Pas de signal G703
[146] Pas dentre
[147] Pas de signal
[154] Pas de signal dtect (entre %1)
[186] Perte du signal
[190] Perte du signal affluent
Page 30
Probable Cause
1072/Loss of TS synchro
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Loss of TS synchro
Wording (French)
Perte de synchro TS
Diagnosis (English)
Loss of TS synchro.
Diagnosis (French)
Perte de synchro TS.
Action (English)
Collect extra information in the log and contact Customer Service for analysis and repair.
Action (French)
Recueillir des informations supplmentaires dans le journal et contacter le Customer Service
pour analyse et rparation.
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[24] Synchro loss
[110] Loss of TS synchro
[135] MPEG tributary synchro lost
[136] Output MPEG packet synchro lost
[145] No synchronisation
[145] Unrecoverable transport stream
[145] No MPEG sync
[151] No sync
[155] Loss of synchronization
Page 31
Selectable

[24] Perte synchro
[110] Perte de synchro TS
[135] Perte de la synchronisation MPEG
[136] Perte de synchro paquet en sortie
[145] Synchronisation impossible
[145] Signal dentre non rcuprable
[145] Pas de synchro MPEG
[151] Pas de synchro
[155] Perte de synchronisation
Page 32
Probable Cause
1039/no component
Category
Communications
Default severity
warning
Wording (English)
No component
Wording (French)
Pas de composante
Diagnosis (English)
No component.
Diagnosis (French)
Pas de composant.
Action (English)
Check input stream
Action (French)
Vrifier le flux d'entre.
Current autobackup:
Impossible

[107] no component
[108] no component
[109] no component
[107] Pas de composant
Page 33
Selectable
Probable Cause
1062/no embedded signal
Category
Communications
Default severity
minor
Wording (English)
No embedded signal
Wording (French)
Pas de signal insr
Diagnosis (English)
No embedded signal.
Diagnosis (French)
Pas de signal insr.
Action (English)
Check input signal
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal d'entre.
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[17] No embedded audio input
[104] No embedded signal
[17] Pas dentre avec audio insre
[104] Pas de signal insr
Page 34
Selectable
Probable Cause
1287/No stream received
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
No stream received
Wording (French)
Aucun flux reu
Diagnosis (English)
No TS packets from internal source.
Diagnosis (French)
Absence de rception de paquets MPEG en provenance dune source interne.
Action (English)
Check connection configuration. If conformity of received signal is proved and if the state is still
the same, please contact your after sales representative for analysis and repair.
Action (French)
Vrifier la configuration de la connexion. Si la conformit du signal reu est tablie et si ltat
perdure, contacter le service aprs-vente pour ananlyse et rparation.
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[110] No stream received
[145] No transport stream
[146] No stream input
[147] No stream input
[110] Aucun flux reu
Page 35
Selectable

[145] Pas de signal dentre
[146] Pas de flux en entre
[147] Pas de flux video dans le signal TS
Page 36
Probable Cause
1054/PAT not present
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
PAT not present
Wording (French)
PAT non prsente
Diagnosis (English)
No data is received on the PAT PID.
Diagnosis (French)
Absence de donnes sur le PID de la PAT
Action (English)
Check input signal and verify source
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal dentre ainsi que les sources
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[52] No PAT received
[63] Failed to get program tables for the input port %2
[64] Failed to get program tables for the input port %2
[110] PAT not present
[52] PAT non reue
[63] Impossible de rcuprer les tables de programme pour le port %2
[64] Impossible de rcuprer les tables de programme pour le port %2
[110] PAT non prsente
Page 37
Selectable

Page 38
Probable Cause
1056/PMT not present
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
PMT not present
Wording (French)
PMT non prsente
Diagnosis (English)
No data is received on the PMT PID witch is referred in PAT.
Diagnosis (French)
Aucune donne n'est reue sur le PID de la PMT rfrenc dans la PAT.
Action (English)
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal d'entre et la source.
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[63] Request to get the PMTs for the input port %2 failed
[64] Request to get the PMTs for the input port %2 failed
[110] PMT not present
[190] Timeout on PAT/PMT extraction
[63] Recuperation de la PMT pour le port dentre %2 impossible
[64] Recuperation de la PMT pour le port dentre %2 impossible
[110] PMT non prsente
Page 39
Selectable

[190] Temps de rponse dpass / extract PAT/PMT
Page 40
Probable Cause
78/powerSupplyFailure
Category
Equipment
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
Power supply failure
Wording (French)
Dfaillance de lalimentation
Diagnosis (English)
Power Supply Failure detected. One of the voltages required for nominal use has a defect.
Diagnosis (French)
Dfaillance de lalimentation dtecte. Lune des tensions requises pour lutilisation nominale
prsente un dfaut.
Action (English)
De plug and re plug the board in the chassis and then reboot the function. If the problem
persists, return the board to the Customer Service.
Action (French)
Retirer et rinsrer la carte dans le chssis, puis rinitialiser la fonction. Si le problme
persiste, retourner la carte au Customer Service.
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[5] +5V power supply failed
[5] -5V power supply failed
[5] +12V power supply failed
[5] +12.2V power supply failed
[5] -12V power supply failed
[5] +3.3V power supply failed
[5] -5.2V power supply failed
[5] Power supply 1&2 failed
[5] Power supply 1 failed
[5] Alarm on power supply 1
Page 41
Impossible

[5] Alarm on power supply 2
[5] Power supply 1 or 2 failed
[27] power supply failed
[95] Power supply failure
[132] Power supply default
[133] Supply fault
[138] Power supply fault
[140] 5V power failed
[140] Power supply alarm
[182] Power supply KO
[5] Alimentation +5V HS
[5] Alimentation -5V HS
[5] Alimentation +12V HS
[5] Alimentation +12.2V HS
[5] Alimentation -12V HS
[5] Alimentation +3.3V HS
[5] Alimentation -5.2V HS
[5] Alimentations 1&2 HS
[5] Alimentation 1 HS
[5] Alarme alimentation 1
[5] Alarme alimentation 2
[5] Alimentation 1 ou 2 HS
[27] Dfaut d'alimentation
[95] Dfaillance de lalimentation
[132] Dfaut d'alimentation
[133] Dfaut dalimentation
[138] Problme dalimentation
[140] Dfaut sur lalimentation +5V
[140] Alarme alimentation
[182] Alimentation HS
Page 42
Probable Cause
1098/Rebooting
Category
Equipment
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
(Re)booting
Wording (French)
(Re)dmarrage
Diagnosis (English)
(Re)boot of the device is in progress. The product does not render the expected service until
this alarm disappears.
Diagnosis (French)
L'quipement est en phase de (re)boot. Le produit ne rend pas le service attendu tant que
cette alarme persiste.
Action (English)
Wait for boot to be completed.
Action (French)
Attendez que le dmarrage soit termin
Current autobackup:
Impossible

[46] Equipment still booting
[140] Start Boot
[46] Equipement en phase de boot
[140] Dbut dinitialisation
Page 43
Impossible
Probable Cause
62/replaceableUnitMissing
Category
Equipment
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
Replaceable unit missing
Wording (French)
Unit amovible manquante
Diagnosis (English)
Board can not be detected.
Diagnosis (French)
La carte ne peut tre dtecte.
Action (English)
Check that board is correctly inserted in the right slot. If the problem persists, contact
Customer Service.
Action (French)
Sassurer que la carte est correctement insre dans lemplacement appropri. Si le problme
persiste, contacter le Service Clients.
Current autobackup:
Impossible

[94] Replaceable unit missing
[137] No channel filter
[144] No input board
[94] Unit de remplacement manquante
[137] Pas de channel filter
[144] Pas de carte dentre
Page 44
Selectable
Probable Cause
69/replaceableUnitProblem
Category
Equipment
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Replaceable unit problem
Wording (French)
Problme d'unit amovible
Diagnosis (English)
The board has been configured as inhibited. It is declared as a spare inactive board. Note :
this is an informational state.
Diagnosis (French)
TBD.
Action (English)
If this state is not willed, check configuration.
Action (French)
TBD.
Current autobackup:
Impossible

[183] Board inhibited
[183] Carte inhibe
Page 45
Impossible
Probable Cause
63/replaceableUnitTypeMismatch
Category
Equipment
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
Replaceable unit type mismatch
Wording (French)
Type d'unit amovible incompatible
Diagnosis (English)
Equipment or board declared differs from the detected one.
Diagnosis (French)
La carte MANAGER attend un type de carte spcifique dans l'emplacement mais en a dtect
un autre.
Action (English)
Check consistency between installation and configuration.
Action (French)
Vrifier la position physique des cartes par rapport la topologie. Retirer, puis rinsrer la
carte. Si le problme persiste, contacter le Service Clients.
Current autobackup:
Impossible

[61] %4 expected, %5 found
[66] Unknown or bad I/O Module
[75] bad equipment type
[75] bad extension board %1
[87] declaration and present boards mismatched
[94] Replaceable unit type mismatch
[134] Invalid configuration
Page 46
Impossible

[182] TCC is in wrong slot
[183] Board wrong type
[61] Carte %4 attendue, %5 dtecte
[66] Module dE/S inconnu ou mauvais
[75] Mauvais type dquipement
[75] Mauvaise carte extension %1
[87] incohrence entre la dclaration et les cartes prsente
[94] Type dunit de remplacement incompatible
[134] Configuration non valide
[182] TCC insre dans un mauvais slot
[183] Mauvais type de carte
Page 47
Probable Cause
26/routingFailure
Category
Communications
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
Routing failure
Wording (French)
Echec de routage
Diagnosis (English)
Diagnosis (French)
Action (English)
Action (French)
Current autobackup:
Impossible

Page 48
Impossible
Probable Cause
1058/SDT not present
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
SDT not present
Wording (French)
SDT non prsente
Diagnosis (English)
No data is received on the SDT PID (Actual (table_id=0x42) or Other (table_id=0x46))
Diagnosis (French)
Aucune donne nest reue sur le PID de la SDT (Actual (table_id=0x42) ou Other
(table_id=0x46))
Action (English)
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal dentre et la source.
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[54] No SDT received
[110] SDT not present
[117] SDT not present
[146] SDT/BAT not present
[54] SDT non reue
[110] SDT non prsente
[117] SDT non prsente
[146] SDT/BAT non prsente
Page 49
Selectable
Probable Cause
1059/ServiceId not present
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
ServiceId not present
Wording (French)
ID Service non prsent
Diagnosis (English)
The selected service Id is not present.
Diagnosis (French)
Le service slectionn n'est pas prsent dans les tables PSI/SI du flux
Action (English)
Check configuration or check input stream
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal en entre. Contacter le Service Client.
Current autobackup:
Impossible
Impossible

[110] ServiceId not present
[117] ServiceId not present
[154] Selected service is not applicable in PSI-SI and cannot be decoded (input %1)
[110] ID Service non prsent
[117] ID Service non prsent
[154] Le service slectionn ne peut tre decod (absent des tables PSI-SI) (entre %1
Page 50
Probable Cause
164/softwareError
Category
Processing error
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
Software error
Wording (French)
Erreur logicielle
Diagnosis (English)
A software error has occured and impact the selected ressource or interface.
Diagnosis (French)
Lorsque cet vnement se produit, le champ Problme spcifique indique un code interne
utilis pour dterminer la cause de l'erreur logicielle.
Action (English)
Collect extra information and contact Customer Service for analysis and repair.
Action (French)
Recueillir des informations supplmentaires dans le journal et contacter le Service Clients pour
analyse et rparation.
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[16]
[17]
[17]
[17]
[17]
[17]
[17]
[26]
[34]
[34]
[34]
[34]
Coupler internal error

Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Page 51
Selectable

[34] Internal error %2
[45] internal error %2
[45] internal error %2
[66] Error occured during processing of Ad Insertion commands
[66] Failed to release recoder
[80] Incorrect file(s) in PCMCIA card
[90] Internal DBP error (%1)
[95] Software error
[97] Unknown ECMG error %2
[97] Incorrect ECM compute mode
[97] Impossible to inform some elements of session
[97] unknown ECMG name
[97] ECM length error
[97] Unrecoverable error
[98] Unknown ECMG error %2
[98] Incorrect ECM compute mode
[98] Problem in obtaining session number
[98] Impossible to inform some elements of session
[98] unknown ECMG name
[98] the ciphering module has broken down
[98] ECM length error
[98] error code unknown
[100] activation failure (error code = %2)
[102] Software error
[132] DSP DESIC watchdog failed
[132] Internal microprocessor watchdog failed
[140] Self-test error
[140] Watchdog timeout
[178] Crosspoints list incompatible with the switcher
[206] Error while running events in playlist
[206] Connection with the scheduler down.
[206] Playlist can not lock devices
[16]
[17]
[17]
[17]
[17]
[17]
[17]
[26]
[34]
[34]
[34]
[34]
[34]
[45]
[45]
Erreur interne coupleur

Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
erreur interne %2
erreur interne %2
Page 52

[66] Erreur de traitement dune commande dAd Insertion
[66] Echec du relachement dun recoder
[80] Configuration sauvegarde incorrecte sur la carte PCMCIA
[90] Problme interne au DBP (%1)
[95] Erreur logicielle
[97] Erreur %2 ECMG inconnue
[97] Mode de calcul de la session incorrect
[97] Impossible de renseigner des lments de la session
[97] Nom ECMG inconnu
[97] Taille ECM incorrecte
[97] Erreur insurmontable
[98] Erreur %2 ECMG inconnue
[98] Mode de calcul de la session incorrect
[98] Problme d'obtention du numro de session
[98] Impossible de renseigner des lments de la session
[98] Nom ECMG inconnu
[98] Module de calcul HS
[98] Taille ECM incorrecte
[98] Code erreur inconnu
[100] chec dactivation (Code derreur = %2)
[132] Dfaut DSP
[132] Dfaut micro-contrleur 68HC11
[140] Autotest dfaillant
[140] Chien de garde chu
[178] Liste des points de croisements incompatibles avec la grille
[206] Erreur lexcution dvnements dans playlist
[206] La connexion avec le scheduler est rompue
[206] Playlist ne peut prendre la main sur les quipements
Page 53
Probable Cause
1276/Stream discontinuity
Category
Communications
Default severity
minor
Wording (English)
Stream discontinuity
Wording (French)
Discontinuit du flux
Diagnosis (English)
Received UDP data length in incoming RTP MPEG frames is not consistent with the previous
ones.
Diagnosis (French)
La longueur des donnes UDP reues dans les trames MPEG RTP entrantes n'est pas
cohrente par rapport aux prcdentes.
Action (English)
Check the transmitter behavior
Action (French)
Vrifier le comportement de l'metteur.
Current autobackup:
Impossible

[116] Stream discontinuity
[116] Discontinuit du flux
Page 54
Impossible
Probable Cause
1030/stream error
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Stream error
Wording (French)
Erreur de flux
Diagnosis (English)
Error in stream.
Diagnosis (French)
Erreur dans le flux.
Action (English)
Check input stream
Action (French)
Contacter le Service Client.
Current autobackup:
Impossible

[28] Bad packet size
[63] Request to get the program headers failed
[64] Request to get the program headers failed
[66] Packet continuity counter error.
[66] Cannot insert timestamp, invalid picture header
[66] Packet payload errors
[66] Cannot reconstruct output stream
[66] Transport_error_indicator set in packets
[104] Stream error
[110] Stream error
[117] Stream error
[137] No valid data
[138] Data interface failure
[147] Error in stream
Page 55
Impossible

[147] Unknown error
[147] Error in stream
[155] TS Error
[155] Decoder Stream Error
[28] Taille paquet incorrecte
[63] La rcuperation de lentte du programme a chou
[64] La rcuperation de l'entte du programme a chou
[66] Erreur de "Packet Continuity Error"
[66] Impossible dinsrer le timestamp, entte dimage non-valide
[66] Erreurs sur les paquets MPEG
[66] Impossible de reconstruire le flux de sortie
[66] Transport_error_indicator mis 1 sur les paquets
[104] Erreur de flux
[137] Pas de donnes valides
[138] Echec de linterface donnes
[147] Erreur dans le flux
[147] Erreur inconnue
[147] Erreur de trame
[155] Erreur de TS
[155] Erreurs sur le flux desortie du codeur
Page 56
Probable Cause
64/synchronizationSourceMismatch
Category
Equipment
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Synchronization source mismatch
Wording (French)
Incompatibilit des sources de synchronisation
Diagnosis (English)
Bit stream Problem.
Diagnosis (French)
Problme de flux.
Action (English)
Check the input signal. Contact Customer Service
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal en entre. Contacter le Service Client.
Current autobackup:
Selectable
Selectable

[154] Decoder cannot lock on the MPEG-2 bit stream because of sync (input %1)
[154] Impossible de vrouiller le flux MPEG-2 (problme de synchro) (entre %1)
Page 57
Probable Cause
1238/TR 101 290 First priority error
Category
Quality of service
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
TR 101 290 First priority error.
Wording (French)
Erreur de premire priorit TR 101 290.
Diagnosis (English)
MPEG2 Transport Stream in error according to norm TR 101 290 first priority indicator.
Diagnosis (French)
MPEG2 Transport Stream en erreur selon l'indicateur de premire priorit de la norme TR 101
290.
Action (English)
Check signal. Contact Customer Service.
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal. Contacter le Service Client.
Current autobackup:
Impossible

Page 58
Impossible
Probable Cause
1073/Unrecoverable errors
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Unrecoverable errors
Wording (French)
Erreurs irrcuprables
Diagnosis (English)
The board is delivering a corrupted signal with bit errors. It is issued only if used mode
provides error detection mechanism. Means FEC capacity is overflowed.
Note : This event, as many other reception alarms, is generally produced by transmission
problems in the network. It can also comes for a device partial failure. The quality of
transmission shall be analysed by skilled staff. A check of network state shall be made. If no
cause is directly detected there, a transmission analyser shall be used in place of the device
for comparison. If a test system is not available a device exchange can be performed.
Hereunder analysis proposal covers only trivial causes.
Diagnosis (French)
La carte fournit un signal corrompu prsentant une perte de trame. Signal uniquement si le
mode utilis dispose dun mcanisme de dtection des erreurs. Cela signifie que la fonction
FEC est sature. Remarque : cet vnement, comme beaucoup dautres alarmes de
rception, est gnralement d des problmes de transmission du rseau. Il peut galement
provenir dune dfaillance partielle de lquipement. La qualit de la transmission doit tre
analyse par un personnel qualifi. Ltat du rseau doit galement tre vrifi. Si aucune
cause nest directement dtecte de cette manire, remplacer lquipement par un analyseur
de transmission et effectuer une comparaison. Si aucun systme de test nest disponible, il est
possible dchanger les quipements. La proposition danalyse suivante ne sapplique quaux
causes simples.
Action (English)
Check the good cable is plugged on the board input. If received signal conformity is proved, de
plug and re plug the board. Wait until it is recognised by the control and command software. If
the state is still the same, please contact your after sales representative for analysis and
repair.
Action (French)
Page 59

Pour amliorer le comportement du systme, commencer par rgler les paramtres FEC du
ct mission. Si ltat est identique, contacter le Customer Service pour analyse et
rparation.
Current autobackup:
Impossible

[98] Unrecoverable error
[115] Uncorrectable errors
[116] Uncorrectable errors
[140] Uncorrected input packet
[140] Uncorrected input packet
[98] Erreur Insurmontable
[115] Erreurs non corrigibles
[116] Erreurs non corrigibles
[140] Paquets en entre non corrigs
[140] Paquets en entre non corrigs
Page 60
Impossible
Probable Cause
1278/Unreachable destination
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Unreachable destination
Wording (French)
Destination inaccessible
Diagnosis (English)
Unreachable destination. Destination host is not connected to network, or bad IP settings of
destination host or problem of configuration on intermediate routers.
Diagnosis (French)
Impossible datteindre la destination. Hte de destination non connect au rseau, paramtres
IP de lhte de destination incorrects ou problme de configuration des routeurs
intermdiaires.
Action (English)
Check destination host. Contact your network infrastructure representative
Action (French)
Vrifier lhte de destination. Contacter votre service infrastructure rseau.
Current autobackup:
Impossible

[111] Unreachable destination
[116] Unreachable destination
[111] Destination inaccessible
[116] Destination inaccessible
Page 61
Impossible
Probable Cause
1339/Unsuitable link speed
Category
Communications
Default severity
minor
Wording (English)
Unsuitable link speed
Wording (French)
Vitesse de la liaison inadapte
Diagnosis (English)
The affected ethernet interface has detected a connection but the speed is not compatible with
the port speed.
Diagnosis (French)
Une connexion a t dtecte sur linterface ethernet mais la vitesse nest pas compatible
avec celle du port
Action (English)
For the Control and Command ethernet, check that the network is a 10Mbps or a 100Mbps
network.
For the Ethernet streaming ports, check that the network is a 100Mbps or 1000Mbps network.
Action (French)
Pour lethernet Contrle et Commande, vrifier que le rseau est un rseau 10Mbps ou 100
Mbps.
Pour les ports ethernet de flux, vrifier que le rseau est un rseau 100 Mbps ou 1000
Mbps.
Current autobackup:
Impossible

Page 62
Impossible
Probable Cause
1076/ventilation failure
Category
Equipment
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
Ventilation failure
Wording (French)
Dfaillance de la ventilation
Diagnosis (English)
Fan concerned is out of service.
Diagnosis (French)
Le ventilateur concern est hors service.
Action (English)
If external, check that an air fan is powered on. Else, check that no object has been inserted in
the unit and is blocking a fan. If no external cause is detected, contact Customer Service.
Action (French)
Mettre le chssis hors tension afin dviter toute temprature excessive susceptible de causer
un dommage matriel. Pour les produits 5U, remplacer lunit de ventilation. Pour les produits
1U, remplacer le chssis.
Current autobackup:
Impossible

[32] Ventilator fault
[94] Ventilation failure
[132] Fan unit default
[133] Fan fault
[182] Air fans KO
[32] Ventilation HS
[94] Dfaillance de la ventilation
[132] rotor(s) bloqu(s)
Page 63
Selectable

[133] Dfaut de ventilation
[182] Ventilation HS
Page 64
Probable Cause
167/versionMismatch
Category
Processing error
Default severity
indeterminate
Wording (English)
Version mismatch
Wording (French)
Incompatibilit de version
Diagnosis (English)
Diagnosis (French)
Action (English)
Action (French)
Current autobackup:
Impossible

Page 65
Impossible
Probable Cause
1064/video standard mismatch
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Video standard mismatch
Wording (French)
Norme vido incompatible
Diagnosis (English)
Input standard is different from the declared standard.
Diagnosis (French)
La norme dtecte est diffrente de celle dfinie dans la configuration.
Action (English)
change preferred standard in configuration or change standard of input signal
Action (French)
Redfinir la norme dans la configuration ou modifier la norme du signal d'entre.
Current autobackup:
Selectable

[34] Bad standard 50/60Hz
[45] Bad standard 50/60Hz
[107] videoStdMismatch
[110] Video standard mismatch
[132] Unknown or wrong standard on reference input
[132] Unknown or wrong standard on digital video input
[132] Unknown composite standard
[34] Mauvais standard 50/60Hz
[45] Mauvais standard 50/60Hz
[107] Norme vido incompatible
[110] Norme vido incompatible
Page 66
Selectable

[132] Rfrence synchroniseur inconnue ou incorrecte
[132] Standard vido numrique inconnu ou incorrect
[132] Standard composite inconnu
Page 67
Probable Cause
1065/video standard unknown
Category
Communications
Default severity
warning
Wording (English)
Video standard unknown
Wording (French)
Norme vido inconnue
Diagnosis (English)
The video standard is unknown.
Diagnosis (French)
La norme vido est inconnue.
Action (English)
Check input signal or change standard configuration of input signal
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal dentre ou modifier la configuration standard du signal dentre.
Current autobackup:
Impossible

[110] Video standard unknown
[110] Norme vido inconnue
Page 68
Impossible
Glossary
This glossary is common to all products. Defined words do not

necessarily apply to this product.
100/1000Base-T
An Ethernet standard designed to generate, monitor and capture 100/ 1000

Ethernet traffic.
3:2 pull-down
A technique used when converting film material (which operates at 24

pictures per second) to 525-line video (operating at 29.97 pictures per
second).
3G-SDI
3 Gbps High-Definition Serial Digital Interface.
4:2:0
A chrominance sub-sampling system in which the difference signals are

sampled on alternate lines at half the luminance rate.
4:2:2
A chrominance sub-sampling system in which the difference signals are

sampled on all lines at half the luminance rate.
AAC
Advanced Audio Compression algorithm that has been ratified for both
MPEG-2 (ISO/IEC 11818-7) and MPEG-4 (ISO/IEC 14496-3).
AAC-LC
Low Complexity-Advanced Audio Coding.
AC-3
Audio Coding 3.
AC-3 is a digital audio encoding, also called Dolby Digital, technique
developed by Dolby for multi-channel sound applications.
ADTS
Audio Data Transport Stream.

ADTS is a method for encapsulating AAC bitstreams into transport
streams. AAC bitstream is packaged in a streaming format called Audio
Data Transport Stream (ADTS), consisting of a series of frames, each frame
having a header followed by the AAC audio data.
AES
Audio Engineering Society.

Professional organization of electrical engineers whose concern is with the
standards of audio engineering.
AFD
Active Format Descriptor.

Standard set of codes that can be sent in the MPEG video stream or in the
baseband SDI video signal that carries information about their aspect ratio
and active picture characteristics.
AGC
Automatic Gain Control.
AMOL I and II
Automatic Measure of Lineups.

Data inserted in the VBI lines and used by automated equipment to
measure program-viewing ratings (NTSC).
AMOL I: 48 bits/line, AMOL II: 96 bits/line.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

431
Glossary
ANSI/SCTE-20
Methods for Carriage of Closed Captions and Non-Real Time Sampled

Video. It defines how to implement VBI (Vertical Blanking Interval) services
using the user data field of the picture layer of the MPEG-2 video bitstream,
and according to ISO/IEC 13818-2.
ANSI/SCTE-21
The Standard for Carriage of NTSC VBI Data in Cable Digital Transport
Stream. It defines a standard for the carriage of VBI services in MPEG-2
compliant bitstreams constructed according to ISO/IEC 13818-2.
ARIB
Association of Radio Industries and Businesses.

ARIB is a standardization organization in Japan. It is a designated center
for the promotion of efficient use of the radio spectrum and frequency
change support agency. Its activities include those previously performed
by the Research and Development Center for Radio Systems (RCR) and
Broadcasting Technology Association (BTA).
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol.

Internet protocol used to map an IP address to physical (hardware)
addresses on local area networks.
ASI
Asynchronous Serial Interface.
ATSC
Advanced Television Standards Committee.

ATSC is a set of standards developed for digital television transmission
over terrestrial, cable, and satellite networks for the USA.
AVC
Advanced Video Coding.
B-Frame
Bidirectional-Frame.
A frame type in the MPEG compression scheme that is predicted from past
and future reference frames.
Balanced Audio
An audio signal that consists of two wires carrying an audio signal in

anti-phase with each other. Balanced audio has greater ability to reject
interference.
BAT
Bouquet Association Table

The BAT provides information about bouquets. It gives the name of the
bouquet and a list of associated services.
BISS
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System.

BISS is a satellite signal scrambling system developed by the European
Broadcasting Union and a consortium of hardware manufacturers.
Bouquet
A collection of services (TV, radio, and data, or any combination of the

three) grouped and sold together, and identified in the SI as a group. A
single service may be in several bouquets.
Buffer
A memory store used to provide a consistent rate of data flow.
CA
Conditional Access.
System to control subscriber access to services, programs and events.
CABAC
Context-based Adaptive Binary Arithmetic Coding

CABAC is a form of entropy coding used in H.264 video encoding. It is
notable for providing much better compression than CAVLC but is more
computationally expensive. CABAC is not supported in Baseline and
Extended profiles.
432
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Glossary
CAT
Conditional Access Table

CAT table is used for conditional access to the streams. It provides
association with the EMM stream.
CAVLC
Context Adaptive Variable Length Coding.

CAVLC is a form of entropy coding used in H.264 video encoding. CAVLC
has lower coding efficiency than CABAC but is less computationally
expensive.
CBR
Constant Bit-rate.
The bit-rate of the bit-stream is constant. (see VBR)
CC
Close Caption.
Chrominance
Chrominance (chroma or C for short) is the signal used in video systems

to convey the
information of the picture, separately from the
accompanying luma signal (or Y for short).
CIF
Common Intermediate Format.

A format used to standardize the horizontal and vertical resolutions in
pixels of YCbCr sequences in video signals, commonly used in video
teleconferencing systems (video size: 352p x 288p).
Closed Caption
A TV picture subtitling system used with 525-line analog transmissions.
Composite Video
A baseband representation of a video signal containing luminance and

chrominance information.
Compression
The process of removing redundant data from audio or video streams to

reduce the amount of data transferred or stored.
CPU
Central Processing Unit.
CrCb
Digital difference signals. These signals, in combination with the

luminance signal (Y), define the and brightness of each picture element
(pixel) on a TV line. See: Chrominance.
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check.

A cyclic redundancy check (CRC) is an error-detecting code designed to
detect accidental changes to raw computer data, and is commonly used in
digital networks and storage devices such as hard disk drives.
CVBS
Composite Video, Blanking, and Sync.
CVCT
Cable Virtual Channel Table (ATSC).
CW
Control Word.
CWG
Control Word Generator.
dB
Decibel
The decibel is a logarithmic unit that indicates the ratio of a physical
quantity (usually power or intensity) relative to a specified or implied
reference level. A ratio in decibels is ten times the logarithm to base 10 of
the ratio of two power quantities. A decibel is one tenth of a bel, a
seldom-used unit.
dBFS
Decibel Full Scale
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

433
Glossary
De-blocking Filter
An in-loop de-blocking filter is designed to smooth out artifacts introduced

by the compression process in the reconstructed image in both the
encoder and decoder.
Decoder
The device containing the electronic circuitry necessary to decode

encrypted signals. Some Decoders features a receiver.
D TS
Decoding Time Stamp

A field that may be present in a PES packet header that indicates the time
that an access unit is to be decoded in the system target Decoder.
DET
Data Event Table (ATSC)
DID
Data Identifier
DID is used for embedded audio within the SDI or HD-SDI signal. The Data
Identifier word indicates the type of ancillary data that the packet
corresponds to.
Dolby Digital
Formerly AC-3. An audio coding system based on transform coding

techniques and psycho acoustic principles.
Downconvert
The process by which the frequency of a broadcast transport stream is

shifted to a lower frequency range.
Downmixing
Combining (or mixing down) the content of n original channels to produce

m channels, where m < n.
DPI
Digital Program Insertion.
DSNG
Digital Satellite News-Gathering.
DSP
Digital Signal Processor.
DTVCC
Digital Television Closed Captioning.
DVB
Digital Video Broadcasting

The Digital Video Broadcasting Project (DVB) is an industry-led consortium
of around 250 broadcasters, manufacturers, network operators, software
developers, regulatory bodies and others in over 35 countries committed
to designing open technical standards for the global delivery of digital
television and data services. Services using DVB standards are available
on every continent with more than 500 million DVB receivers deployed.
DVB-H
Digital Video Broadcasting - Handheld. A technical specification for

bringing broadcast services to mobile handsets. DVB-H was formally
adopted as ETSI standard EN 302 304 in November 2004.
DVB-T
Digital Video Broadcasting baseline system for digital terrestrial television.
DVB SI
Digital Video Broadcasting Service Information.
DVS 053
See ANSI/SCTE-21.
DVS 157
See ANSI/SCTE-20.
434
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Glossary
DVS 706
The Carriage of Vertical Blanking Information Data in North American

Digital Television Bitstream. Based on the ETSI EN 301 775 standard and
provides extensions for the carriage of VBI data. VBI data is carried in
MPEG-2 packetized elementary stream (PES) packets as private stream 1,
which in turn is carried in MPEG2 transport packets. The Data_unit_ID
values identify the type of data as AMOL 1, AMOL II, or TV Guide. Data
encoded in the data fields are supposed to be transcoded into the VBI of
525 line video but may be interpreted directly by a decoder.
EBU
European Broadcast Union.
ECM
Entitlement Control Message.

Private Conditional Access information that specifies control words and
possibly other stream-specific, scrambling, and/or control parameters.
ECMG
ECM Generator
EDI
Ethernet Data Input.
EIA 708-B
Digital Television Closed Captioning specifies the standards for DTV

technology. DTV closed captioning is transported in the bitstream as a
logical data channel in MPEG-2 picture user data field of the DTV digital
bitstream (as defined in the ATSC A/53 and ISO/IEC 13818 standards). To
ensure compatibility, the transport channel is designed to carry analog
(EIA-608-B) and digital closed captioning (EIA-708-B).
EIT
Event Information Table

A mandatory Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) SI table that transmits
information relating to the events in the MPEG transport stream.
Elementary Stream
A generic term for a coded bit-stream, be it video, audio or other.
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility.
EMM
Entitlement Management Message.

Private Conditional Access information that specifies the authorization
level or services of specific decoders.
Encryption
Encoding of a transmission to prevent access without the appropriate

decryption equipment and authorization.
EPG
Electronic Program Guide.

Provides users of television, radio, and other media applications with
continuously updated menus displaying scheduling information for
current and upcoming programming.
ES
Elementary Stream
A generic term for a stream of data of one particular type. Typically these
streams are of Video or Audio Types.
Ethernet
The most widely used local area network (LAN) defined by the IEEE as the
802.3 standard.
ETSI EN 300 706
The European Television Standards Institutes (ETSI) specification for

World Standard Teletext (WST).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

435
Glossary
ETSI EN 300 775
The European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)

specification for the Carriage of Vertical Blanking Information Data in DVB
bitstreams. VBI data is carried in MPEG-2 packetized elementary stream
(PES) packets as private stream 1, which in turn is carried in MPEG2
transport packets. The packet identifier (PID) of a VBI data stream
associated with a service is identified in the program map table (PMT) of
the program specific information (PSI) for that service. A VBI PES packet
contains data for only one video frame and always carries a PTS. A
Data_unit_ID identifies the type of data as EBU teletext non-subtitle data,
EBU teletext subtitle data, video program system (VPS), or wide screen
signaling (WSS). Data encoded in the data fields are supposed to be
transcoded into the VBI of 625-line video but may be interpreted directly
by a decoder.
ETT
Extended Text Table
FCC
Federal Communications Commission.
FEC
Forward Error Correction.

A system of error control for data transmission, whereby the sender adds
systematically generated redundant data to its messages. The carefully
designed redundancy allows the receiver to detect and correct a limited
number of errors occurring anywhere in the message without the need to
ask the sender for additional data. FEC enables the receiver to correct
errors without the need for a reverse channel to request retransmission of
data, but this advantage is at the cost of a fixed higher forward channel
bandwidth
Field
For an interlaced video signal, a "field" is the assembly of alternate lines of

a frame. Therefore, an interlaced frame is composed of two fields, a top
field and a bottom field.
Fps
Frame Per Second.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol.

A standard network protocol used to copy a file from one host to another
over a TCP-based network.
Frame
A frame contains lines of spatial information of a video signal. For

progressive video, these lines contain samples starting from one time
instant and continuing through successive lines to the bottom of the
frame. For interlaced video a frame consists of two fields, a top field and a
bottom field. One of these fields will commence one field later than the
other.
GOP
Group of Pictures.
In MPEG video, a GOP represents one or more I pictures, followed by P and
B pictures.
GPI
General Purpose Interface
GUI
Graphical User Interface

A type of user interface that allows users to interact with electronic devices
with images rather than text commands. A GUI represents the information
and actions available to a user through graphical icons and visual
indicators such as secondary notation, as opposed to text-based
interfaces, typed command labels or text navigation.
H.264
ITU/ETSI name for MPEG-4 Part-10 (ISO/IEC 14496-10).
436
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Glossary
HANC
Horizontal Ancillary.
Ancillary packets located in the horizontal blanking interval of the video
signal.
HD
High Definition.
HD-SDI
High-Definition Serial Digital Interface.
HDTV
High Definition Television.
HE-AAC
High-Efficiency Advanced Audio Encoding.

A lossy data compression scheme for digital audio defined as a MPEG-4
Audio profile in ISO/IEC 14496-3. There are two types of HE-AAC:
- HE-AAC = AAC+ = AAC-LC + SBR (Spectral Band Reconstitution)
- HE-AACv2 = eAAC+ = AAC-LC + SBR + PS (Parametric Stereo)
HSYNC
Horizontal (line) Sync.
HTML
Hyper Text Markup Language.

HTML is the predominant markup language for web pages. That is the
basic building-blocks of web pages.
HTTP
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol.
I-Frame
Intracoded Frame.
A frame, which is coded using purely intracoding with reference to no
other field or frame information. I frames provide a reference point for
dependent P and B frames and allow random access into the compressed
video stream.
I-Picture
Refer to I-Frame.
ID
Identifier
IDR
Instantaneous Decoding Refresh. IDR pictures can be decoded without

reference to previous frames.
IEC
International Electrotechnical Committee.
IGMP
Internet Group Management Protocol.

IGMP is a communication protocol used by hosts and adjacent routers on
IP networks to establish multicast group memberships.
There are three versions of IGMP, as defined by "Request for Comments"
(RFC) documents of the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IGMPv1 is
defined by RFC 1112, IGMPv2 is defined by RFC 2236 and IGMPv3 was
initially defined by RFC 3376 but has since been superseded by RFC 4604.
IP
Internet Protocol.
IP Address
A 32-bit (IPv4) or 128-bit (IPv6) numerical identifier for a specific TCP/IP

host device on a network, that represents the sender or receiver of
information sent across the network.
IRD
Integrated Receiver Decoder.

The IRD is the official name for the satellite receiver, which has a built-in
decoder for unscrambling subscription channels. Also known as a Set-Top
Box for cable.
ISO
International Standards Organization.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

437
Glossary
ITU-R
International Telecommunications Union - Radio.

Formerly CCIR. Deals with the standardization of wireless communication.
ITU-T
International Telecommunications Union - Telecommunications.

Formerly CCITT. Produces global telecommunication standards, and
defines tariff and accounting principles.
Joint Stereo
An audio mode in which the left and right channels of audio are encoded
into one channel. This mode is used to reduce bandwidth needs, and thus
improve compression efficiency.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group.

Name of the committee that created the JPEG standard (and also other
standards). The JPEG standard specifies the codec, which defines how a
still image is compressed into a stream of bytes and decompressed back
into an image.
JVT
Joint Video Team (JVT).

The Joint Video Team is a group of video coding experts from ITU-T Study
Group 16 (VCEG) and ISO/IEC JTC 1 SC 29 / WG 11 (MPEG) created to
develop an advanced video coding specification. The JVTs main result has
been ITU-T Rec. H.264 | ISO/IEC 14496-10, commonly referred to as
H.264/MPEG-4-AVC, H.264/AVC, or MPEG-4 Part 10 AVC.
kbit/s
Kilo bits per second.
LAN
Local Area Network.

A local area network is a network that connects computers and devices in
a limited geographical area such as home, school, computer laboratory or
office building.
LATM
Low-overhead Audio Transport Multiplex.

LATM is part of the method to encapsulate HE-AAC audio into transport
stream.
LC-AAC
Low Complexity-Advanced Audio Coding.
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display.
LED
Light Emitting Diode.
LOAS
Low-overhead Audio Stream

LOAS is part of the method to encapsulate HE-AAC audio into a transport
stream.
In a GOP (Group Of Picture), M is the distance between successive

P-Frames.
Macroblock
A area of the TV picture. Macroblocks are usually composed of two or

more blocks of pixels. The size of a block depends on the codec and is
usually a multiple of 4. In MPEG-2 the size is fixed at blocks of 8x8 pixels.
In H264 the overarching macroblock size is fixed at 16x16 pixels, but this is
broken down into smaller blocks or partitions which are either 4, 8, 12 or
16 pixels by 4, 8, 12 or 16 pixels.
MBAFF
MacroBlock Adaptive Frame Field coding. Use a macroblock pair structure

for pictures coded as frames.
Mbit/s
Million bits per second.
MGT
Master Guide Table (ATSC).
438
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Glossary
MIB
Management Information Base.

SNMP collects management information from devices on the network and
records the information in a management information base. The MIB
information includes device features, data throughput statistics, traffic
overloads, and errors.
Motion Compensation The use of motion vectors to improve the efficiency of the prediction of
sample values. The prediction uses motion vectors to provide offsets into
the past and/or future reference frames or fields containing previously
decoded sample values that are used to form the prediction error signal.
Motion Estimation
The process of estimating motion vectors in the encoding process.
Motion Vector
A two-dimensional vector used for inter prediction that provides an offset

from the coordinates in the decoded picture to the coordinates in a
reference picture.
MP@ML
Main Profile at Main Level

A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which supports transmissions up to 15
Mbit/s.
MP@HL
Main Profile at High Level

A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which supports transmissions up to 80
Mbit/s.
MPEG
Moving Pictures Experts Group

An international standards-setting group, working to develop standards
for compressed full-motion video, audio, and other associated
information. Current standards are MPEG-1, MPEG-2, and MPEG-4.
MPEG-2
Industry standard for video and audio source coding using compression
and multiplexing techniques to minimize video signal bit-rate in
preparation for broadcasting. Specified in ISO/IEC 13818. The standard is
split into layers and profiles defining bit-rates and picture resolutions.
MPEG-4
Industry standard for video and audio source coding using compression
and multiplexing techniques to minimize video signal bit-rate in
preparation for broadcasting. Specified in ISO/IEC 14496. Part 2 of this
standard defines the original MPEG-4 video compression whereas Part 10
is the new algorithm also known as H264.
MPTS
Multiprogram Transport Stream.
Multicast
Process where a single stream is served from one source to multiple

receivers. The multicast address range is: 224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255.
Multiplex
-The combination of two or more signals into one single output stream.
-A number of discrete data streams (typically 8 to 24 depending on the
compression standards), from encoders, that are compressed together in
a single DVB compliant transport stream for delivery to a Modulator.
In a GOP (Group Of Picture), N is the distance between successive

I-Frames.
NAL
Network Abstraction Layer (H264)
NIT
Network Information Table

A mandatory Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) SI table, that provides a
grouping of Transport Streams (TSs) and the relevant tuning information.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

439
Glossary
NMS
Network Management System.
NTP
Network Time Protocol.
NTSC
National Television Systems Committee

An American based committee who sets
television broadcast
transmission and reception standards used in the US, Canada, Mexico and
Japan as well as other Latin American and Asian countries. This system
uses 525 picture lines and a 59.97 Hz field frequency.
NVOD
Near Video On Demand.

NVOD is a consumer video technique used by multi-channel broadcasters
using high-bandwidth distribution mechanisms such as satellite and cable
television. Multiple copies of a program are broadcast at short time
intervals (typically 1020 minutes) providing convenience for viewers, who
can watch the program without needing to tune in at a scheduled point in
time. The video can be sold.
P-frame
Predicted frame
A P-frame holds only the changes in the image from the previous frame.
Packet
- In networks, a unit of data transmitted over a packet-switching network.

A packet consists of a header followed by a number of contiguous bytes
from an elementary data stream.
- In transport streams, a packet is a small, fixed-size data quantum.
PAFF
Picture Adaptive Frame Field coding. Allows a freely selected mixture of

pictures coded either as complete frames where both fields are combined
together for encoding or as individual single fields.
PAT
Program Association Table.

It lists all programs available in the MPEG-2 transport stream. Each of the
listed programs is identified by a 16-bit value called program_number.
Each of the programs listed in the PAT has an associated value of PID for
its Program Map Table (PMT).
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation

PCM is a modulation technique. It is a digital representation of an analog
signal where the magnitude of the signal is sampled regularly at uniform
intervals. Every sample is quantized to a series of symbols in a digital
code, which is usually a binary code.
PCR
Program Clock Reference.

A time stamp used in digital video compression that indicates the system
time clocks (STC) value the instant the time stamped packet leaves the
encoder. In the Moving Pictures Experts Group 2 (MPEG-2) system the
digital video source is clocked at 27 MHz and the decoder must generate
the same 27 MHz clock so that the encoder and decoder clocks are
synchronized. These clocks are called System Time Clocks (STC). To
synchronize the decoder, the encoder sends a PCR to the decoder. The
decoder receives the packet and compares the STC value with its own STC
counter value. If the values are the same then no adjustment is needed but
if the two values are different, the decoder must either reset, speed up, or
slow down its STC.
440
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Glossary
PDC
Program Delivery Control (VBI).

PDC is specified by the standard ETS 300 231, published by the European
Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). This specifies the signals
sent as hidden codes in the teletext service, indicating when transmission
of a program starts and finishes.
PES
Packetized Elementary Stream

A specification in the MPEG-2 Part 1 (Systems) (ISO/IEC 13818-1) and ITU-T
H.222.0[1][2] that defines carrying of elementary streams in packets within
MPEG program streams and MPEG transport streams [3]. The elementary
stream is packetized by encapsulating sequential data bytes from the
elementary stream inside PES packet headers.
PID
Packet Identifier
A unique integer value used to identify the contents of an MPEG-2
Transport Stream packet (Video component PID, Audio component PID,
etc.).
Profile
A defined subset of the syntax specified in the MPEG-2 or MPEG-4 video

coding specification.
PMT
Program Map Table.

A mandatory MPEG-2 PSI table. Each service has a PMT. It lists the service
component parts (elementary streams of video, audio, location of the PCR
fields, etc.).
PSI
Program Specific Information.

Normative data that is necessary for the demultiplexing of transport
streams and the regeneration of programs.
PSIP
Program and System Information Protocol.

A method of describing Naming and Navigation data for a multi program
transport stream as defined in ATSC A/65A.
PSU
Power Supply Unit.
PTS
Presentation Time Stamp.

The PTS is a metadata field in an MPEG transport stream that is used to
achieve synchronization of programs' separate elementary streams (for
example Video, Audio, Subtitles) when presented to the viewer. The PTS
is given in units related to a program's overall clock reference, either
Program Clock Reference (PCR) or System Clock Reference (SCR), which is
also transmitted in the transport stream or program stream.
PVR
Personal Video Recorder.
QCIF
Quarter Common International Format.

To have one fourth of the area as "quarter" implies the height and width of
the frame are halved (video size: 176p x 144p).
QSIF
Quarter Screen International Format.

To have one fourth of the area as "quarter" implies the height and width of
the frame are halved (video size:160 x 120 pixels (NTSC) or 192 X 144 pixels
(PAL).
QVGA
Quarter Video Graphics Array.

QVGA is a popular term for a computer display with 320240 display
resolution.
R, G, B
Red, Green, Blue.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

441
Glossary
Resolution
Determined by the number of pixels displayed per line or for a given area.
RLC
Run Length Coding.

Run length encoding is a method of compressing digital information by
representing repetitive data information by a notation that indicates the
data that will be repeated and how many times the data will be repeated.
RRT
Rating Region Table (ATSC).
RS
Reed-Solomon coding.
Reed-Solomon is an algorithm for Forward Error Correction (FEC). It does
not specify a block size or a specific number of check symbols, instead
these variables can be set to the best variables for each transmission
medium. Reed Solomon codes are used in a wide variety of commercial
applications such as CDs, DVDs, and in data transmission technologies like
DVB and WiMAX.
RST
Rating System Table (ATSC).
RTP
Real Time Transport Protocol.

This Protocol defines a standardized packet format for delivering audio
and video over IP networks.
RTSP
Real Time Streaming Protocol.

A network control protocol designed for use in entertainment and
communications systems to control streaming media servers. Used for
establishing and controlling media sessions between end points.
RU
Rack Unit. A unit of measure used to describe the height of equipment

intended for mounting in a 19-inch rack or a 23-inch rack. One rack unit is
1.75 inches (44.45 mm) high.
Scrambling
Alteration of the characteristics of a television signal in order to prevent

unauthorized reception of the information in clear form.
SBR
Spectral Band Replication.

SBR is a tool used in HE-AAC for broadcast transmissions.
SD
Standard Definition.
SDI
Serial Digital Interface.
SDT
Service Description Table.

A mandatory Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) SI table, that provides
information in the SI stream about the services in the system; for example,
the name of the service, the service provider, etc.
SDTV
Standard Definition Television.
SI
Service Information
Digital information describing the delivery system, content and scheduling
/timing of broadcast data streams (DVB).
SIF
Source Input Format

A video format that was developed to allow the storage and transmission
of digital video. The SIF format specifies resolutions of the following:
NTSC (525/59.94 SIF format) is 352x240 x29.97fps
PAL (625/50 SIF format) is 352x288 x25.00fps
442
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Glossary
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers.

A Standards Organization devoted to advancing theory and application in
motion imaging, including film, television, video, computer imaging, and
telecommunications.
SNG
Satellite News-Gathering.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol.

SNMP provides a means to monitor and control network devices, and to
manage configurations, statistics collection, performance, and security.
SNMP network management is based on the client and server model. Each
managed host runs a process called an agent. The agent is a server
process that maintains the Management Information Base (MIB) database
for the host. SNMP uses ports 161 and 162.
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol.
SPTS
Single Program Transport Stream.
SRTP
Secure Real Time Transport Protocol.
StatMux
Statistical Multiplexing
Statistical multiplexing is a proven technique used to dynamically assign
compression bitrates based upon video complexity and motion
requirements of individual channels. The principle of statistical
multiplexing is that a group or pool of encoders shares a fixed quantity
of bandwidth. The bandwidth is allocated on a frame by frame basis by a
centralized controller (multiplexer) so the encoder with the most complex
video is allowed to borrow more bandwidth from the pool of encoders
with less difficult video.
STB
Set-Top Box.
A device that provides access to the Broadband broadcast or Internet and
displays information on a TV screen.
STT
System Time Table (ATSC).
SVC
Scalable Video Coding.

SVC is the name for the Annex G extension of the H.264/MPEG-4 AVC video
compression standard. SVC standardizes the encoding of a high-quality
video bitstream that also contains one or more subset bitstreams. A subset
video bitstream is derived by dropping packets from the larger video to
reduce the bandwidth required for the subset bitstream. The subset
bitsteam can represent a lower spatial resolution (smaller screen), lower
temporal resolution (lower frame rate), or lower quality video signal.
Switch (Network)
A network switch is a computer networking device that connects network

segments.
An Ethernet switch operates at the data link layer of the OSI model to
create a separate collision domain for each switch port. With 4 computers
(e.g., A, B, C, and D) on 4 switch ports, A and B can transfer data back and
forth, while C and D also do so simultaneously, and the two conversations
will not interfere with one another.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

443
Glossary
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol.

One of the main protocols in TCP/IP networks. TCP enables two hosts to
establish a connection and exchange streams of data. TCP guarantees
delivery of data and packets, that will be delivered in the same order in
which they were sent. While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery
of the data, TCP takes care of keeping track of the individual units of data
(called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing through
the Internet.
TCP / IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

Two interrelated protocols that are part of the Internet protocol suite. TCP
operates on the OSI transport layer and breaks data into packets. IP
operates on the OSI network layer and routes the packets. While IP takes
care of handling the actual delivery of the data, TCP takes care of keeping
track of the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is
divided into for efficient routing through the Internet. TCP/IP allows the
construction of very large networks with little central management.
TDT
Time and Date Table.

A mandatory Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) SI table that supplies the
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) time and date.
Time-Code
A sequence of numeric codes generated at regular intervals by a timing

system.
Time-stamp
A sequence of characters, denoting the date and/or time at which a certain

event occurred.
Timeslicing
Time slicing is a technique that is used in DVB-H applications to increase

the battery life time of mobile DVB-H receivers (for instance cell phones,
PDAs, etc.). Chunks of data will be transmitted in bursts, which allows the
mobile receiver to be switched off when no data is transmitted. During this
inactivity the mobile receiver can scan neighboring cells in order to select
the best reception conditions and be prepared for seamless handovers.
TOT
Time Offset Table.

An optional (DVB) SI table that supplies the actual UTC-time also including
time offset information coded as MJD.
TS
Transport Stream.
A multiplex of several Elementary Streams that are contained in packets.
TSDT
Transport Stream Descriptor Table.

A mandatory MPEG-2 PSI table that describes which type of Transport
stream it is in (i.e. DVB, ATSC etc.). It may also contain other descriptors.
TVCT
Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table (ATSC).
UDP
User Data Protocol.

A connectionless protocol, like TCP, that runs on top of IP networks. Unlike
TCP/IP, UDP/IP provides very few error recovery services, offering instead
a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network without
acknowledgement for guaranteed delivery.
Unicast
Unicast is communication between a single sender and a single receiver

over a network.
UTC
Coordinated Universal Time.

UTC is the time standard by which the world regulates clocks and time. In
casual use, UTC corresponds to Greenwich Mean Time (or GMT).
444
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Glossary
VANC
Vertical Ancillary.
Ancillary packets located in the vertical blanking interval.
VBI
Vertical Blanking Interval.

In analog video, the interval after the last displayed line of video in a field
and before the first displayed line of video in the next field, during which
a television receiver will synchronize vertically.
VBR
Variable Bit-Rate.
VBR is an encoding method that is designed to achieve a better video
quality vs. bitrate ratio than CBR (Constant Bit-Rate) encoding. This is
achieved by continuously changing the bit rate during the encoding
process depending on the picture complexity. Refer to Statmux.
VBV
Video Buffering Verifier

The video buffering verifier is a theoretical MPEG video buffer model used
to ensure that an encoded video stream can be correctly buffered and
played back at the decoder device.
VCT
Virtual Channel Table (ATSC).

A VCT contains a list of all the channels that are or will be online, along
with their attributes. This table is critically important as it contains the set
of data that enables a receiver to tune and locate the service being
broadcast.
VGA
Video Graphics Array (640x480 pixels).
VITC
Vertical Interval Time Code.

VITC is Time-Code information inserted in the vertical blanking of the
video signal.
VITS
Vertical Interval Test Signal.

VITS signals may be inserted in the lines of the vertical blanking interval to
permit on the air testing of video circuit functions and adjustments.
VLAN
Virtual Local Area Network.

A local area network with a definition that maps workstations on some
other basis than geographic location (for example, by department, type of
user, or primary application). The virtual LAN controller can change or add
workstations and manage load balancing and bandwidth allocation more
easily than with a physical picture of the LAN. Network Management
System software keeps track of relating the virtual picture of the local area
network with the actual physical picture. VLANs are based on logical
instead of physical connections.
VPS
Video Programming System.

VPS is an older system which helped video recorders in Germany to
automatically record TV broadcasts correctly. Since replaced with Program
Delivery Control (PDC).
Weighted prediction Allows an encoder to specify the use of a scaling and offset when
performing motion compensation, and providing a significant benefit in
performance in special cases, such as fade-to-black, fade-in, and
cross-fade transitions.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

445
Glossary
WSS
Wide Screen Signalling.

WSS is digital information embedded in the TV signal describing the
qualities of the broadcast, in particular the intended aspect ratio of the
image. This can be used by a widescreen TV to switch to the correct display
mode.
The WSS signal is placed in line 23 (PAL) and lines 20/283 (PAL-M and
NTSC) and has 14 data bits.
WST
World System Teletext.

WST is the name of a standard for encoding and displaying teletext
information, which is used in 625 line / 50 Hz television systems (ITUR 653).
It is used for teletext throughout Europe today. The actual version of the
WST is Word System B.
Y (Luminance)
Defines the brightness of a TV picture.
446
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Index
Numerics
1 Gb/s .........................................................233
100 Mb/s ....................................................233
1280 x 720 p @ 50 Hz ..............................209
1280 x 720 p @ 59,94 Hz .........................209
1280 x 720 p @ 60 Hz ..............................209
188 + 16 bytes ...........................................228
188 bytes ....................................................228
1920 x 1080 I @ 25 Hz .............................209
1920 x 1080 I @ 29.97 Hz .......................209
1920 x 1080 I @ 30 Hz .............................209
5.1 Surround ..............................................220
720 x 480 I @ 29.97 Hz ............................209
720 x 576 I @ 25 Hz .........................209, 210
A
AAC Encapsulation ..................................221
AAC Syntax ..............................................221
AAC, decoding ..........................................240
About .........................................................269
AC Mains power supply cord(s) ...............42
Active alarms ..........................................118
Active alarms .............................................118
Active Format Description (AFD) ...243, 244
Activity ..... 184, 201, 226, 228, 229, 235, 242
Activity, Modulator ...................................250
Add Decoder Dual Module ......................145
Add Decoder Single Module ....................145
Add Encoder Dual Module ...............123, 181
Add Encoder Single Module ....................123
Add Modulator Module ............................156
Add MPEG Encoder Module ...123, 181, 182
Additional service component formats, TS ...
338
AFD, VBI ...............................................346

AFD/BAR, ANC .....................................347
Alarms Panel ...........................................118
Alignment ..................................................215
Ancillary Transparent (RDD-11) .............244
Ancillary Transparent (SMPTE-2038) ....243,
244
Antialiasing ...............................................105
Apply .................................................117, 161
ASI IN1, Modulator ................................380
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
ASI IN2, Modulator ................................ 380

ASI OUT, Modulator .............................. 380
ASI Output ................................................ 228
Audio formats, Decoding ........................ 372
Audio Mode .............................................. 220
Audio source ............................................. 218
Audio Standard ......................................... 219
Auto backup delay .................... 193, 195, 208
Auto Negociation ..................................... 233
Auto nominal delay .................................. 193
Auto vertical size ...................................... 105
Automation ....................................... 113, 203
B
Bar Pattern ................................................ 209
Bar pattern ......................................... 207, 240
Bitrate ........................................................ 227
Bitrate, Audio ........................................... 220
Bitrate, Video ............................................ 212
Bitrate, Video encoding .......................... 341
Black Pattern ............................................. 209
Black pattern ..................................... 207, 240
Blink Slot x ............................................... 102
Broadcaster IP address, Zixi .................... 237
Broadcaster UDP port, Zixi ..................... 237
Burst .......................................................... 228
C
C&C, Manager board ............................. 320
CABAC ..................................................... 213
Cabling ..................................................... 40
Capabilities, Decoding ............................ 372
Capatibilities, Audio ............................... 343
Carried Modulated, Modulator ................ 251
CAVLC ...................................................... 213
CC Closed caption, ANC ........................ 347
CC Closed caption, VBI ......................... 346
Channel Mode ................................... 206, 234
Check ................................................ 117, 161
Chroma Format ......................................... 211
Clean NIT ................................................. 227
Cleaning chassis ventilation grids ........... 265
Clear .......................................................... 119
Clock Reference, Modulator .................... 252
Closed alarms ......................................... 119
Closed Caption EIA 708-B .............. 243, 244
447
Index
Closed GOP .............................................. 213

Command Line Interface ..................51, 256
Comment .................................................. 257
Component PID allocation ......................338
Configuration Panel
Automation tab .................................113
List of Configurations .......................115
Statistics tab ..............................103, 111
Connecting the cables ...............................58
Connection Mode, Zixi ............................ 237
Copy .......................................................... 117
Cost ........................................................... 233
Creating a new configuration ..................121
Customizing the Configuration Tabs Layout
94
D
D - Column deph ...................................... 230
Data Packet ............................................... 228
Data, Modulator ....................................... 252
Date and time
Displaying ...........................................57
Setting .................................................57
Default configuration ..............................203
Default Gateway ....................................... 232
Delay, Audio ..................................... 221, 240
Description ................................ 118, 119, 120
Descriptor, External component .............. 173
Destination IP @ ...................................... 233
Destination IP address .............................. 229
Destination UDP port ....................... 229, 237
Dimensions .............................................311
Disable Service ......................................... 209
Display points ........................................... 105
Division ..................................................... 105
Division count .......................................... 105
Dolby Digital Pass-Thru, decoding ......... 240
DTVCC Closed caption, ANC ................347
Dual Channels .......................................... 220
Dump ........................................................ 270
Dump report .............................................. 269
E
Edit ............................................................ 203
Edit/Unedit ................................................ 117
EMC ground .............................................40
EN 301775 ................................................ 241
Enable Ancillary / VBI ............................ 241
Enable audio ............................................. 240
Enable interface ........................................ 232
Encapsulation ........................................... 237
448
Encoding format ................................211, 239

Encoding formats and bitrates, Audio .....344
Encrypted Session Word (ESW) ..............201
End .............................................................119
End date .....................................................120
End to End delay .......................................212
End to End Delay, Encoding ...................342
Entropy Coding ......................................342
Entropy coding ..........................................213
Eqcod .........................................................258
eqcod .........................................................258
Equipment code ........................................259
Extent .........................................................120
F
FEC block Duration, Zixi .........................230
FEC block, Zixi .........................................237
FEC Mode .................................................230
FEC overhead, Zixi ...........................229, 237
FEC protection ..........................................230
FEC, RTP .......................................321, 335
Field ...........................................................213
Forward error Correction ..........................237
Frame .........................................................213
Frame per PES ..........................................220
Frame synchronizer ..................................244
Frame, Modulator .....................................248
Freeze on last valid frame ........................240
Freq. Calculator, Modulator .....................251
Front Panel
Alarms screen .....................................75
Device booting screnn ........................73
Info screen ..........................................80
IP Settings screen ................................76
LCD CAL screen ................................79
Main board information screen ...........80
Main Menu screen ..............................75
Reboot screen .....................................79
Recall screen .......................................77
Setup screen ..................................76, 81
Status screen .......................................74
Front panel ................................................26
Front Panel Description
Device status LEDs .............................68
Keypad ................................................69
Power Supply LEDs ............................69
Screen tree menu .................................71
frudisp .....................................................260
Full Transparent ........................................243
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Index
G
Global Unique Identifier, Modulator .......252
GOP Size (N) ............................................213
GOP, Encoding .......................................342
GPIO .......................................................322
GPS coordinates, Modulator ....................252
H
H-264 (MPEG-4) ......................................211
HD Teletext (OP-47) .................................244
HD Teletext (OP47) ..................................241
HD to SD Downscaling, Decoding .........368
Headroom ..................................................215
I
Id ................................................................257
IGMP .........................................................233
IGMPv2 .....................................................233
IGMPv3 .....................................................233
IGMPv3 with source address ...................233
Injected id ..................................................201
Input backup mode ....................193, 195, 207
Input Bitrate Management, Modulator ....381
Input Format, Audio .................................218
Input pair ...................................................207
Input PID, External component ................173
Input redundancy status ............................239
Input Standard ...........................................209
Input standard ............................................184
Input Stream Management, Modulator ....381
insopt .......................................................259
Interface Speed ..........................................233
Interface State when disable .....................233
IO1 - IO3, MPEG Decoder .....................364
IO1 - IO3, MPEG Encoder ......................332
IO2 - IO4, MPEG Decoder .....................364
IO2 - IO4, MPEG Encoder ......................333
IO5, MPEG Decoder ...............................365
IP @ ...........................................................232
IP parameters
Displaying ...............................55, 60, 61
Editing ....................................56, 60, 61
IPCounters .................................................111
J
J2K DEC module
Connectors ........................361, 379, 381
K
Key .............................................................257
L
L - Column burst length recovery ............230
LAN 1 and LAN 2, MPEG Decoder .......366
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
LAN 1 and LAN 2, MPEG Encoder ....... 335

LAN 1, LAN 2, Manager board .............. 321
Latency, Zixi ..................................... 229, 237
LCD screen brightness and contrast, setting .
70
LED, MPEG Encoder ............................. 329

LEDs, Manager board ............................. 319
Level .......................................... 118, 119, 120
Level, Audio out ....................................... 245
Link Down ................................................ 233
Link Up/No Multicast .............................. 233
Link Up/No Traffic ................................... 233
Load NIT file ............................................ 227
Login ................................................ 52, 256
Loss of Ref. Time Out, Modulator .......... 251
Low delay ................................................. 212
lsopt ................................................. 257, 259
M
Management ............................................. 102
Max IPDV ................................................. 237
Maximum power .................................... 310
MBAFF ..................................................... 213
Miscellaneous features, Audio ........ 345, 372
Miscellaneous features, Encoding .......... 342
Missing IP Packets after FEC, IP counters ...
112
Missing IP Packets, IP counters .............. 111

Modcod, Modulator .......................... 248, 249
Mode, BISS ............................................... 201
Modulation, DVB-DSNG ....................... 383
Modulation, DVB-S ............................... 383
Modulation, DVB-S2 .............................. 384
Modulator Frequency, Modulator ............ 251
MON Out, Modulator ............................. 379
Monitoring Output, Modulator ................ 247
Mono Left ................................................. 220
Mono Right ............................................... 220
Monochrome lines, VBI ......................... 346
Monochrome Transparent ........................ 243
Moving Pattern ......................................... 209
Moving pattern ......................................... 207
MPEG Decoder
LED .................................................. 361
MPEG Modulator
LED .................................................. 379
MPEG1 Layer II, decoding ...................... 240
MPEG-2 .................................................... 211
Multicast @ ............................................... 237
449
Index
N
Name ................................. 206, 234, 237, 246
Netmask ............................................ 232, 233
New ................................................... 116, 121
Next Hop ................................................... 233
NIT Actual ................................................ 227
No automation ........................................113
No automation .......................................... 204
No IGMP .................................................. 233
No Source Mode ............................... 209, 220
No Video Pid ............................................ 240
Null Packet stuffing .................................. 230
Number ..................................................... 257
Number of TP per IP frame ..................... 230
O
OL Translator, Modulator ........................ 251
OP47 Subtitles ........................................347
Open .......................................................... 116
Open report ............................................... 269
Option id ........................................ 258, 260
Power consumption ........................310, 311

Power outlet ..............................................41
Power supply ..................................306, 309
Power up ...................................................50
PPS, Manager board ...............................320
Profile ........................................................211
Profile selection ........................................184
Profile selection, Scrambling ...................226
Program Number .......................................225
Progressive & Interlaced Conversion, Decoding ...........................................................368
Protective ground ......................................41
R
Rate Adaptation, Modulator .....................249
RDD 11 ......................................................241
Rear panel .................................................26
reboot ...............................................258, 259
Reboot Shelf ..............................................102
Reboot Slot x .............................................102
Received IP Packets, IP counters .............111
Option Key .............................................. 259

Original Network Id ................................. 226
Output format ........................................... 240
Output Level, Modulator ......................... 250
Output Pair ........................................ 201, 242
Output Standard ........................................ 242
Output, Audio .........................................372
Ref .............................................................257
REF IN, Modulator .................................379
REF OUT, Modulator .............................379
Reliability ...............................................316
Remove ......................................................117
Rename ..............................................117, 122
Reverse Spectrum, Modulator ..................250
RF Out, Modulator .................................379
RF Output Tilt, Modulator .......................250
RF Power On Type, Modulator ................251
rmopt .........................................................258
Roll-Off custom value, Modulator ...........248
Roll-Off, Modulator ..................................248
P
P Picture Period (M) ................................ 213
Packet mode .............................................. 228
Pair 1 (IO1 + IO2) ............................ 207, 242
Pair 2 (IO3 + IO4) ............................ 207, 242
Panels ........................................................93
Pass-Thru, Audio ...................................... 240
Password ...........................................52, 256
Phone, Modulator ..................................... 252
Picture Filtering ........................................ 213
Picture Format .......................................... 210
Picture Resolution .................................... 210
Picture Structure, Encoding ....................342
Pid ............................................. 239, 240, 241
Pilots Insertion, Modulator ...................... 248
Pixel offset ................................................ 244
PLS Mode, Modulator ............................. 248
PLS Sequence 1, Modulator .................... 249
PLS Sequence 2, Modulator .................... 249
PMT PID ................................................... 225
Port Number ............................................. 232
Port, IP counters ....................................... 111
450
S
Sample Rate Converter, Audio .................216
Save ...................................................117, 119
Scaling Mode ............................................243
Scaling Type ..............................................243
Schedule .................................................113
Schedule .................................................203
Screen layout ............................................93
SD Aspect Ratio ........................................243
SD to HD Upscaling, Decoding ..............368
SDI Input Pair x ................................125, 182
Select automation ...................................203
Select source IP address ...........................238
Send ...........................................117, 161, 204
Service Id ...................................................239
Service Name ............................225, 238, 239
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
Index
Service selection mode .............................238

Service Selection modes, Decoding ........367
Services and components number ...........338
Session Word (SW) ...................................201
SIG Editor
GUI Description ................................273
Operation ..................................276, 300
Overview ...........................................272
PC Setup ...........................................276
SigEditor ....................................................300
Signaling .................................................338
Signaling Mode .........................................219
Silence .......................................................220
Sine Tone (1000 Hz) .................................220
Sine Tone (400 Hz) ...................................220
Slot Number ..............................206, 234, 246
Slot x - Modulator .....................................157
Slot x - MPEG Encoder ....................125, 181
SMPTE 2038 .............................................241
Snapshot panel ..........................................98
Software options
Displaying .........................................257
Recovering lost keys .........................259
Uninstalling ...............................258, 260
Source IP address ......................................238
Source selector ..................................207, 235
Source UDP port .......................................230
Source, Audio .........................................343
Source, Audio out .............................245, 246
Sources .............................. 123, 145, 156, 181
Specifications
Electrical ...........................................306
Mechanical ........................................311
Standard compliance ...............................386
Standard delay ...........................................212
Standard, DVB-DSNG ............................383
Standard, DVB-S ....................................383
Standard, Modulator .........................248, 249
Standards, DVB-S2 .................................384
Start ....................................................118, 119
Start date ....................................................120
Statistic ......................................................103
Status ..........................................................257
Status bar ..................................................95
Stereo .........................................................220
Stop Video .................................................209
Stream (Rx IP@
port VLAN), IP counters ....................111
Stream Id, Zixi ...................................229, 237
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
Stream Input Loss, Modulator ................. 251

Symbol Rate, Modulator .................. 248, 249
SYN, Manager board .............................. 319
SYNC, Manager board ........................... 319
System layer, TS ..................................... 338
T
Teletext ...................................................... 243
Teletext, VBI .......................................... 346
Term, Manager board ............................. 320
Test Mode, Modulator ...................... 248, 249
Time .......................................................... 105
TIME code (ATC) ............................ 243, 244
Time Code (ATC) ................................... 347
Time Out, Modulator ................................ 251
TOS (hexadecimal value) ......................... 231
Transparent lines, VBI ............................ 346
Transparent mode, VANC, HD SDI ANC ....
347
Transponder Band, Modulator ................. 251

Transponder Freq, Modulator .................. 251
Transport format ....................................... 241
Transport Stream Id .................................. 227
TS bitrate ................................................ 338
TS bitrate computing ................................ 227
TS Monitoring, Decoding ....................... 367
TS Multiplexing ..................................... 338
TS number .............................................. 338
TS packet size ........................................... 228
TS Processing, Decoding ........................ 367
TS Selection, Modulator .................. 157, 247
TTL ........................................................... 231
TX Encapsulation ..................................... 229
U
Uncompressed (SMPTE 302M) or Dolby E
Pass-Thru, decoding ................................. 240
Uncompressed Audio Mode (SMPTE 302M)
220
Uptime, IP counters .................................. 111

V
Value scale color ....................................... 105
Values ........................................................ 105
Ventilation ........................................ 32, 315
Video formats, Decoding ........................ 368
Video formats, Encoding, Decoding ....... 339
Video profiles, Decoding ........................ 368
Virtual Source @ ...................................... 230
Virtual Source IP @ ................................. 230
VITC, VBI .............................................. 346
VLAN Id ........................................... 230, 238
451
Index
VLAN tagging .................................. 230, 238

VPS ........................................................... 243
VPS, VBI ................................................346
W
Weight ....................................................314
Window duration ...................................... 105
WSS .......................................................... 243
WSS Blanking .......................................... 210
WSS, VBI ...............................................346
X
XLR Input ................................. 215, 216, 246
XLR Output .............................................. 245
452
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


ViBE - CP6000 UserManual V04.10 Eda PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ViBE - CP6000 UserManual V04.10 Eda PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100

Product Description ............................................................... 26

Connecting the Signal Cables............................................... 44

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Dual Channels MPEG Board .................................................

Screen Description ............................................................... 71

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Procedure for changing parameter values .......................... 87

Screen Layout ........................................................................ 93

Basic Settings....................................................................... 121

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Selecting the Ethernet Input Interface ............................... 147

Advanced Settings.............................................................. 162

GUI Description................................................................... 206

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

SDI Output: Pair x Dialog Box............................................. 242

Displaying Unit information ............................................... 260

Installing or Replacing an LCD Front Panel (CP6000) ....... 261

Overview .............................................................................. 272

Download application ........................................................ 289

SigEditor Tool ..................................................................... 300

Chassis Specifications ........................................................ 317

Manager Board Specifications .......................................... 318

MPEG Encoder Specifications ........................................... 327

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Single Channel MPEG Encoder Board ............................... 328

MPEG Decoder Specifications ............................................ 359

DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications ....................... 378

Standard Compliance.......................................................... 386

Base Systems ...........................................................................

Appendix ............................................................................. 402

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Glossary ........................................................ 431

Index ............................................................. 447

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Preface Standard Documentation Set

a Quick Start Guide

a V04.10 Release Note

The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 User Manual contains background

About this Manual

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Preface About this Manual

The manual is organized into the following chapters and appendixes:

Chapter 1 Overview gives a general description of the equipment

Chapter 2 Installation and setup provides the procedures required

Chapter 3 Chassis Configuration gives the rules to be observed

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation describes how to use the Front

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface details how to use the Web

Chapter 6 Servicing describes how to install software options via

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting describes the procedure to follow when

Chapter 8 Tools describes the Equipment Setup tool and the

Appendix A Technical Specifications gives specifications of the

Appendix B Safety Instructions gives instructions related to risk of

Appendix C Regulatory Notices provides device compliances

Appendix D Customer Services indicates what you should do if

Appendix E Alarms gives the list of alarms which may be visible in

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10

Preface Conventions Used in This Manual

Conventions Used in This Manual

Terms in this Manual

Warning statements identify conditions or practices that may result